GIFT  OF 


V^^^yUX^x6l-xl_        Jsf&s*A*4^ 


— 1 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE  IN  THE 
LIGHT  OF  THE 
SOLAR  SYSTEM 


BY 

JEAN  FRANCIS  LEROY 


PRINTED  BY 
V.  S.  HILLIS  CO.,  SAN  JOSE,  CALIF. 


•  -- 


Copyright,  1913 

u  M.  A.  MYLES 
A  ll  rights  resented 


INDEX 


Page 
Introduction    9 

Does    History    repeat    itself 19 

Nature  of  the   Planets  31 

Indications    of    the    Signs    33 

Methods    of    Developing   a    chart 37 

Religion    50 

Education    64 

Dress    75 

Love  and   Marriage   82 

Money  and   Heaven  109 

Traveling    134 

Winters    153 

Actresses    172 

Musicians 181 

Painters    193 

Inventors    206 

Land,    Engineering    and    Building    212 

Law    and    Medicine    222 

Children    235 

Philanthropists    255 

War    268 

Sports    278 

Business   under    12th    Sign 281 

Numbers    287 

Dreams    293 

280801 


EXPLANATION 


It  may  be  observed  that  two  chapters  have 
been  crowded  out  of  this  volume.  We  hope 
however  to  publish  three  volumes,  the  2nd  deal- 
ing with  the  inmates  of  prisons,  asylums,  hos- 
pitals &c,  and  the  third  with  rulers  and  public 
events;  or  what  is  commonly  known  as  mun- 
dane astrology.  We  trust  that  an  ephemeris,  will 
shortly  be  published  in  connection  with  these 
books.  The  ephemeris  commonly  employed  and 
known  as  the  geocentric  ephemeris  can  not  be 
used.  By  our  system  there  are  no  retrogrades 
and  no  aspects  excepting  the  conjunction.  An 
opposition  is  regarded  as  equivalent  to  a  con- 
junction, and  many  more  conjunctions  are  form- 
ed by  this  method. 

Everything  that  would  not  stand  a  severe 
practical  test  has  been  discarded.  Some  swear 
by  Ptolemy  and  some  by  anything  they  see  in 
print,  but  give  us  the  imperishable  truth,  found- 
ed upon  a  rock  if  we  do  have  to  dig  for  it. 

This  being  the  first  edition  errors  will  doubtless 
be  found  in  it.  Any  errors  in  calculation  will 
gladly  be  corrected  if  the  publisher  is  notified. 


INTRODUCTION 


We  are  not  going  to  write  a  preface  and  introduction  to 
this  work,  because  we  wish  every  word  of  it  to  be  read, 
and  where  there  is  both  preface  and  introduction,  either 
one  or  both  is  sure  to  be  skipped.  We  not  only  wish  every 
word  to  be  read,  but  we  believe  that  it  requires  to  be  care- 
fully read,  not  less  than  three  times.  Some  students  call 
Planetary  Influence,  a  deep  study,  and  so  it  is,  but  we  have 
endeavored  to  simplify  the  language  as  far  as  possible 
avoiding  all  technical  and  high  sounding  terms,  and  using 
illustrating  charts  abundantly,  so  that  we  think  with  sev- 
eral careful  readings  any  one  may  become  master  of  the 
contents  without  reaily  hard  study.  Some  may  master 
it  thoroughly  with  one  reading;  they  may  even  see  more 
than  the  writer;  we  hope  they  will.  There  is  nothing  that 
requires  to  be  memorized  excepting  the  indications  of  the 
Signs  and  indications  of  the  planets  in  the  Signs.  The 
book  will  prove  much  pleasanter  reading  if  these  are  first 
fixed  upon  the  mind.  Those  who  possess  Butler's  Solar 
Biology  may  proceed  to  work  out  their  birthdates  from 
the  Ephemeris  contained  in  it,  according  to  the  directions 
we  have  given.  By  applying  to  the  Esoteric  Publishing 
Co.,  Applegate,  California,  the  Ephemeris  to  1915  will  be 
sent  for  a  few  cents  additional.  We  should  strongly  advise 
every  one  into  whose  hands  this  book  falls  to  learn  to  work 
out  their  own  Charts.  Don't  go  to  some  one  who  will 
charge  you  a  dollar  or  five  dollars  for  a  reading;  it  might 
not  then  be  correct,  and  besides  you  want  to  thoroughly 
understand  it  yourself,  so  that  you  can  watch  it  every  day, 
and  learn  where  the  good  points  in  your  Horoscope  are, 
and  when  you  can  be  most  successful  along  any  given  line. 
With  the  instructions  given  in  this  book,  the  outline  may  be 
worked  out  in  thirty  minutes. 


2— 


10 


INTRODUCTION 


We  have  only  been  able  in  this  work  to  touch  upon  the 
different  phases  of  the  question.  We  might  take  any  one  of 
the  chapters  we  have  written  and  enlarge  upon  it.  Many 
of  them  would  demand  a  volume  in  order  to  do  them 
justice.  We  hope  however  to  devote  another  volume  to 
the  inmates  of  our  asylums  and  penitentiaries,  if  birth- 
dates  can  be  secured.  •  If  any  light  can  be  thrown  upon  the 
mysteries  which  life  holds  in  these  places,  it  is  certainly 
needed.  As  we  have  noticed  further  on,  we  do  not  believe 
that  events  can  be  accurately  foretold;  if  we  can  in  any 
manner,  or  in  any  degree,  change  our  own  lives,  then 
events  cannot  be  accurately  foretold.  We  are  not  making 
any  pretention  to  fortune  telling,  but  we  do  positively  main- 
tain, and  have  endeavored  to  prove,  that  there  is  a  power- 
ful influence  emanating  from  the  unseen,  and  regulated 
by  the  position  of  the  planets,  which  brings  prosperity  and 
adversity,  just  as  we  come  under  good  or  bad  influences. 
We  have  noted  in  a  large  number  of  Horoscopes  the  points 
which  brought  success  and  promotion  and  the  points  which 
brought  failure  and  misery.  Those  whose  good  and  bad 
planets  form  conjunctions  around  the  Horoscope  do  not 
have  the  same  tips  and  downs  in  life  as  those  who  have 
the  good  planets  in  one  section  and  the  bad  planets  in 
another.  The  former  are  meeting  with  obstacles  and  over- 
coming them  all  their  lives,  while  the  latter  are  liable  to 
rise  to  great  heights,  only  to  be  cast  dow^n  again. 

We  are  taking  up  this  study  in  the  order  of  the  Signs. 
Religion,  education,  love,  marriage,  and  divorce,  coming 
under  the  1st.  sign.  Money  and  heaven  come  under  the 
2nd.  sign.  Under  the  3rd.  we  bring  writers,  musicians 
painters  and  actresses;  although  actresses  and  singers  be- 
long more  properly  to  the  llth;  for  convenience  however 
we  have  classified  them  all  together  under  the  3rd.  Travel- 
ing also  comes  under  the  3rd.  Under  the  4th  we  bring 
inventors,  land,  engineering  and  building,  law  and  medi- 
cine; although  law  belongs  more  properly  to  the  3rd  Sign. 


INTRODUCTION  11 

As  we  have  not  devoted  very  much  space  to  either,  we  have 
classed  them  together.  Under  the  5th.  we  bring  children, 
philanthropists  and  rulers.  Under  the  12th  we  bring  war, 
sports,  and  business  coming  under  the  12th  Sign.  We 
merely  introduce  the  questions  of  crime  and  insanity;  to 
these  we  hope  to  devote  an  entire  volume,  provided  we  can 
secure  birthdates.  After  glancing  over  a  dozen  or  more  books 
on  criminology,  we  have  failed  to  find  a  single  birthdate; 
no  one  seems  to  have  suspected  that  the  planetary  con- 
ditions at  birth  had  any  connection  with  these  afflictions. 

Our  aim  in  publishing  this  book  has  been  to  place  within 
easy  reach  of  all  persons  young  and  old  the  means  of  study- 
ing their  own  lives  in  the  light  of  the  Solar  system. 

We  have  never  given  an  astrological  reading,  and  probably 
never  will.  We  can  each  study  our  own  lives  much  better 
than  any  one  can  study  them  for  us. 

If  any  person  desires  to  be  critical,  we  do  not  object, 
knowing  that  a  man's  enemies  are  frequently  his  best  ad- 
vertisers. Hoping  these  simple  talks  upon  the  subject 
before  us  may  be  received  in  the  spirit  in  which  they  are 
given,  we  leave  them  with  you;  as  we  have  received  the 
message,  so  have  we  delivered  it  to  you;  To  those  who 
have  not  investigated  the  question  of  planetary  influence, 
and  are  not  inclined  to  believe  in  it,  we  would  say:  Do  not 
condemn  us  without  a  trial,  and  to  those  who  are  laboring 
in  the  work  of  reform  we  would  say:  The  stars  are  with 
you.  Under  the  motto,  "fiat-justicia  ruat  caelum,"  press  on 
avoiding  as  far  as  possible  acts  of  violence  and  undue  ex- 
citement. God  still  rules,  and  justice  will  be  done  though 
the  heavens  should  fall. 


UNFOLDING  OF  THE  TRUTH  13 

CHAPTER  I. 
Unfolding  of  the  Truth. 

Prior  to  the  year  1905,  we  regarded  so-called  fortune 
telling  by  the  position  of  the  stars  as  merely  a  pleasant 
pastime,  much  the  same  as  reading  by  cards;  although  for 
a  number  of  years  we  had  noticed  that  certain  difficulties 
which  beset  our  path  appeared  periodically.  We  had  even 
gone  so  far  as  to  blame  the  Moon  when  things  went  wrong. 
In  the  year  1905,  however,  we  met  a  man  who  believed 
strongly  in  planetary  influence,  and  our  first  serious  thoughts 
on  the  subject  came  as  a  result  of  our  conversation  with 
him.  We  never  met  the  man  again  but  resolved  if  there 
was  anything  to  be  learned  along  that  line  we  would  seize 
the  first  opportunity  to  break  in  upon  it.  Shortly  after- 
ward we  called  upon  a  lady  practitioner  in  Astrology.  She 
gave  a  palm  reading,  and  when  asked  for  an  astrological 
reading  took  our  birth  date  and  told  us  that  we  should 
choose  our  friends  from  certain  signs  and  avoid  those  under 
certain  signs.  "Fire  and  water,"  she  said,  "would  not  mix/' 
and  that  was  the  extent  of  the  reading.  When  she  saw 
that  we  appeared  skeptical,  she  produced  a  small  volume 
and  read  a  page  or  more  corroborating  what  she  had  said. 
We  left  her  apartments  feeling  that  fools  and  their  money 
were  easily  parted.  We  then  ransacked  the  stores  and 
libraries  for  books,  and  probably  read  a  dozen  or  more, 
but  from  two  books  we  received  what  proved  to  be  valu- 
able information.  No  one  book  contained  anything  more 
than  fragments  of  the  Science. 

In  reading  Butler's  Solar  Biology  we  discovered  that 
he  had  published  an  Ephemeris  giving  the  position  of  the 
planets  as  they  would  appear  from  the  Sun  which  is  the 
centre  of  the  Solar  System.  He  claimed  that  certain  phases 
and  conjunctions  of  the  Moon  indicated  certain  traits  of 
character  which  appeared  in  the  talents  and  disposition 
of  the  child,  but  he  asserted  that  this  Ephemeris  could  not 


14  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

be  used  in  the  art  of  prognosticating,  or  foretelling  the 
future.  The  Ephemeris  universally  used  by  astrologers 
so  far  as  we  have  seen,  records  the  position  as  the  planets 
appear  from  the  earth. 

Now  we  want  you  to  get  the  difference  between  the  two 
clearly  and  definitely  fixed  on  the  mind.  You  will  see  that 
the  planets  as  they  would  appear  from  the  Sun  as"the  centre 
of  the  Solar  System  complete  a  perfect  revolution  in  the 
Zodiac  in  a  given  time,  with  the  exception  of  the  Moon,  and 
the  Moon  we  do  not  regard  in  the  same  light  as  the  planets. 
The  position  of  the  Moon  is  given  as  it  would  appear  from 
the  earth.  The  Sun  is  regarded  as  practically  stationary, 
its  progress  in  its  orbit  being  so  slow  as  to  produce  no 
appreciable  change  in  thousands  of  years.  It  is  placed  sev- 
eral degrees  in  Aquarius  and  always  there. 

This  is  known  as  the  Heliocentric  position  of  the  planets 
and  is  much  simpler  and  more  easily  understood  than  the 
ordinary  Ephemeris  showing  the  position  of  the  planets 
as  they  appear  from  the  earth.  As  seen  from  our  point  of 
view,  Venus  and  Mercury  complete  their  revolution  between 
the  earth  and  the  Sun,  consequently  they  never  appear  ex- 
cepting in  a  certain  section  of  the  Zodiac.  They  pass  through 
so  many  Signs  and  then  retrograde.  Uranus  and  Saturn  also 
retrograde  according  to  the  Ephemeris.  They  don't  really 
retrograde  but  they  appear  to  from  the  view  we  get  of  them. 
Now  this  produces  a  condition  that  is  at  once  complex  and 
confusing,  and  we  reasoned  the  question  out  after  this  man- 
ner. If  the  position  of  the  planets  indicate  anything,  then 
one  Ephemeris  is  the  right  one  to  use  and  the  other  is 
wrong.  God's  laws  are  not  haphazard  or  unstable.  Either 
the  Heliocentric  Ephemeris  is  the  only  one  to  use  or  it 
signifies  nothing.  God's  laws  are  also  direct  and  simple. 
He  never  builds  a  complex  structure  where  a  simple  one 
will  answer  as  well.  This  fact  gave  us  a  leaning  toward 
the  Heliocentric  Ephemeris.  We  then  conceived  the  idea 
of  forming  a  circle  indicating  the  Zodiac  and  marking  oft" 


UNFOLDING  OF  THE  TRUTH  15 

the  twelve  Signs.  From  a  very  useful  little  book,  we  don't 
recall  the  title,  we  gathered  the  indications  of  the  Signs 
which  have  generally  been  used  in  Astrology,  and  also  got 
the  idea  of  the  Transits  and  the  fact  that  each  day  in  the 
Transits  counted  a  year  in  the  Nativity.  This  done  we 
proceeded  to  work  out  our  own  birth  date  from  Butler's 
Ephemeris.  What  was  our  surprise  to  find  that  it  corres- 
ponded with  our  own  life  as  we  knew  it,  showing  by  the 
position  of  Uranus,  Saturn  and  Mars  where  our  greatest 
difficulties  lay,  and  the  position  of  the  Moon  indicating 
the  time  when  we  had  suffered  most  from  these  afflictions. 
We  proceeded  to  work  out  others  and  soon  found  the 
mathematical  part  of  the  work  easy.  However  we  had  much 
to  learn  regarding  the  effect  of  certain  conjunctions  in 
certain  signs,  and  have  yet  much  to  learn,  but  we  feel  that 
the  foundation  is  surely  laid.  We  tussled  for  a  long  time 
with  the  various  aspects,  square,  opposite,  etc.,  but  decided 
there  was  nothing  in  them.  We  believe  that  planets  chang- 
ing at  the  same  time  in  different  Signs  work  as  strongly  as 
a  conjunction,  if  not  more  so.  We  also  think  it  may  be 
that  planets,  for  example  6°  in  Aquarius  and  6°  in  Aries, 
may  act  as  a  conjunction  but  will  not  guarantee  the  fact. 
We  have  tried  to  secure  information  from  various  prac- 
ticing Astrologers,  but  found  on  ordering  a  trial  reading 
that  often  their  work  counted  for  nothing.  One  man  who  ad- 
vertised extensively  in  the  papers  all  over  the  world  sent  us 
a  trial  reading  and  it  was  absolutely  without  sense  or  rea- 
son. He  based  most  of  his  calculations  on  the  supposition 
that  Mars  governed  the  Sign  of  Scorpio  and  the  Moon 
governed  Cancer  and  so  on.  This  theory  we  had  long  since 
discarded  as  ridiculous.  The  planets  which  occupy  the 
Signs  rule  the  Signs.  A  Sign  devoid  of  planets  is  like  a 
house  without  a  tenant.  Fire  and  water  Signs  we  see  no 
sense  in;  Mars  governs  tire  and  Neptune  governs  water. 
They  are  quite  capable  of  filling  the  office  without  any 
assistance  from  Signs.  Many  persons  have  the  idea  that 


16  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

you  are  born  under  a  lucky  or  unlucky  star.  Such  a  thing 
is  impossible.  You  are  born  under  all  the  stars.  You 
know  your  own  troubles  best  and  that  is  why  you  think 
you  are  born  under  an  unlucky  star.  An  equal  distribution 
of  trouble  we  regard  as  the  one  great  end  attained  by  the 
regulating  influence  of  the  planets.  Some  astrologers 
advertise  a  cure  for  all  the  ills  to  which  flesh  is  heir.  They 
can  insure  a  happy  marriage,  business  success,  faithful 
friends  and  anything  you  desire.  They  are  surely  enjoy- 
ing a  pipe  dream.  It  may  be  possible  that  all  these  troub- 
les can  be  eliminated  but  we  have  no  reason  to  think  so. 
We  have  neither  seen  nor  heard  of  any  one  who  reached 
middle  age,  without  experiencing  serious  trouble  of  some 
kind.  They  may  in  their  brighter  moments  overlook  them, 
and  imagine  they  have  been  having  a  swell  time,  but  we 
have  not  seen  it.  It  is  conceded  that  men  and  women  of 
genius  balance  up  'their  success  with  an  extra  dose  of  suf- 
fering. "Uneasy  lies  the  head  that  wears  a  crown,"  was 
written  long  ago  and  is  equally  true  today.  Money  cannot 
buy  happiness.  We  cannot  all  occupy  the  same  position, 
but  we  can  all  be  equally  happy.  Some  one  must  do  the 
so-called  dirty  work,  but  every  man  should  be  respected 
in  the  position  wrhich  he  occupies.  Caste  and  snobbery 
plainly  emanate  from  a  weak  mind,  and  should  be  placed 
where  they  belong. 

While  we  regard  a  certain  amount  of  suffering  as  a 
necessity,  we  do  not  however  regard  wickedness  as  a  nec- 
essity. That  we  believe  lies  with  the  person  and  those  who 
constitute  his  environment.  A  person  is  sometimes  com- 
pelled to  do  that  which  is  wrong.  The  Bible  tells  us  that 
with  the  temptation  God  will  also  make  a  way  of  escape 
and  we  believe  that  God  will  not  hold  such  persons  as  sin 
through  ignorance  or  compulsion  responsible  for  their  act. 
The  same  Christ  who  prayed  "Father  forgive  them  for 
they  know  not  what  they  do,"  as  he  hung  on  the  cruel 
cross  will  sit  on  the  judgment  throne. 


UNFOLDING  OF  THE  TRUTH  17 

The  fact  of  Planetary  influence  being  proved  beyond 
the  shadow  -of  a  doubt  opens  up  a  wide  field  for  conjecture. 
We  call  it  Planetary  influence  for  w^ant  of  a  better  name. 
God's  law  is  written  in  the  Heavens  in  an  unmistakable 
manner  but  just  how  it  is  communicated  to  the  mind  is  an- 
other question.  The  Bible  favors  the  idea  of  guardian  an- 
gels and  ministering  spirits  and  devils.  We  are  even  told 
that  we  are  encompassed  by  a  great  cloud  of  witnesses. 
Some  one  has  also  suggested  that  the  stars  may  be  angels. 
We  read  that  the  righteous  shall  shine  as  the  stars  for  ever 
and  ever.  Again  we  will  wonder  if  the  whole  solar  system 
exists  for  our  special  benefit.  Astronomers  tell  us  that  the 
Moon  must  practically  be  regarded  as  a  dead  world;  Mer- 
cury always  keeps  the  same  face  toward  the  sun  and  gets 
seven  times  as  much  heat  as  the  earth.  The  day  and  the 
year  on  Venus  are  supposed  to  be  the  same  length.  There 
is  not  enough  water  on  Mars  to  fill  one  of  the  great  lakes 
of  the  earth.  Uranus  and  Neptune  are  so  far  from  the  Sun 
that  heat  and  light  would  be  almost  entirely  wanting.  Ju- 
piter has  no  well  defined  crust  and  the  conditions  there  are 
chaotic.  Saturn  is  in  much  the  same  condition.  If  this 
description  is  correct  none  of  the  planets  are  habitable  at 
the  present  time  and  few  of  them  ever  will  be  habitable. 
Taking  this  fact  into  consideration  it  would  not  be  assum- 
ing too  much  to  claim  that  the  Planetary  system  existed 
for  the  benefit  of  earth's  inhabitants.  The  earth  being  situa- 
ted at  the  best  distance  from  the  Sun  would  be  chosen  as 
the  Arena.  If  God  as  the  Creator  of  the  Universe  sent  his 
"Only  Beloved  Son"  to  suffer  and  die  for  the  redemption  of 
the  human  race  it  would  not  be  assuming  too  much  to  say 
that  a  large  portion  of  the  starry  canopy  existed  for  the 
purpose  of  adding  glory  to  the  earth's  surroundings  more 
especially  if  we  are  encompassed  by  a  great  cloud  of  wit- 
nesses; they  may  also  enjoy  the  glory  of  the  firmament.  The 
whole  Solar  System  was  created  at  one  time  according  to 
{the  account  given  in  Gen.  1,  16;  "And  God  made  two 


18  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

great  lights,  the  greater  light  to  rule  the  day  and  the  lesser 
light  to  rule  the  night;  he  made  the  stars  also."  Verses  7 
and  8  would  leave  us  with  the  impression  that  Heaven  it- 
self hovered  between  the  earth  and  the  clouds.  "And  God 
made  the  firmament  and  divided  the  waters  which  were 
over  the  firmament  from  the  waters  which  were  under  the 
firmament  and  it  was  so,  and  God  called  the  firmament 
Heaven." 


"A  world  there  lies   around, 
A  world  we  do  not  see; 
Yet  the  sweet  closing  of  an  eye, 
May  bring  us   there   to  be." 


DOES  HISTORY  REPEAT  ITSELF  19 

CHAPTER  II. 
Does  History  Repeat  Itself? 

In  glancing  over  the  Ephemeris  for  the  years  1913, 
'14  and  '15,  we  find  that  a  heavy  conjunction  occurs 
in  1915;  the  Sun,  Moon,  Earth,  and  all  the  planets 
come  into  the  conjunction  in  January.  This  discov- 
ery leads  us  to  search  for  a  time  when  a 
similar  phenomenon  occurred ;  about  the  year  1830, 
we  find  a  similar  condition  although  the  conjunction 
does  not  appear  to  be  so  close.  When  the  distance 
between  planets  is  less  than  30°,  we  call  it  a  conjunc- 
tion, and  when  one  passes  another,  it  takes  the  form 
of  an  ecliptic  conjunction.  It  would  be  possible  for 
the  Earth,  Moon,  and  all  the  planets  to  pass  the  Sun 
at  the  same  time ;  we  do  not  know  that  this  has  ever 
occurred  and  we  do  not  know  that  it  ever  will  occur, 
but  the  present  conjunction  is  going  to  run  close. 
We  presume  something  similar  has  taken  place  about 
once  in  eighty  or  eighty  five  years,  from  the  time  of 
the  creation  of  the  world;  although  the  conjunction 
might  not  be  nearly  so  strong.  For  lack  of  an  Eph- 
emeris we  cannot  investigate  further  back  than  1830, 
but  we  find  a  striking  analogy  between  that  period  of 
history  and  the  present  time. 

Chart  No  1  gives  the  position  of  the  planets  for 
January  15,  1915;  Saturn  is  30°  from  the  Sun,  but 
the  others -are  huddled  together  so  close  that  we  can 
scarcely  find  space  for  their  names.  Saturn  will  pass 
the  sun  in  1917  or  1918,  and  a  full  conjunction  may  be 
formed  in  1919 ;  it  would  be  impossible  to  say  posi- 
tively without  a  proper  Ephemeris  for  that  date;  but 
1920  will  see  the  conjunction  broken  up.  At  times  it 
will  be  very  strong  during  the  next  seven  years,  but 
we  would  expect  1915  and  1919  to  mark  important 
periods  in  history. 


20 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


Ah.  a. 


DOES  HISTORY  REPEAT  ITSELF  21 

Chart  Xo.  2  gives  us  an  idea  of  the  position  in  1830, 
although  the  planets  never  form  a  conjunction  so 
strong  as  that  which  is  just  ahead.  In  this  chart 
they  are  like  "pigs  in  clover",  when  one  comes  in 
another  goes  out ;  however  it  is  strong  enough  to  pro- 
duce very  decided  results ;  a  glance  at  that  period  will 
prove  interesting. 

In  Europe  we  find  Turkey  and  Greece  engaged  in 
conflict.  Greece  gained  her  independence  after  six 
years  of  warfare  which  started  with  a  rising  in  the 
Morea  in  1821,  and  was  finally  settled  May  7th,  1832. 
Many  times  during  these  wars  the  whole  of  Europe 
became  embroiled  and  a  revolutionary  spirit  and  feel- 
ing of  unrest  pervaded  not  only  all  Europe  but  Nor- 
thern Africa  as  well. 

Of  Mexico  we  learn  that  in  1825  her  independence 
was  acknowledged  by  every  foreign  power  excepting 
Spain ;  war  followed.  Of  this  war  it  is  said  that  it 
was  stained  with  excesses  and  atrocities  on  both 
sides ;  every  commander  being  allowed  to  hunt  down 
and  slaughter  the  insurgents  like  brutes.  History 
tells  us  that  from  1824  to  1826  the  nation  was  em- 
broiled in  an  interminable  series  of  revolutions,  hav- 
ing to  face  at  the  same  time  serious  national  issues. 

In  order  to  form  an  idea  of  the  condition  of  the 
United  States  during  this  period  we  copy  a  list  of 
headings  from  a  well-known  history.  It  reads  as  fol- 
lows :  "Hot  tariff  disputes,  Republican  party  dis- 
solved, Gag  rule,  Anti-Slavery  petition,  Angry  scenes 
in  the  House,  Secession  of  Southern  members,  Fin- 
ancial embarrassment,  The  Administration  arrainged, 
Distress  of  the  poor,  New  York  fire,  Flour  riots,  Mob 
spirit  increasing,  New  strikes  and  riots,  Anti-Slavery 
tumult,  Gag  rule  adopted."  A  writer  also  gives  the 
following  word  picture  of  the  situation.  "The  mob 
spirit  of  1834  seemed  in  the  next  few  years  to  increase 


22  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

rather  than  to  diminish.  Society  seemed  everywhere 
unhinged,  and  .the  demon  of  blood  and  slaughter  was 
let  loose  upon  it.  The  columns  of  the  weekly  press 
teemed  with  news  of  murders,  riots  and  executions. 
Mobs  were  taking  the  law  into  their  own  hands  and 
settling  local  disputes  after  nature's  own  fashion. 
Lynch  law  in  the  Mississippi  region  strung  up  the  rob- 
ber, gambler,  and  pickpocket  on  the  nearest  tree.  Irish 
riots  over  O'Connell  and  the  Battle  of  the  Boyne, 
Nigger  riots,  Native  American  riots,  riots  at  the  pri-^ 
maries  and  the  polls,  riots  of  the  poor  against  the 
rich.  The  struggle  between  labor  and  capital  which 
our  modern  enterprise  engenders  began  with  this 
period."  In  addition  to  this  1832  was  known  as  the 
Cholera  summer.  The  Anti-Mason  party  also  flour- 
ished from  1826  to  1832.  This  party  prospered  for  a 
time,  but  triangular  elections  became  very  burden- 
some ;  in  some  cases  a  State  would  remain  for  months 
without  a  Governor,  and  as  the  work  which  it  aimed 
to  accomplish  was  undertaken  by  the  ruling  admin- 
istration, it  gradually  dropped  out.  Andrew  Jackson 
was  nominated  in  1832  by  a  Democratic  Republican 
Convention,  and  his  inauguration  took  place  amidst 
great  excitement;  a  veritable  mob  of  ten  thousand 
surrounded  the  White  House  and  mingled  freely  with 
important  personages,  '  Jackson  himself  riding  on 
horseback  to  the  White  House  after  the  ceremony. 
The  situation  is  summed  up  as  follows  by  a  histor- 
ian, "It  was  the  people's  day,  the  people's  President, 
and  the  people  would  rule." 

Turning  to  England,  where  the  situation  was 
even  more  acute.  The  following  has  been  gleaned 
from  a  letter  written  about  that  time,  "During  the 
reign  of  Geo.  IV.,  there  was  great  distress  in  the 
country.  Hunger  and  want  of  work  made  wild  war 
and  the  price  of  food  was  enormously  high,  bread  be- 


DOES  HISTORY  REPEAT  ITSELF  23 

ing  sold  in  slices.  The  rich  became  richer  and  the 
poor  became  poorer.  When  manhood  suffrage  was 
mentioned,  it  was  considered  to  be  the  mere  ravings 
of  a  madman.  Anything  like  the  squalid  misery,  the 
slow  mouldering  putrefying  death  by  which  the  weak 
and  the  feeble  of  the  working  classes  were  perishing 
it  never  befell  my  eyes  to  behold  nor  my  imagination 
to  conceive,  and  the  creatures  seemed  to  have  no  idea 
of  resisting  nor  even  repining.  They  took  it  down 
with  oriental  submission  as  if  it  was  God  and  not  the 
landlord  that  was  laying  his  hand  upon  them ;  and 
when  their  honorable  representative  in  Parliament 
gave  a  description  of  their  suffering,  "liar"  was  the 
best  word  applied  to  him  by  the  organs  of  tyranny. 
The  voice  of  the  multitude  reduced  to  the  borders  of 
starvation  was  long'  raised  in  vain." 

Work  in  the  factories  was  referred  to  in  the  follow- 
ing terms,  "If  the  employer  were  a  selfish  man,  the 
workers  were  used  merely  as  instruments  of  profit 
by  him,  and  it  did  not  matter  how  soon  they  were 
used  up,  for  there  could  always  be  found  numbers 
enough  who  were  eager  to  take  their  places,  and  were 
willing  to  undertake  any  task  on  any  terms  for  the 
sake  of  securing  a  bare  living." 

Now  for  a  glance  at  the  work  which  was  accomp- 
lished in  this  period  of  English  history.  Between  1829 
and  1832  a  "fierce  fight  took  place  over  the  passing  of 
the  Reform  Bill ;  this  bill  gave  the  working  classes 
much  better  representation  in  Parliament,  adding 
half  a  million  voters  to  the  list.  A  Reform  Parlia- 
ment took  the  place  of  the  old  one,  and  a  number  of 
Reform  measures  were  passed,  but  not  without  a  ter- 
rific struggle.  Riots  took  place  and  many  times  the 
militia  were  called  out  to  quell  disturbances.  Many 
memorable  speeches  were  made  in  the  New  Parlia- 
ment, and  good  men  and  true  were  raisd  up  to  cham- 


24  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

pion  the  cause  of  the  oppressed  against  the  hand  of 
the  oppressor.  They  waged  many  fierce  battles,  but 
victory  was  theirs  every  time.  After  the  Reform  Bill 
came  the  Abolition  of  Slavery  in  the  colonies;  Labor 
Legislation  by  which  the  right  of  the  government  to 
dictate  to  employer  and  employed  was  established, 
and  laws  protecting  women  and  children  were  enact- 
ed. A  better  system  of  relief  for  the  poor  was  also 
provided,  and  a  commercial  monopoly  known  as  the 
East  India  Company  was  abolished,  which  left  j;he 
benefits  to  be  derived  from  foreign  trade  open  to  all 
the  king's  subjects. 

One  point  made  by  historians  is  worthy  of  notice. 
It  is  this  :  not  one  of  the  evils  which  were  supposed  to 
result  from  these  reforms  ever  came  to  pass.  The 
Reform  party  was  completely  exhausted,  and  a  new 
administration  was  formed.  William  Ewart  Glad- 
stone and  Queen  Victoria  soon  came  to  the  front,  and 
an  era  of  prosperity  followed.  Although  William  IV. 
was  King  during  this  trying  period,  he  took  very  lit- 
tle part  in  the  fights  that  were  waged.  Pitt,  Fox, 
Burke,  Wilberforce,  and  many  other  statesmen  have 
handed  down  to  us  specimens  of  the  greatest  oratory 
to  which  the  world  has  ever  listened. 

But  while  terrible  battles  were  being  waged  in 
many  countries,  there  were  those  who  were  quietly 
struggling  in  some  obscure  corner  to  master  the 
forces  of  nature.  Inch  by  inch  steam  and  electricity 
were  being  bound  until  they  should  become  the  ser- 
vants of  man.  Neptune  in  close  conjunction  with  the 
Sun  and  surrounded  by  many  planets  worked  with 
great  power  and  gave  an  impetus  to  everything  where 
water  was  concerned.  Neptune,  as  you  are  aware, 
governs  the  sea  and  everything  pertaining  to  water. 
Mars  and  Neptune  control  steam.  The  Sun  controls 
electricity,  and  the  action  of  the  Sun  itself  is  strength- 


DOES    HISTORY   REPEAT    ITSELF         25 

ened  by  a  conjunction  with  many  planets.  A  great 
impetus  was  given  to  canal  building  at  this  period, 
and  the  Erie  Canal  was  opened  Oct.  26th,  1825, 
amidst  great  rejoicing,  nine  days  being  spent  in  cele- 
brating the  occasion.  Many  canals  were  planned 
about  this  time,  but  the  railway  train  soon  began  to 
outrival  the  Canal.  The  Suez  Canal  was  completed 
and  the  Panama  Canal  was  also  under  consideration. 
George  Stephenson  succeeded  in  greatly  improving 
the  steam  engine,  and  the  first  railway  was  opened  in 
1830  with  most  imposing  ceremonies.  Morse,  the 
father  of  telegraphy;  Field,  the  hero  of  the  Atlantic 
cable ;  and  Ericcson,  who  invented  the  screw  propel- 
ler, were  also  struggling  through  many  adversities 
and  discouragements.  Oftentimes  they  met  with 
sneers  from  those  who  should  have  appreciated  their 
efforts,  but  they  lived  to  see  their  inventions  revolu- 
tionize the  world. 

Summing  up  our  investigations,  we  find  the  period 
between  1825  and  1835  to  have  been  a  time  of  great 
excitement  and  great  distress,  but  a  period  of  great 
achievements  and  great  intellectual  ipower.  In  a 
close  analysis  of  life,  we  find  that  it  is  in  the  hour  of 
distress  that  we  come  closest  to  the  unseen,  and  that 
it  is  from  the  unseen  that  all  great  ideas,  great  dis- 
coveries, and  great  revelations  come.  A  friend  of 
Herbert  Spencer  once  remarked  that  it  was  strange 
that  he  seemed  to  have  no  wrinkles  in  his  forehead, 
and  he  replied,  "I  never  sit  down  to  study  any  ques- 
tion out.  An  idea  comes  to  me  and  I  let  it  rest,  then 
perhaps  in  a  month,  six  months,  or  a  year,  it  comes  to 
me  again  in  a  more  complete  form."  That  is  the  ex- 
perience of  all  great  thinkers ;  they  do  not  create  the 
ideas ;  they  are  gifts  from  the  unseen.  When  Harriet 
Beecher  Stowe  was  writing  Uncle  Tom's  Cabin,  the 
editor  who  published  her  story  isuggested  that  it 


3— 


26  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

was  going  to  be  too  long,  and  she  replied  that  she 
could  not  stop  writing  until  she  had  finished.  She 
doubtless  felt  that  it  was  being  dictated  to  her  by 
some  unseen  power.  Great  ideas  are  usually  born  in 
agony  of  Soul.  Of  John  Watson,  author  of  "The 
Bonnie  Brier  Bush",  it  is  said  that  he  took  curious 
fits  of  depression  and  at  these  times  stuck  very  close 
to  his  books ;  in  a  day  or  two  he  emerged  into  clear 
sunshine.  The  Psalmist  David  affords  us  a  gaod  ex- 
ample of  the  fits  of  depression  and  exultation  which 
become  the  portion  of  great  writers.  In  a  time  of 
agony  are  our  Souls  born  into  the  world ;  in  agony 
clo  our  Souls  burst  into  the  glory  of  the  unseen;  just 
so  every  great  thought  and  every  great  movement  is 
born  into  the  world  in  anguish  of  Soul.  The  agony 
of  the  Cross  ushered  in  the  era  of  Christianity;  the 
ten  commandments  were  given  amid  the  thunderings 
and  lightnings  of  Mt.  Sinai ;  great  distress  of  mind 
often  marks  the  period  when  the  Soul  is  born  again ; 
a  new  plant  grows  out  of  the  putrefaction  of  the  seed ; 
the  darkest  time  comes  before  the  dawn,  and  the  dar- 
kest time  brings  us  into  closest  touch  with  the  un- 
seen. 

In  returning  to  the  charts  which  we  have  been 
studying,  can  we  not  even  now  trace  a  striking  ana- 
logy between  the  time  of  which  we  have  been  writing 
and  our  own  time?  Our  daily  papers  are  full  to  over- 
flowing with  great  disasters,  great  discoveries,  and 
great  reform  movements.  Uranus  has  been  in  con- 
junction with  the  Sun  for  seven  years,  and  will  re- 
main so  for  seven  years  to  come;  the  Sun  stands  for 
rulers,  wealthy  men,  and  those  occupying  important 
positions ;  it  works  for  promotion.  Uranus  stands  for 
the  laboring  class  and  for  those  holding  inferior  po- 
sitions, symbolizing  falling  or  dragging  down.  This 
conjunction  always  brings  disaster  to  those  in  high 


DOES    HISTORY    REPEAT    ITSELF         27 

places,  and  the  Sun  acting  on  Uranus  promotes  those 
who  hold  inferior  positions.  Nations  as  well  as  indi- 
viduals are  affected  by  these  conjunctions,  and  a 
glance  at  the  past  seven  years  should  convince  even 
the  most  incredulous  that  this  conjunction  has  been 
doing  its  work.  Where  are  the  rulers  who  held  proud 
positions  seven  years  ago?  The  King  of  England 
and  Emperor  of  Japan  were  stricken  by  death ;  the 
King  of  Denmark  dropped  dead  on  the  street ;  the 
King  of  Spain  was  assassinated ;  Turkey,  China  and 
Mexico  lost  their  rulers  by  revolution ;  the  Viceroy  of 
India  was  seriously  wounded  by  an  assassin ;  Persia, 
Belgium  and  Greece  suffered  like  afflictions: — Tur- 
key follows.  King  Manuel  of  Portugal  played  the 
part  of  a  wise  man  and  walked  out  before  it  was  too 
late ;  King  Haakon  of  Norway  has  also  expressed  a  de- 
sire to  abdicate.  In  France  and  the  United  States 
elections  were  held  amid  great  excitement,  and  great 
danger  to  those  participating  in  them,  saying  nothing 
about  the  rulers  of  lesser  countries.  The  quotation 
previously  given,  "Uneasy  lies  the  head  that  wears  a 
crown,"  must  have  been  written  in  some  such  time  as 
this.  Another  point  worthy  of  notice  follows;  wher- 
ever a  war  has  taken  place  between  two  coun- 
tries the  smaller  country  has  always  been  victorious. 
In  the  Russo-Japanese  war  the  Japs  won  one  long  ser- 
ies of  victories.  Judges  5  :20  explains  this  phenomenon. 
It  reads  thus :  "They  fought  from  Heaven ;  the  stars 
in  their  courses  fought  against  Sisera."  "If  the  Lord 
be  for  us  who  can  be  against  us?"  This  is  a  day  of 
victory  for  the  under  man  and  the  under  nation.  The 
reforms  which  took  place  in  England  some  of  which 
have  been  mentioned  were  all  along  the  line  of  wrest- 
ing the  victim  from  the  hand  of  the  oppressor.  We  hope 
to  see  a  repetition  of  that  splendid  programme.  Fran- 
chise for  women  takes  the  place  of  the  Reform  Bill, 


28  SOCIAL  SCIENCE. 

the  White  Slave  question  for  the  Negro  slave  trade. 
Then  the  labor  question  needs  to  be  settled  now  much 
the  same  as  it  was  settled  then.  To  those  who  are 
laboring  for  these  reforms  we  would  say,  the  conflict 
may  be  fierce  but  the  victory  is  yours.  In  a  period 
like  this  when  a;  strong  conjunction  rests  on  the 
Horoscope  of  every  individual,  excitement  spreads 
like  wildfire  and  it  is  a  difficult  matter  to  control 
crowds  in  public  places.  Men  and  women  are  liable 
to  be  seized  by  sudden  impulses  and  carried  «.s  it  were 
off  their  feet;  our  asylums  and  jails  may  be  full.  .Fires 
that  have  been  smouldering  will  burst  into  a  flame 
and  many  will  surprise  even  themselves.  During  these 
years  we  should  avoid  all  stimulants  and  undue  ex- 
citement ;  we  should  also  see  that  our  surplus  ener- 
gies are  directed  toward  something  useful.  Should 
we  be  fortunate  enough  to  escape  the  asylum  and  the 
jail  we  are  still  in  danger  of  having  our  names  handed 
down  to  posterity  as  Andrew  Jackson  had  in  the  per- 
iod of  which  we  have  been  writing;  history  tells  us 
that  he  was  a  good  man  who  had  an  ungovernable 
temper  and  often  erred  in  judgment.  There  were 
far  more  serious  things  wrong  than  Andrew  Jackson's 
temper;  that  had  nothing  to  do  with  the  condition  of 
things  in  England  and  other  countries.  However 
it  becomes  us  to  keep  a  tight  rein  on  ourselves. 

It  will  also  be  a  time  for  the  display  of  rare  genius ; 
the  grandest  music  and  the  most  impressive  oratory, 
the  wildest  rejoicing  and  the  deepest  mourning  will 
be  features  of  this  era.  Spectacular  scenes  such  as  the 
world  never  before  witnessed  may  be  ours  to  behold. 
There  are  those  among  us  who  are  looking  for  the 
second  coming  of  Christ  about  this  time.  They  claim 
that  Biblical  prophecy  and  Biblical  chronology  both 
fix  it  for  the  near  future;  probably  it  will  come  at 
some  such  time  as  this  but  eighty  five  years  here  or 


DOES    HISTORY   REPEAT    ITSELF;        29 

there  would  not  make  much  difference.  It  might  be 
eighty  five  years  from  now  or  many  eighty  fives.  In 
Matthew  24:14  we  are  told  that  the  Gospel  of  the 
Kingdom  shall  be  preached  in  all  the  world  for  a  wit- 
ness unto  all  nations,  then  shall  the  end  come.  A 
few  days  ago  we  read  that  a  band  of  missionaries  were 
planning  a  tour  of  the  world  to  return  in  five  years 
time.  This  would  turn  our  thoughts  to  1918  or  1920, 
as  a  possible  time  for  the  end  to  come.  In  verse  21 
we  are  told  that  there  shall  be  great  tribulation  such 
as  was  not  since  the  beginning  of  the  world  and  except 
those  days  should  be  shortened  there  should  no  flesh 
be  saved.  Such  a  condition  would  hardly  arise  in 
less  than  five  years  time.  Saturn  passes  the  Sun  four 
or  five  years  hence  and  this  would  probably  be  the 
most  serious  time  for  general  disturbances. 

In  human  life  sometimes  all  the  symptoms  seem 
to  be  unfavorable  and  life  seems  to  hang  upon  a  mere 
thread  and  yet  that  thread  does  not  break ;  life  takes 
on  a  new  period  of  existence ;  and  so  it  might  be  with 
mother  earth.  In  Daniel  12:4  we  have  these  words: 
"Many  shall  run  to  and  fro  and  knowledge  shall  be 
increased."  This  seems  to  be  a  reference  to  the  im- 
petus given  to  traveling  in  the  period  before  the  end, 
also  the  increase  of  knowledge;  these  prophecies  fit 
the  present  time.  In  James  5:  1,  3,  4  these  words  ap- 
pear, "Go  to  now,  ye  rich  men,  weep  and  howl  for 
your  miseries  that  shall  come  upon  you.  Ye  have 
heaped  treasure  together  for  the  last  days.  Behold 
the  hire  of  the  laborers  who  have  reaped  down  your 
fields,  which  is  of  you  kept  back  by  fraud,  crieth :  and 
the  cries  of  them  which  have  reaped  are  entered  into 
the  ears  of  the  Lord  of  Sabaoth."  This  is  a  reference 
to  the  struggle  between  capital  and  labour.  In  Thes. 
2:3  we  have  "For  that  day  shall  not  come  except 
there  come  a  falling  away  first :"  this  must  be  a  ref- 


30  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

erence  to  the  condition  of  the  church.  The  Church 
today  is  full  of  heresy  and  the  money  power  rules  it. 
A  lady  very  active  in  Church  work  was  asked  a  short 
time  ago,  if  she  thought  the  majority  of  the  Church 
members  would  want  to  associate  with  Christ  if  he 
came  to  the  earth  again,  and  she  replied,  "If  he  came 
as  a  poor  man,  I  do  not  think  they  would."  And  this 
was  not  an  ultra  fashionable  Church,  it  was  a  city 
Church  where  probably  nine  tenths  of  the  members 
were  well  to  do  working  people. 

In  Luke  21  :25  the  following  appears,  "And  there 
shall  be  signs  in  the  Sun,  and  in  the  Moon,  and  in  the 
Stars,  and  upon  the  earth  distress  of  nations,  with 
perplexity,  the  sea  and  the  waves  roaring."  Storms  at 
sea  are  here  predicted.  In  such  a  time  as  this  will 
the  end  come :  only  God  the  Father  knoweth  the  time. 

Thus  we  see  that  the  war  zones  of  1830  correspond 
with  the  war  zones  of  1913.  Political  unrest,  labor 
disputes,  Franchise  and  Slave  questions,  floods,  fires, 
and  marine  disasters  are  prominent  features  of  the 
present  age.  Great  discoveries  are  also  being  made. 
The  navigation  of  the  air  is  being  slowly  but  surely 
conquered,  at  a  terrible  cost  to  human  life.  The  Pan- 
ama Canal,  which  was  under  consideration  in  1830, 
will  be  opened.  A  few  years  hence  we  may  be  reap- 
ing the  results  of  the  great  impetus  given  to  inven- 
tive genius.  We  must  guard,  however,  against  disas- 
ter by  land  and  sea,  political  strife,  war,  crime,  and  in- 
sanity. A  heavy  conjunction  such  as  has  been  shown, 
while  it  stimulates  genius,  may  also  tend  to  unbalance 
the  mind.  Wherever  the  Sun  stands  in  your  horo- 
scope, you  will  know  that  the  heavy  conjunction  ar>- 
pears  opposite  to  it.  If  you  are  born  in  Aquarius  or 
Leo,  it  stands  in  the  1st.  Sign ;  if  in  Cancer  or  Capri- 
corn, in  the  2nd. ;  if  in  Saggitarius  or  Gemini,  the 
3rd. ;  Scorpio  or  Taurus,  the  4th. ;  Libra  or  Aries,  the 


NATURE  OF  THE  PLANETS  31 

5th. ;  and  Pisces  or  Virgo,  the  6th.  It  stands  be- 
tween the  Signs  we  have  mentioned  and  the  preced- 
ing Sign.  In  the  Chart  given,  it  appears  as  it  would 
for  Capricorn  or  Cancer  persons. 


CHAPTER  III. 
Nature  of  the  Planets. 

A  few  hints  will  now  be  given  upon  the  astrologi- 
cal indications  of  the  planets.  Of  the  planet  Vulcan 
we  have  very  little  knowledge,  and  its  position  has 
not  been  indicated  on  the  charts. 

Mercury  is  a  small  planet,  and  being  close  to  the 
Sun  it  is  also  very  warm.  It  remains  in  some  of  the 
Signs  11  days,  and  in  others  only  4  days,  showing 
that  it  is  very  fickle  and  unstable  in  its  nature.  Be- 
ing small  and  quick  in  motion,  it  is  symbolic  of  child 
life,  and  also  bird  life.  It  also  stands  for  writing, 
traveling,  shipping  and  commercial  life. 

Venus,  usually  known  as  the  Goddess  of  Love,  is  a 
very  beautiful  planet,  warm,  and  rather  quick  in  mo- 
tion, but  very  stable.  Each  Sign  is  passed  through  in 
practically  the  same  time.  It  is  larger  than  Mercury, 
and  represents  beauty  and  women.  Venus  is  the  dec- 
orator of  the  earth.  Warmth,  beauty  and  constancy, 
the  principal  attributes  of  love,  are  embodied  in  this 
planet. 

Mars  is  a  fiery  red  planet  and  governs  quarreling, 
fighting,  fire,  bloodshed  and  destruction.  It  acts 
quickly.  Diseases  under  Mars  assume  an  acute  form, 
the  question  of  life  or  death  being  quickly  settled. 
It  governs  all  military  affairs. 

Jupiter  stands  for  official  life  and  the  administra- 
tion of  justice.  Jupiter  is  a  large,  grand  looking  plan- 


32  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

et,  and  shines  with  a  firm  and  steady  light.  Its  moons 
are  symbolic  of  court  attaches,  clerks,  assistants,  and 
attendants  upon  those  who  fill  important  offices.  It 
is  neither  hot  nor  cold,  fast  nor  slow,  and  is  there- 
fore symbolic  of  the  straight  line  which  justice  marks 
out  for  the  offender.  Jupiter  also  governs  victory 
and  promotion. 

Saturn  is  a  cold,  pale,  slow-moving  planet,  and  its 
rings  convey  the  idea  of  duplicity,  a  wheel  within  a 
wheel,  as  it  is  commonly  expressed.  Saturn  is  sup- 
posed to  govern  the  crust  of  the  earth.  It  also  in- 
dicates chronic  diseases  or  those  which  work  slowly. 
Intellectually,  it  gives  a  deep,  penetrating  nature  with 
scientific  and  inventive  ability.  It  frequently  indi- 
cates imprisonment  or  death. 

Uranus  governs  the  sky,  and  conjunctions  of  Ura- 
nus and  the  Sun  tend  to  the  study  of  astronomy.  This 
planet  indicates  originality  in  all  things,  and  leads  to 
the  study  of  the  mysterious.  Uranus  stands  for  pe- 
culiar diseases  and  peculiar  deaths ;  it  also  indicates 
trouble  from  falling,  and  separation. 

Neptune  is  a  cold,  slow-moving  planet,  and  governs 
water  and  all  liquids.  Further  than  that  we  know 
very  little  of  the  nature  of  its  influence.  We  pre- 
sume much  more  will  be  learned  regarding  the  nature 
of  Neptune,  and  the  other  planets  as  well. 


INDICATIONS   OF  THE    SIGNS  33 

CHAPTER  IV. 
Indications  of  the  Signs. 

1  and  7  control  religion,  education,  dress,  love,  and 
marriage. 

2  and  8  control  money  and  worldly  goods. 

3  and  9  control  traveling,  writing,  brothers  and  sis- 
ters, cousins,  and  relatives  by  marriage. 

4  and  10  control  parents,  houses  and  land,  building, 
and  constructive  work. 

5  and  11  control  children,  friends  who  are  not  re- 
lated, traveling,  and  appearing  before  the  public. 

6  and  12  control  animals,  food-stuffs,  enemies,  and 
war. 

The  part  of  the  body  governed  by  each  Sign  will 
be  found  on  a  following  page,  at  least  an  approx- 
imate division  is  made.  The  points  between  the 
Signs  should  mark  the  most  important  parts  of  the 
body  from  the  eyes  to  the  ankles.  Bad  planets  in  any 
of  these  signs  lead  to  disease  of  the  organs  governed 
by  these  Signs,  unless  the  trouble  takes  some  other 
form ;  for  example,  bad  influences  in  the  6th.  and  12th. 
might  bring  trouble  from  enemies,  foodstuffs  or  ani- 
mals, or  it  might  bring  diseases  connected  with  the 
stomach  or  feet. 


34  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

SAMPLE  CHART 

Henrietta    Mansfield, 

March  18,  1898. 

12.  Moon  in  Aquarius   (J4). 

3.  Uranus  in  Taurus   (leaving). 

4.  Saturn  in  Gemini  (%). 
2.  Jupiter  in  Aries   (J4). 
6.  Mars  in  Leo  (12  days). 

8.     Venus  in  Libra  (10  days). 

8.     Mercury  in  Libra  (2  days). 
10.     Neptune  in  Saggitarius   (leaving). 
12.     Sun  in  Aquarius   (entering). 

1.     Earth  in  Pisces  (%). 
Mars  changes  at  36 

6,  7 

Venus  changes  at  9,  28,  46,  64 

8     9     10    11 

Mercury  changes  at  4,     9,  14,  19,  25 

8     9    10    11    12 

31,  40,  50,  61,  71 

12345 

Moon  changes  at  2,     4,     6,     8,  11,  14,    16 

12      1      2      3      4      5      6 
18,  20,  22,  24,  27,  29 

7     8     9    10    11    12 
31,  33,  36,  38,  41,  43 

123456 
45,  47,  49,  51,  53,  55 

7     8     9    10    11    12 
57,  60,  62,  65,  67,  70 

123456 
Virgo. 


SAMPLE  CHART 


35 


METHOD   OF   DEVELOPING  A   CHART     37 

CHAPTER  V. 
Method  of  Developing  a  Chart. 

On  a  preceding  page  you  will  see  a  young  lady, 
who  illustrates  the  part  of  the  body  governed  by  each 
of  the  12  Signs. 

We  will  suppose  that  her  birth  date  is  March  18, 
1898,  and  we  wish  to  work  her  horoscope  for  June 
18,  1913.  First  turn  to  the  Ephemeris  for  the  year 
1898.  Here  you  will  find  the  position  of  all  the 
planets  excepting  Neptune,  and  we  have  reckoned 
back  from  the  present  time  to  find  Neptune.  On  a 
chart  of  the  heavens  .for  1913  Neptune  appears  be- 
tween Gemini  and  Cancer,  but  we  must  remember  that 
the  position  of  the  Signs  has  been  changed  in  late 
years,  so  that  Cancer  of  the  present  day  answers  to 
Leo  of  olden  times.  We  therefore  place  Neptune  be- 
tween Cancer  and  Leo,  and  Saturn  in  Gemini  instead 
of  Taurus. 

It  might  be  well  before  proceeding  further  to  give 
the  time  required  by  each  planet  to  revolve  once 
around  the  Sun. 

Mercury — 88  days 

Venus— 2242/3  days 

Earth— 365  1/4  days 

Mars— 687  days 

Jupiter — 11  yrs.  315  days 

Saturn— 29  1/2  yrs. 

Uranus — 84  yrs. 

Neptune — 168   yrs. 

In  entering  planets  in  the  Nativity  every  day 
counts  a  year.  We  cannot  give  any  reason  for  this ; 
if  there  is  any  reason  we  have  not  discovered  it.  It 
just  seems  to  be  one  of  God's  laws.  In  consideration 
of  this  fact  we  will  see  that  Neptune,  LTranus,  Saturn, 


38  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

Jupiter  and  the  Sun  change  so  very  little  in  a  lifetime 
that  the  change  is  not  worth  noting.  Mars  passes 
through  1  Sign  and  a  fraction  of  another,  during  an 
ordinary  lifetime,  so  that  we  commence  with  the 
changes  of  Mars.  We  also  mark  the  changes  of  Venus, 
Mercury  and  the  Moon ;  all  these  are  important.  In 
many  charts  where  planets  should  be  in  the  same 
place  we  have  found  it  necessary  to  move  some  of 
them  slightly.  Neptune  remains  14  years  in  one  Sign 
so  that  we  find  Neptune  entering  the  Signs  as  follows : 
Aquarius  in  1912,  Capricorn  in  1898,  Saggitarius  in 
1884,  Scorpio  in  1870,  Libra  in  1856,  Virgo  in  1842, 
Leo  in  1828. 

This  is  as  near  as  we  have  been  able  to  come  to  the 
position  of  Neptune.  The  Sun  we  place  in  Aquarius 
near  Capicorn  and  always  there. 

The  Earth  which  makes  a  circuit  of  the  Signs  in 
a  year,  changes  as  follows :  (We  are  copying  this  from 
Mr.  Butler's  works.) 

Earth  enters  Aries  March  21. 

Taurus   April    19. 

Gemini  May  20. 

Cancer  June  21. 

Leo  July  22. 

Virgo  August  22. 

Libra  September  23. 

Scorpio  October  23. 

Saggitarius  November  22. 

Capricorn  December  21. 

Aquarius  January  20. 

Pisces  February  19. 
We  will  now  proceed  to  work  out  the  Chart  com- 
mencing with  the  Moon.  In  the  column  under  March, 
and  opposite  18,  the  Moon  appears  in  Aquarius,  we 
will  say  one  half.  It  will  be  found  advisable  to  get 
the  position  in  the  Sign  approximately.  Uranus 


METHOD   OF  DEVELOPING  A  CHART    39 

is  at  the  head  of  the  first  column  under  "Posi- 
tion of  the  Planets."  It  will  be  necessary  to  learn  the 
signs  used  for  each  planet,  and  the  signs  of  the  Zodiac 
as  well.  Uranus  is  leaving  Taurus,  Saturn  is  § 
about  y\  in  Aries,  Mars  12  days  in  Xeo,  Venus 
10  days  in  Libra  and  Mercury,  2  days  in  Libra.  The 
Sun  we  always  mark  in  Aquarius  near  Capricorn. 
Neptune  is  leaving  Saggitarius  and  the  Earth  on 
March  18  is  in  Pisces.  The  Sign  in  which  the 
Earth  is  found  is  always  in  the  1st.  Sign.  Having  writ- 
ten down  the  Signs  in  which  each  planet  is  found,  in- 
cluding the  Sun,  Moon,  and  Earth,  you  then  proceed 
to  number  them,  commencing  with  the  one  in  which 
the  Earth  is  found;  it  is  always  1.  If  Pisces  is  1, 
then  Aries  will  be  2,  Taurus  will  be  3,  Gemini  4,  Can- 
cer 5,  Leo  6,  Virgo  7,  Libra  8,  etc.  When  you  have 
thus  numbered  them  all,  you  proceed  to  mark  the 
changes.  First  look  in  the  column  for  Mars.  It  chan- 
ges on  April  23 — from  March  18  to  April  23  is  36 
days — counting  every  day  a  year,  Mars  changes  at 
the  36th  year,  being  now  in  the  6th.  Sign  it  will 
change  to  the  7th.  Indicate  the  signs  below  in  small 
figures.  Now  turn  to  Venus;  it  changes  on  March 
27th.,  and  will  therefore  change  at  the  9th.  year;  it 
changes  again  on  April  15,  19  years  later.  The  chan- 
ges of  Venus  are  so  regular  that  you  can  depend  on 
each  period  being  either  18  or  19  years.  Not  so  with 
Mercury ;  we  look  in  the  column  for  Mercury ;  (it 
makes  more  changes  and  covers  two  columns).  You 
find  that  it  changes  on  March  22,  and  we  mark  the 
first  change  at  4  years,  the  2nd.  at  9  years.,  the  3rd. 
at  14,  and  so  on.  Place  the  Signs  from  which  the 
changes  are  made  underneath  in  smaller  figures. 
Lastly  we  find  the  changes  of  the  Moon ;  it  changes 
at  2  years,  4  years,  etc. ;  you  can  run  your  finger  down 
the  columns,  and  mark  them  as  you  go;  when  you 


40  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

have  reached  80  years  of  age,  or  as  far  as  you  care 
to  go,  look  for  the  Sign  in  which  the  Moon  appeared 
at  birth  (here  it  was  in  the  12th.  Sign),  and  mark 
,the  numbers  underneath,  coming  to  1  again  when  you 
reach  12.  You  may  prove  the  correctness  of  your 
work  by  placing  the  Sign  underneath  the  last  figures. 
We  have  now  completed  the  mathematical  part  of  the 
work,  and  all  that  remains  for  us  to  do  is  to  draw  a 
circle  dividing  it  into  12  equal  parts  and  place  the 
planets  where  they  belong  in  the  Signs.  In  this  case 
we  want  a  chart  for  June  18,  1913.  The  young  lady 
is  15  years  of  age,  and  we  must  find  their  position  at 
that  time.  We  place  Uranus,  Saturn,  Jupiter,  Nep- 
tune, and  the  Sun  practically  where  they  appeared  at 
birth.  Mars  changes  at  the  age  of  36  from  the  6th. 
to  the  7th.  Signs,  so  that  we  merely  place  it  a  little 
further , in  the  6th.  Sign,  or  rather  the  12th. 

We  have  found  that  planets  in  opposite  Signs  work 
as  if  they  were  in  the  same  Sign,  so  that  in  order  to 
facilitate  matters  we  have  placed  them  in  the  same 
Sign,  and  it  simplifies  the  reading  wonderfully. 
We  will  therefore  place  Mars  and  the  Sun  in  the  12th. 
Sign,  Uranus  in  the  3rd.,  Saturn  in  the  4th.,  Jupiter 
in  the  2nd.,  and  Neptune  between  the  4th.  and  5th. 
Signs.  Venus  enters  the  9th.,  which  we  will  call  the 
3rd.,  at  8  years;  and  at  15  it  will  be  rather  more  than 
1/3  in  the  3rd.  Mercury  has  just  left  the  10th.  Sign, 
and  the  Moon  is  in  the  6th.,  or  the  12th.,  as  we  will 
call  it.  In  working  the  horoscope  of  a  stranger  we 
usually  select  the  time  when  Mercury  passes  Venus 
as  being  an  important  point.  We  also  find  the  time 
when  the  Moon  strikes  the  conjunction  of  Venus  and 
Mercury  or  enters  a  Sign  where  there  are  many  plan- 
ets. This  usually  leads  you  to  the  best  points  in  the 
horoscope,  particularly  if  Venus  and  Mercury  form  a 
conjunction  with  the  Sun,  or  other  good  planets.  We 


METHOD   OF  DEVELOPING  A  CHART     41 

then  find  the  Transits  for  the  year  fixed  upon, 
selecting  that  portion  of  the  year  when  the  largest 
number  of  planets  or  the  best  planets  stand  opposite 
to  Venus  and  Mercury.  With  these  explanations  we 
will  proceed  to  find  the  Transits  for  June  18,  1913.  The 
Transits  always  give  the  position  of  the  planets  on  the 
date  for  which  you  wish  the  chart,  and  they  are  reck- 
oned by  days  instead  of  years.  While  the  Moon  re- 
mains 2  or  3  days  in  a  Sign  in  the  Transits,  it  remains 
2  or  3  years  in  the  Nativity.  Mercury  remains  from 
4  to  11  days  in  the  Transits,  and  from  4  to  11  years 
in  the  Nativity.  Venus  remains  18  or  19  days  in  the 
Transits,  and  18  or  19  years  in  the  Nativity.  Jupiter 
remains  in  one  Sign  in  the  vicinity  of  a  year,  Saturn 
for  2  years,  and  several  months,  and  Mars  for  50  days 
or  more.  The  time  varies  with  these  planets,  Uranus 
remains  7  years  in  one  Sign,  and  Neptune  14  years. 
We  do  not  reckon  the  changes  for  the  long  standing 
planets  in  the  Nativity.  Turning  to  the  year  1913 
in  the  Ephemeris  we  find  the  position  of  all  the  plan- 
ets for  June  18  in  the  same  manner  in  which  we  found 
the  position  at  birth,  and  place  them  where  they  be- 
long in  the  Signs.  The  Sun  always  stands  opposite 
to  the  Sun,  and  Neptune  and  the  Earth  are  found  in 
precisely  the  same  manner  as  for  the  Nativity. 

You  may  read  all  public  events  in  the  Transits, 
coupled  with  horoscopes  of  rulers  and  those  connected 
with  these  events. 

Some  one  will  say:  "That's  a  very  simple  arrange- 
ment !"  Yes,  it  looks  simple  when  you  have  some  one 
to  outline  it  for  you,  but  it  cost  us  just  7  years  of  ex- 
perimenting and  continuous  investigation  to  bring 
it  even  to  this  stage  of  perfection. 

We  have  found  Mr.  Butler's  Ephemeris  to  be  trust- 
worthy so  far  as  it  goes,  and  he  tells  us  that  he  may 
mark  the  position  of  the  planets  more  minutely  at 


42  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

some  time.  We  think  it  would  be  quite  an  advan- 
tage if  we  knew  just  the  time  when  one  planet  passed 
another  in  the  Signs.  You  will  notice  the  position  of 
the  Moon  and  some  of  the  planets  in  the  Almanacs, 
but  we  have  not  found  them  reliable.  You  can  keep 
track  of  the  Moon  for  a  long  while  by  watching 
events,  particularly  in  a  family  where  the  different 
Signs  are  represented.  When  the  Moon  changes,  it 
may  be  between  the  2nd.  and  3rd.  Signs  for  one,  com- 
bining money  and  traveling,  or  money  and  letters ;  for 
another  it  may  be  between  the  1st.  and  2nd.,  marriage 
and  money,  if  good  planets  appear  there  the  person 
will  receive  money  and  if  bad  there  may  be  a  quarrel 
over  money.  These  are  merely  examples  to  show 
that  in  the  minor  events  of  life  we  may  trace  the  po- 
sition of  the  Moon  without  the  aid  of  an  Ephemeris. 
We  have  done  so  for  months.  Something  happens  to 
one  member  of  a  family  which  gives  you  a  guess  of 
the  position  of  the  Moon,  and  other  events  occur 
which  verify  it.  By  this  test  we  have  found  Mr.  But- 
ler's Ephemeris  to  be  correct,  but  not  those 
in  the  Almanacs.  We  have  also  given  the  Ephemeris 
which  notes  the  position  of  the  planets  as  they  appear 
from  the  earth  a  fair  test,  but  could  not  succeed  in 
developing  anything  out  of  it. 

These  charts  may  be  worked  on  a  common  spelling 
tablet,  but  we  would  advise  every  one  to  work  them 
neatly  with  pen  and  ink,  as  they  may  wish  to  refer  to 
them  in  after  years. 

In  the  young  lady's  chart  before  us,  we  first  notice 
that  she  seems  to  have  suffered  from  trouble  to  her 
parents  during  childhood,  particularly  about  the  years 
1909  and  1910.  The  Moon  passed  through  her  4th. 
Sign  at  that  time.  She  either  suffered  severely  from 
trouble  to  parents,  or  ill-health  coming  under  that 
Sign.  A  bad  4th.  Sign  frequently  leads  to  bronchial 


METHOD   OF   DEVELOPING  A   CHART    43 

trouble,  and  generally  diseases  which  arise  from  cold. 
Tuberculosis  sometimes  affects  the  knee,  because  the 
10th.  Sign  is  opposite  to  the  4th.  When  you  find  a 
Sign  which  is  bad  for  parents,  or  brothers  and  sis- 
ters, that  does  not  mean  that  these  relatives  will  suf- 
fer more  than  is  the  common  lot  of  humanity,  but  it 
does  indicate  that  children  who  have  such  Signs  will 
be  with  them  when  they  do  suffer.  Usually  during 
their  childhood  the  parents  are  unfortunate.  Those 
who  have  a  bad  Sign  for  parents  usually  visit  them 
when  ill,  or  they  fall  sick  when  they  do  visit  them. 
Sometimes  children  with  such  a  Sign  as  we  have  be- 
fore us  have  cruel  parents.  A  child  with  a  bad  4th. 
Sign  and  good  llth.  Sign  may  be  better  placed  with 
strangers.  It  either  indicates  trouble  to  or  from  par- 
ents or  ill-health.  This  horoscope  is  not  good  for 
traveling.  Neptune  is  in  a  bad  position,  and  danger 
accompanies  it.  It  would  be  good  for  the  study  of 
painting  or  music.  The  2nd.  Sign  is  good  for  money, 
and  there  is  nothing  detrimental  in  the  marriage  Sign. 
Late  in  life  it  will  not  be  so  good,  as  Mars  comes  in. 
The  12th.  Sign  is  war-like,  and  the  Moon  is  at  present 
between  the  Sun  and  Mars  in  the  12th.  This  lady 
would  be  liable  to  witness  a  few  live  fights,  if  she 
does  not  actually  see  a  battle  field.  Martial  music 
will  appeal  very  strongly  to  her.  If  she  has  inherited 
sufficient  musical  talent,  she  should  be  successful  as 
a  pianist  for  an  orchestra.  She  should  also  be  very 
successful  in  painting.  Wild  animals  and  battle 
scenes  would  be  congenial  subjects  to  her.  If  she  in- 
herits writing  talent,  she  might  distinguish  herself  as 
a  novelist,  or  she  might  make  an  excellent  nurse.  All 
these  would  be  in  her  line.  She  might  be  fond  of  the 
water,  and  also  fond  of  traveling,  but  she  should  not 
follow  any  occupation  which  demands  traveling.  She 
is  likely  to  be  associated  with  military  men,  surgeons, 


44  SOCIAL  SCIENCE. 

or  those  whose  occupations  connect  them  with  fire- 
arms, jire,  or  cutting  instruments.  Her  Moon  leaves 
the  Marriage  Sign  at  18,  and  this  is  the  time  when 
planetary  influences  would  lead  in  that  direction.  Her 
1st.  Sign  is  not  strong,  however. 

.  In  studying  a  chart  first  note  the  position  of  the 
Moon  in  the  Nativity.  You  may  expect  events  along 
the  line  indicated  by  the  Sign  in  which  the  Moon 
stands  to  take  place.  If  there  are  many  planets  in 
this  Sign  or  a  strong 'con  junction  in  the  Transits,  you 
may  expect  important  events  to  take  place.  If  no 
planets  appear  in  or  near  this  Sign,  the  Moon  will 
probably  pass  through  it  quietly.  If  good  planets  ap- 
pear in  this  Sign,  it  will  bring  prosperity ;  if  bad  plan- 
ets appear,  prepare  to  guard  against  dangers  coming 
under  this  Sign.  If  both  good  and  bad  planets  ap- 
pear, you  may  meet  with  success  after  a  struggle,  or 
prosperity  may  be  fitful.  The  time  when  the  Earth 
and  Moon  in  the  Transits  come  into  this  Sign  will  be 
the  most  important  time  in  the  year,  for  example,  if 
the  Moon  is  in  the  2nd.  or  money  Sign  in  the  Nativity, 
and  this  Sign  is  Cancer;  then  the  Earth  enters  Can- 
cer in  June  and  Capricorn  in  December.  Between  the 
21st.  of  December  and  the  20th.  of  January,  also  be- 
tween the  21st.  of  June  and  22nd.  of  July,  the  Earth 
is  in  the  money  Sign.  During  these  periods  the  Moon 
enters  this  Sign  4  times,  and  these  are  points  to  note, 
although  you  must  keep  track  of  the  entire  horoscope. 
Notice  where  large  conjunctions  occur  in  the  Transits 
and  where  the  good  and  bad  planets  are  situated ;  also 
when  planets  are  changing.  If  several  bad  planets 
change  at  the  same  time,  this  signifies  danger ;  if 
several  good  planets  change,  it  brings  good  fortune. 
If  the  Earth  is  in  your  traveling  or  writing  Sign,  and 
the  Moon  in  your  money  Sign,  this  connects  money 
with  traveling  or  writing;  you  will  soon  learn  to 


METHOD   OF   DEVELOPING  A   CHART     45 

note  the  different  combinations.  If  any  section  of  the 
chart  is  very  strong,  it  will  hold  a  leading  place 
through  all  the  changes.  Your  daily  life,  your 
thoughts,  your  dreams,  will  be  all  strongly  colored  by 
this  part  of  your  horoscope.  It  cannot  be  otherwise. 
You  may  be  known  as  a  man  of  genius,  a  man  with  a 
hobby,  or  a  man  with  a  besetting  sin,  or  all  three,  ac- 
cording to  the  use  which  you  make  of  this  natural 
bias  which  planetary  conditions  give  you. 

The  Sun  also  marks  an  important  point  in  the 
Chart.  In  a  study  of  the  lives  of  the  last  10  Presi- 
dents of  the  United  States,  we  find  that  9  out  of  the 
10  came  into  power  while  the  Moon  was  in  conjunc- 
tion with  the  Sun  in  the  Nativity;  and  the  time  when 
the  Moon  passed  the  Sun  marked  the  most  important 
point  in  their  administration.  The  exception  is  Pres- 
ident Hayes,  and  Uranus  and  Mars,  two  bad  planets, 
came  into  conjunction  with  the  Sun  in  his  horoscope. 
Our  present  President  came  into  power  while  Mer- 
cury, Venus,  and  the  Moon  were  in  conjunction  with 
the  Sun,  and  a  large  conjunction  stood  opposite  in 
the  Transits.  This  was  also  the  point  where  the 
Moon  stood  at  birth,  and  undoubtedly  the  strongest 
point  in  his  horoscope. 

If  Venus  and  Mercury  form  a  conjunction  near  the 
Sun  in  the  Nativity,  it  augurs  well  for  promotion  in 
life.  If  anything  occurs  that  you  cannot  find  a  rea- 
son for  in  your  horoscope,  do  not  give  up  until  you 
have  discovered  it ;  that  is  the  way  in  which  we  gain 
knowledge.  Don't  be  content  with  what  you  have 
heard,  or  what  someone  has  told  you.  Investigate  for 
yourself;  you  may  strike  something  valuable.  Teach- 
ers and  parents  should  find  this  study  especially  profi- 
table ;  they  will  find  so  many  points  in  a  horoscope  to 
give  them  an  insight  into  the  proper  manner  of  hand- 
ling a  child.  It  will  also  enable  a  person  to  more  thor- 


46  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

oughly  understand  those  with  whom  he  comes  in 
contact,  and  to  select  the  best  time  in  his  chart  for 
any  important  venture.  How  far  circumstances  com- 
pel us  to  follow  a  certain  path  in  life  is  a  question  that 
requires  very  deep  investigation.  There  is  one  im- 
portant point  to  be  considered,  however,  these  charts 
'which  we  will  study  constitute  a  record  of  feeling 
rather  than  a  record  of  events ;  for  example,  the  father 
or  mother  of  a  family  may  die,  and  the  bereavement 
does  not  appear  the  same  in  the  horoscopes  of  all  the 
children.  In  some  it  is  strongly  marked,  and  in 
some,  other  events  are  crowding  it  out,  and  they 
do  not  feel  it  so  keenly.  Frequently  those  in  whom  it 
is  strongly  marked  have  been  with  the  father  or  moth- 
er in  their  last  illness,  while  those  in  whose  charts  it 
is  not  strongly  marked  have  been  absent. 

Under  "Traveling"  we  have  endeavored  to  show 
the  manner  in  which  different  passengers  regard  a 
storm  at  sea.  They  are  all  under  the  same  pressure, 
but  some  feel  it  and  others  do  not.  Planetary  con- 
ditions account  for  this  fact. 

It  cannot  be  denied  that  in  human  nature  there  is 
a  strong  craving  for  the  tragic  in  life.  A  fire  or  an 
accident  always  draws  a  crowd,  and  many  go  to  the 
theatre  and  pay  good  money  to  have  someone  draw 
tears  from  their  eyes,  as  if  there  was  not  enough  real 
sorrow  in  life  without  resorting  to  imitation.  It  is 
quite  possible  that  if  the  tragic  side  of  life  were  cut 
out,  many  would  think  the  world  a  very  tame  place, 
far  too  dull  for  them.  In  a  certain  sense,  the  world 
fits  the  people,  and  the  people  fit  the  world. 

One  point  we  wish  especially  to  emphasize.  Try  to 
find  the  place  in  the  world  where  you  will  be  most 
successful  and  stick  to  it.  If,  after  examining  a  chart 
of  your  life,  and  comparing  it  with  your  own  exper- 
ience, you  decide  that  you  are  in  a  position  where  you 


METHOD   OF   DEVELOPING  A   CHART     47 

cannot  succeed,  give  it  up.  Many  men  and  women 
struggle  on  in  a  place  where  they  are  only  meeting 
with  failure  and  discouragement,  hoping  by  perse- 
verance and  supposed  good  management  to  force  fate 
to  yield  to  them.  The  result  may  be  a  nervous  break- 
down, or  suicide.  This  book  will  be  of  great  assis- 
tance in  enabling  you  to  discover  where  you  can  be 
most  successful,  and  when  you  get  there,  stick  to  it. 
When  the  Moon  comes  into  a  bad  place  in  your  horo- 
scope, you  are  liable  to  leave  a  good  position  and  go 
into  some  business  which  will  only  bring  failure  and 
loss;  watch  for  these  temptations.  When  we  mention 
practising  astrologers,  we  do  not  intend  to  speak 
slightingly  of  them.  They  are,  we  believe,  generally 
conscientious.  They  have,  with  many  others,  felt 
that  there  was  a  powerful  influence  at  work,  regulat- 
ing the  affairs  of  men,  and  in  their  eagerness  to  uti- 
lize their  belief,  have  fancied  that  they  had  something 
really  valuable  to  give  the  world.  We  lay  their  lack 
of  success  to  the  fact  that  they  were  using  the  wrong 
Ephemeris. 

A  glance  at  the  Transits  for  June  18,  1913  will  prove 
interesting.  Here  a  conjunction  of  Mercury  and  Mars 
occurs ;  during  3  days  while  Mercury  is  approach- 
ing Mars,  we  find  on  the  west  coast  of  America  a  few 
striking  events.  We  believe  that  certain  Signs  gov- 
ern certain  sections  of  the  earth,  but  we  have  not  had 
time  to  fully  investigate  the  subject.  The  fact  that  the 
war  zones  of  1830  correspond  with  the  war  zones  of 
1912  would  lead  one  to  believe  that  this  might  be  the 
case.  On  the  morning  of  June  19th.,  we  read  of  a  col- 
lision of  two  electric  trains,  leaving  11  killed  and 
many  injured.  Mercury  stands  for  traveling,  writing, 
and  children,  and  under  the  influence  of  Mars  this 
accident  occurs.  A  survivor  said  that  he  saw  no  oc- 
casion whatever  for  the  collision.  Tt  is  a  fact  which 


48  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

cannot  be  denied,  that  persons  become  helpless,  to  a 
certain  extent,  under  these  influences ;  either  they  are 
made  to  forget  something,  'or  they  are  led  to  take  un- 
necessary risks,  or  it  may  be  that  they  are  at  the  time 
paralyzed  with  fear ;  anyhow  if  it  is  going  to  come  it 
comes,  and  those  whose  time  has  arrived  are  brought 
there.  One  little  boy,  who  lost  his  father,  tells  how 
they  missed  the  car  they  had  planned  to  take;  and  a 
passenger,  whose  life  was  miraculously  saved,  tells 
of  having  a  premonition  before  he  left  home,  that  he 
was  near  death,  and  leaving  instructions  with  his  wife 
regarding  his  finances.  Such  premonitions  come 
from  planetary  influences,  and  are  not  uncommon. 
We  can  recall  passing  remarks  in  a  careless  manner, 
that  were  prophetic  of  some  event  that  we  never 
dreamt  of  taking  place. 

On  the  evening  of  June  10th,  a  man  under  the  in- 
fluence of  liquor  clubbed  his  wife  to  death,  and  his 
3  little  children  were  taken  to  the  detention  home 
sobbing  for  mama.  Here  Mars  brings  trouble  to 
children.  The  students  of  a  leading  'high  school 
also  threatened  to  go  on  strike  because  their  vacation 
was  cut  down  from  10  to  7  weeks — more  trouble  to 
children,  or  young  persons.  In  connection  with  writ- 
ing, 4  leading  newspaper  men  in  one  city  were 
arrested  on  charges  of  criminal  libel ;  suits  being 
instituted  against  three  papers.  This  took  place  on 
June  18th.  At  this  same  time,  also  in  connection 
with  writing,  a  man  was  given  10  years  in  the  Peni- 
tentiary for  stealing  a  hotel  register  out  of  the  Dis- 
trict Attorney's  office.  What  do  you  think  of  that? 

However,  while  Mars  is  bringing  disaster  to  that 
which  falls  under  Mercury,  Mercury  is  limiting  the 
power  of  Mars.  We  must  remember  that  in  every 
conjunction  planets  act  and  react  upon  each  other, 
and  we  are  pleased  to  record  that  on  June  17,  we  re- 
ceived the  news  that  punishment  by  instruments  of 


METHOD   OF   DEVELOPING  A   CHART     49 

torture  had  been  prohibited  in  prisons  and  reforma- 
tory institutions.  This  was  surely  a  great  relief  to 
those  who  had  read  the  blood-curdling  accounts  of  the 
treatment  of  prisoners  in  these  institutions.  In  this 
case  Mercury  limits  the  power  of  Mars,  or  in  other 
words  cruelty  is  prohibited  by  writing. 

We  might  also  call  your  attention  to  the  fact  that 
we  chose  the  birthdate  for  illustration  at  random,  and 
it  proved  to  be  one  where  Mars  in  conjunction  with 
the  Sun  took  a  leading  part.  Mercury  in  conjunction 
with  Venus  or  some  of  the  other  planets  would  have 
given  us  a  very  different  birthdate  upon  which  to 
write. 

In  these  studies  -you  want  to  make  a  special  point 
of  watching  the  time  at  which  one  planet  passes  an- 
other. An  Ephemeris  marking  these  points  more 
definitely  would  be  very  desirable,  and  we  feel  sure 
that  some  kind  person  will  provide  us  with  it.  You 
will  also  notice  in  this  Chart  that  the  Earth  and  the 
Moon  are  in  conjunction  with  Saturn,  working 
strongly  in  connection  with  death  and  imprisonment. 
The  large  conjunction  to  which  we  have  referred  in 
Chapter  II.  forms  around  the  Sun;  Neptune  will  re- 
main in  the  Sun  Sign  14  years  and  Uranus  7  years, 
and  the  other  planets  travel  in  and  out.  Sometimes 
the  conjunction  is  very  strong,  as  in  Jan.,  1915.  At 
the  present  time  4  good  planets  appear  there  to  1  bad, 
so  that  everything  connected  with  the  Sun  should 
prosper.  Venus  in  the  conjunction  brings  women  in- 
to prominence,  and  Xeptune  is  under  more  favorable 
influences  than  formerly.  Mars  passed  the  Sun  at  the 
time  of  the  floods  in  the  Eastern  States.  Uranus  un- 
der good  influences  puts  a  quietus  on  labor  difficul- 
ties for  the  present,  and  also  brings  relief  to  prisoners. 
The  war  problem  also  gets  a  rest.  At  the  close  of 
this  book  you  will  find  a  complete  list  of  the  charts 
and  explanations  attached  for  reference. 


50  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

CHAPTER  VI. 
Religion. 

For  years  we  were  in  doubt  as  to  what  section  of 
the  chart  governed  religion,  but  while  reading  the  10 
commandments  we  discovered  that  there  we  could 
not  only  determine  the  position  of  religion,  but  we 
could  also  outline  other  indications  of  the  Signs.  We 
find  a  complete  compendium  of  all  the  sins  to  which 
flesh  is  heir,  arranged  according  to  the  Signs.  The 
first  4  commandments  deal  with  our  duty  to  God, 
hence  we  assume  that  religion  is  governed  by  them, 
the  1st.  Sign  being  the  fountain  head.  We  read  in 
Matthew  xxii.,  24,  that  a  lawyer  who  wished  to  en- 
trap Christ  said,  "Master,  which  is  the  greatest  com- 
mandment in  the  law?"  And  Jesus  said  unto  him, 
"Thou  shalt  love  the  Lord  thy  God  with  all  thy  heart, 
with  all  thy  soul,  and  with  all  thy  mind.  This  is  the 
first  and  great  commandment,  and  the  second  is  like 
unto  it.  Thou  shalt  love  thy  neighbor  as  thyself. 
On  these  two  commandments  hang  all  the  law  and 
the  prophets."  Thus  we  see  the  same  division  made 
by  Christ,  the  first  four  dealing  with  our  duty  to  God, 
and  the  remaining  six,  or  eight,  as  we  call  them,  deal- 
ing with  our  duty  to  our  fellow  man.  A  brief  glance 
at  the  commandments  will  prove  interesting;  the  sins 
of  each  Sign  in  the  chart  are  here  enumerated  in 
their  logical  order.  We  will  for  convenience  couple 
the  opposite  signs  as  we  have  done  in  the  charts. 

1st.  Commandment — "Thou  shalt  have  no  other 
gods  before  me."  7th. — "Thou  shalt  not  commit  adul- 
tery;"  the  1st.  and  7th.  governing  religion  and  mar- 
riage. Here  fidelity  to  God  and  fidelity  in  the  mar- 
riage relation  are  coupled. 

2nd.    and    8th. — "Thou    shalt   not    make    unto    thee 


RELIGION  51 

any  graven  image",  and  ''Thou  shalt  not  steal."  The 
2nd.  forbids  the  worship  of  material  things  instead  of 
the  worship  of  God,  and  the  8th.  the  accumulation  of 
worldly  goods  by  dishonest  means.  These  explain 
our  duty  to  God  and  our  duty  to  man  in  material 
things. 

3rd.  and  9th. — "Thou  shalt  not  take  the  name  of 
the  Lord  thy  God  in  vain",  and  "Thou  shalt  not  bear 
false  witness  against  thy  neighbor."  These  forbid 
speaking  reproachfully  of  either  God  or  man.  The 
3rd.  and  9th.  Signs  govern  language. 

4th.  and  10th. — "Remember  the  Sabbath  day  to 
keep  it  holy",  and  "Thou  shalt  not  covet  thy  neigh- 
bor's house."  The  4th.  Sign  is  the  time  keeper.  The 
Sun,  Moon  and  Stars  were  made  under  the  4th.  Sign, 
and  they  are  the  time  keepers ;  this  explains  our  duty 
to  God  with  regard  to  time,  giving  him  one  day  in 
seven.  Houses  come  under  the  4th.  Sign,  and  we  are 
warned  against  coveting  them. 

The  5th.  and  llth.  are,  "Honor  thy  father  and  thy 
mother",  and  "Thou  shalt  not  covet  thy  neighbor's 
wife."  The  5th.  and  llth.  Signs  governing  children 
explain  the  duties  of  children  as  children,  and  also 
forbid  the  illegitimate  birth  of  children. 

6th.  and  12th.— "Thou  shalt  not  kill",  and  "Thou 
shalt  not  covet  thy  neighbor's  manservant,  nor  his 
maidservant,  nor  his  ox,  nor  his  ass,  nor  anything  that 
is  thy  neighbor's."  Thou  shalt  not  kill  comes  direct- 
ly under  the  12th.  Sign,  and  servants  and  animals  also 
come  under  the  6th.  and  12th. 

Some  one  will  say,  I  never  knew  there  were  12 
commandments ;  there  surely  are  12,  but  that  is  not 
a  matter  of  any  importance.  This  outline  corresponds 
exactly  with  the  indications  of  the  12  Signs. 

We  also  wish  to  briefly  glance  at  the  account  of 
the  creation  as  given  in  the  1st.  chapter  of  Genesis. 


52  SOCIAL  SCIENCE. 

On  the  1st.  day,  which  we  will  call  Monday,  God 
created  light,  and  divided  light  from  the  darkness ; 
this  corresponds  with  the  point  between  the  12th.  and 
1st.  Signs  in  the  chart.  The  12th.  stands  for  "dark- 
ness and  hate",  and  the  1st.  for  "love  and  light". 
Christ  says,  "Ye  are  the  light  of  the  world"  ;  light  and 
religion  are  frequently  associated  in  the  Bible.  Love 
and  light  are  also  frequently  associated. 

On  the  2nd.  day  (Tuesday),  God  created  the 
Firmament,  or  Heaven,  as  it  is  called.  The  2nd. 
Sign  stands  for  earthly  reward  (money)  and  the  re- 
ward of  the  soul,  Heaven. 

On  the  beginning  of  the  3rd.  day  (Wednesday),  we 
find  him  creating  the  landscape :  the  dry  land  appears, 
and  grass  and  herb  and  tree  spring  forth  into  exis- 
tence. The  3rd.  Sign  is  the  traveling  sign,  and  every- 
thing that  goes  to  form  a  landscape  comes  under  the 
3rd.  Houses  and  land  come  between  the  3rd.  and  4th. 
Signs,  the  material  for  the  house  coming  from  the 
3rd.,  while  the  art  of  construction  comes  from  the 
4th.,  just  the  same  as  the  material  for  a  book  comes 
from  the  3rd.,  and  the  mechanical  part  'of  the  work 
comes  from  the  4th. 

At  the  beginning  of  the  4th.  (Thursday),  he  said, 
"Let  there  be  light  in  the  firmament  of  Heaven,  to 
divide  the  day  from  the  night,  and  let  them  be  for 
signs,  and  for  seasons,  and  for  days  and  years" ;  Signs 
here  must  refer  to  the  indications  of  the  planets.  If 
we  may  judge  by  the  chart  we  have  presented  in  As- 
tronomy, this  science  comes  under  the  4th.  Sign. 

In  the  beginning  of  the  5th.  day  (Friday),  God  be- 
gan to  create  life,  and  the  5th.  Sign  is  the  point  which 
governs  life  creating  functions  in  all  horoscopes.  He 
commenced  with  the  lower  forms  of  animal  life  which 
inhabit  the  sea.  He  created  fish  and  he  created  them 
on  Friday;  fish  and  Friday  are  still  associated.  He 


RELIGION  53 

also  created  the  fowls  of  the  air  in  the  5th.  Sign ;  fish 
and  fowl  apparently  belong  to  the  5th.  and  llth. 
Signs.  The  stork  has  for  many  years  been  associated 
with  the  birth  of  infants.  In  the  beginning  of  the 
6th.  day,  God  created  all  the  animals  and  everything 
that  creepeth  upon  the  face  of  the  earth ;  the  6th.  Sign 
governs  animals.  Adam  was  probably  created  at  the 
same  time  and  Eve  at  the  beginning  of  the  1st.  Sign, 
this  being  the  marriage  sign ;  the  account  in  the  Bible 
is  not  quite  clear  on  this  point.  God  created  man  in 
his  own  image,  a  little  lower  than  the  angels.  In  our 
spiritual  state  we  shall  be  like  him.  We  care  not 
whether  these  days  were  actual  days  or  periods  of 
1000  years  or  more ;  had  God  considered  the  matter  of 
any  importance  he  could  have  told  us. 

Although  we  lack  an  Ephemeris  to  throw  light  up- 
on Bible  times,  we  could  wander  through  its  pages, 
and  pick  up  a  point  almost  anywhere,  to  elucidate  the 
principles  of  planetary  influence.  Animals  and  ene- 
mies seem  often  to  run  together ;  animals  were  used 
as  a  peace  offering  in  Old  Testament  times.  In  the 
case  of  Adam  and  Eve,  enemies  and  animals  and 
fruit  came  together ;  all  of  these  belong  to  the  12th. 
Sign.  The  serpent  and  the  forbidden  fruit  made  ene- 
mies for  them ;  the  Lord  told  Adam  about  the  forbid- 
den fruit  before  Eve  was  created,  and  Adam  appar- 
ently talked  it  over  with  Eve,  and  was  courteous 
enough  to  give  her  the  first  bite.  That  is  all  there  is 
to  the  great  mystery  of  the  temptation.  Satan  temp- 
ted both  Adam  and  Eve.  True,  Adam  laid  the  blame 
on  Eve,  just  as  man  has  been  laying  the  blame  on 
woman  ever  since.  That  is  one  of  the  mysterious  01- 
fices  of  womankind;  if  she  does  not  do  a  thing  her- 
self, she  tempts  man  to  do  it. 

Moses  twice  experienced  a  signal  deliverance 
through  the  agency  of  water.  Pharaoh's  daughter 


54  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

found  him  in  an  ark  when  she  came  to  the  river  to 
bathe  and  took  him  to  her  home;  again  the  Egyptians 
were  drowned  while  they  were  pursuing  him  across 
the  Red  Sea.  Moses  was  born  under  circumstances 
similar  to  those  under  which  Jesus  was  born.  All  the 
male  children  were  being  killed ;  each  must  have  had 
a  very  strong  12th.  Sign.  Fighting  and  animals  play 
a  very  prominent  part  in  Bible  times.  Christ  was 
born  in  a  stable  and  cradled  in  a  manger,  showing 
that  his  12th.  Sign  must  have  been  very  strong. 
Christ  was  not  baptized,  neither  did  he  enter  into 
any  active  work  until  he  was  about  30  years  of  age. 
Probably  he  would  have  met  his  death  earlier  if  he 
had  come  into  contact  with  the  masses  in  the  same 
way.  It  was  also  in  the  purpose  of  God  that  he 
should  reach  the  period  of  the  highest  development 
before  being  offered  up  as  a  sacrifice. 

In  Genesis  we  read  that  giants  lived  in  those  days, 
and  that  they  lived  to  be  nearly  1000  years  of  age.  It 
is  probable  that  the  race  is  becoming  smaller  and 
shorter  lived,  with  quicker  pulse,  quicker  action,  and 
more  rapid  development.  Someone  writes,  "\Ye 
count  time  by  heart  throbs,  not  by  figures  on  a  dial." 
It  is  asserted  by  astronomers  that  stars  are  increas- 
ing their  speed ;  if  so  there  is  probably  a  correspond- 
ing change  in  human  existence.  This  is  a  rushing 
world  compared  with  the  world  of  Bible  times. 
Christ  was  probably  not  any  older  at  30  than  a  man 
of  these  times  would  be  at  25.  The  time  of  his  minis- 
try was  short ;  others  could  preach  but  he  alone  could 
perform  the  work  of  redemption.  At  the  time  of  his 
crucifixion  planetary  conditions  must  have  reached 
the  greatest  climax  in  history;  never  until  Christ 
comes  again  shall  we  behold  anything  similar.  The 
land  was  in  darkness  for  the  space  of  three  hours ; 
the  earth  did  quake,  rocks  were  rent,  the  graves  were 


RELIGION  55 

opened  and  many  of  the  saints  arose.  The  veil  in 
the  temple,  symbolic  of  the  thin  veil  which  divides 
the  seen  from  the  unseen,  was  rent  in  twain  and  it 
seemed  for  a  time  as  if  there  was  no  dividing 
line  between  this  world  and  the  next.  We  assume 
that  Christ,  who  was  subject  to  like  temptation  with 
us,  came  under  planetary  influences  in  the  same  man- 
ner. His  12th.  Sign  and  2nd.  seem  to  have  been  the 
leading  points  at  this  time.  He  was  betrayed  for  30 
pieces  of  silver,  and  crucified  between  thieves ;  the 
incident  of  the  alabaster  box  of  ointment,  in  which 
Christ  was  told  by  his  disciples  that  the  box  might 
have  been  sold  and  the  money  given  to  the  poor  im- 
mediately preceded  his  betrayal ;  before  this  came  the 
parable  of  the  talents.  We  cannot  dwell  long  upon 
this  most  important  event  in  the  history  of  the 
world,  but  one  point  strikes  us  as  being  the 
most  mysterious,  the  most  pathetic,  the  most  deplor- 
able feature  of  this  amazing  tragedy.  Christ  was  cru- 
cified by  the  church,  He  was  sold  to  the  priests,  by 
one  of  his  own  disciples,  for  30  pieces  of  silver.  Then 
Judas  took  the  money  back  to  the  priests  and  went 
and  hanged  himself.  The  priests  could  not  put  the 
money  in  the  treasury,  for  it  was  the  price  of  blood, 
so  they  bought  a  field  with  it  in  which  to  bury  pau- 
pers. 

He  was  accused  by  the  chief  priests  and  elders,  and 
when  Pilate  was  more  than  willing  to  release  him, 
they  cried  out  crucify  him,  crucify  him.  "He  came 
unto  his  own  and  his  own  received  him  not."  They 
said,  "Who  hath  made  this  man  to  rule  over  us."  "Is 
not  this  Joseph  the  Carpenter's  son?"  This  fellow 
said,  "I  am  able  to  destroy  the  temple  of  God  and  to 
build  it  in  three  days."  Because  Jesus  did  not  come 
as  a  great  king  they  showed  naught  but  contempt 
for  him.  They  were  not  ignorant,  the  chief  priests 


56  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

and  scribes  had  read  the  prophesies  concerning  the 
coming  of  the  Messiah  and  knew  that  he  was  to  be 
"despised  and  rejected  of  men,  a  man  of  sorrows,  and 
acquainted  with  grief,"  and  yet  that  awful  demon 
pride  came  in  between  them  and  the  greatest  blessing 
ever  vouchsafed  to  man,  the  love  and  companionship 
of  the  blessed  Saviour  of  the  world.  Would  the  church 
of  the  present  day  crucify  Christ  afresh  if  he  came  to 
them  as  he  came  to  the  church  of  old?  This  is  a  very 
serious  and  a  very  terrible  question  to  answer.  Of 
his  ministry  it  is  needless  to  write  fit  shows  a  great 
heart  full  of  love  for  every  one,  friends  and  enemies 
as  well ;  He  went  about  raising  the  dead,  healing  the 
sick,  comforting  the  sorrowful  and  converting  the  sin- 
ful. Some  one  has  said  that  Jesus  never  saw  any  one 
in  distress  without  relieving  them.  He  traveled 
around  as  a  living  benediction,  never  thinking  of  self 
— had  not  even  "where  to  lay  his  head." 

It  is  said  of  Ludwig  Beethoven  that  his  broth- 
er came  to  visit  him,  and  finding  him  out,  left  a  card 
bearing  his  name  and  "land  proprietor"  scribbled  un- 
derneath. Ludwig  not  to  be  outdone  returned  the 
compliment  by  leaving  a  card  at  his  brother's  home 
with  "brain  proprietor"  scribbled  underneath.  One 
man  is  proud  of  his  land  and  another  man  of  his 
brains,  but  the  man  who  is  a  heart  proprietor,  is  the 
one  who  lays  up  treasure  in  heaven,  like  the  lowly 
Jesus,  he  becomes  the  servant  of  his  fellow  man,  that 
he  may  minister  to  the  necessity  of  those  around  him, 
and,  henceforth  there  is  laid  up. for  him  a  crown  of 
righteousness.  It  is  interesting  to  notice  how  many 
times  the  expression  "that  the  scripture  might  be  ful- 
filled," occurs  in  the  gospels  narrating  the  life  of 
Christ.  Whether  this  expression  implies  fore-ordin- 
ation or  merely  fore-knowledge,  or  both  it  is  difficult 
to  ascertain ;  but  there  is  one  thing  certain  and  that 


RELIGION 


57 


is,  we  are  all  blindly  following  the  lead  of  fate  to  a 
far  greater  extent  than  we  realize.  This  question  will 
be  dealt  with  in  another  chapter. 

No.  3  is  the  Chart  of  a  celebrated  divine  known  as 
"the  boy  preacher,"  who  at  the  age  of  18  years  took 
charge  of  a  Baptist  congregation ;  he  began  by  deliv- 
ering cottage  sermons.  At  the  age  of  20  he  moved  to 
Park  Chapel,  London,  and  at  27  the  great  Metropol- 
itan Tabernacle  was  opened,  with  Stockwell  Orphan- 
age in  connection.  He  also  founded  a  pastors'  college, 
and  edited  a  paper.  His  sermons  were  published  as 
they  were  delivered,  and  afterwards  in  book  form, 
many  volumes  being  translated  into  foreign  languages. 
You  will  notice  that  Mercury  has  passed  Venus  in 
the  llth  Sign,  while  he  was  quite  young  and  this 
would  tend  to  bring  him  before  the  public  early  and 


"THE   BOY    PREACHER 


58 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


also  account  for  his  starting  as  a  school-teacher.  Sat- 
urn and  Mars  in  the  point  between  the  10th  and  llth 
cause  him  to  build  an  orphanage.  The  4th  stands 
for  building,  and  the  5th  for  children.  Mars  and  Sat- 
urn bring  him  into  contact  with  children  in  trouble. 

The  three  points  which  require  to  be  strong  in  order 
to  become  a  successful  minister  of  the  Gospel  are  the 
7th.  Sign  for  Religion  and  Study ;  the  3rd.  for  writ- 
ing, and  the  llth.  for  coming  into  contact  with  the 
public.  The  3rd.  also  controls  visiting,  but  some  of 
the  ablest  preachers  do  not  visit  much;  we  presume 
visiting  detracts  from  writing.  In  No  3  the  strongest 
point  is  his  3rd.  Sign  for  writing;  this  accounts  for 
his  sermons  being  published  wholesale  as  they  were, 
and  for  his  editing  a  paper.  We  do  not  think  that 
everyone  with  his  horoscope  would  accomplish  the 


EMINENT  AMERICAN   DIVINE 


RELIGION 


59 


same  work;  he  doubtless  had  inherited  certain  endow- 
ments of  mind  and  body  which  also  contributed  tow- 
ard making  him  what  he  was. 

No.  4,  who  was  a  celebrated  American  divine,  will 
next  be  considered;  his  2nd.  Sign  is  very  strong. 
Planets  in  the  1st.  run  a  strong  conjunction  with  the 
2nd.  Sign :  assuming  that  heaven  comes  under  the 
2nd.  Sign,  we  must  admit  that  he  excelled  in  his  con- 
ceptions of  heaven,  and  his  imagery  is  very  beautiul 
in  many  of  his  writings.  There  are  several  interest- 
ing points  in  his  horoscope.  His  church  was  de- 
stroyed by  fire  three  times,  and  he  was  married  three 
times,  his  first  wife  being  drowned.  You  will  notice 
that  Neptune  is  under  very  bad  influences,  so  also  is 
Venus ;  Mars  and  Venus  run  a  conjunction  from 
about  30  years  of  age  to  near  the  end.  Mars  being  in 


f\fo.  5" 
A    GREAT    EVANGELIST 


60 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


good  company,  he  gains  by  fire;  each  time  a  more 
beautiful  church  was  built.  When  Mercury  comes 
into  the  3rd.  Sign,  he  gives  himself  up  to  traveling 
and  writing.  We  have  not  secured  the  exact  dates, 
so  cannot  give  the  Transits  when  these  events  took 
place. 

Passing  on  to  No.  5,  the  horoscope  of  a  celebrated 
American  evangelist,  we  find  Saturn  in  his  4th.  Sign 
governing  his  father  and  mother ;  his  father  died  when 
he  was  quite  young,  and  his  mother  was  left  with 
nine  children.  He  worked  and  attended  school  at  the 
same  time,  and  later  when  the  Moon  entered  his  12th. 
Sign  he  went  to  work  in  his  uncle's  shoe  shop ;  uncles 
and  shoes  come  under  the  12th.  Sign.  Shortly  after- 
ward he  opened  a  shop  of  his  own,  and  cleared  $5000 


No.  6 

NOTED  FOREIGN  MISSIONARY 


RELIGION 


61 


the  1st.  year,  but  being"  interested  in  Mission  work 
and  being  especially  successful  along  that  line,  he 
soon  became  the  unordained  pastor  of  a  church.  He 
also  had  his  Y.  M.  C.  A.  buildings  and  home  destroyed 
by  fire,  but  rebuilt.  While  the  Moon  was  in  his  gi- 
gantic 1st.  Sign  he  built  a  Seminary  for  girls,  and  two 
years  later  a  school  for  boys.  Our  chart  is  taken  at 
this  period.  He  was  presented  with  $30,000  on  his 
60th.  birthday.  With  this  he  built  a  chapel  for  the 
school.  The  1st.  Sign  shows  wonderful  brain  power 
and  a  strong  conjunction  between  the  1st.  and  2nd. 
should  give  him  great  fluency  of  speech ;  moreover 
his  religious  fervor  was  not  all  educated  out  of  him 
before  he  entered  on  his  field  of  labor.  It  requires 
more  brain  power  to  simplify  religion  or  anything 
else  for  that  matter  than  it  does  to  give  a  learned 


A  SUCCESSFUL  PASTOR 


62  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

discourse.  His  power  to  simplify  and  elucidate  re- 
ligious doctrines  and  principles  was  wonderful. 

Our  next  Chart,  No.  6,  is  that  of  a  noted  foreign 
missionary  who  has  done  a  great  work  in  the  islands 
of  the  sea.  Mars  in  his  3rd.  Sign  shows  that  he  has 
encountered  danger  in  his  travels,  perhaps  bloodshed; 
it  also  often  indicates  suffering  from  heat.  Saturn 
and  the  Sun  in  conjunction  in  his  llth.  Sign  indicate 
death  to  friends  in  a  notable  manner.  Mercury  and 
Venus  form  a  conjunction  between  his  llth.  and  12th. 
Signs,  giving  him  great  success  in  teaching  and  in 
appearing  before  public  audiences.  About  the  time 
of  this  chart,  he  made  a  tour  of  America  soliciting 
aid  for  his  work,  and  drew  immense  audiences.  You 
will  find  three  good  planets  in  the  12th.  Sign ;  these 
should  give  him  victory  over  his  enemies ;  they  would 
also  give  him  success  in  journeys  upon  foot,  many  of 
which  he  has  taken.  Uranus  is  found  in  the  1st. 
Sign  ;  this  planet  frequently  stands  for  foreigners,  and 
he  married  a  native.  By  this  act  he  gained  the  con- 
fidence of  the  people,  and  opened  up  a  field  in  which 
he  met  with  almost  unprecedented  success. 

Our  last  chart,  No.  7,  shows  the  pastor  of  a  beauti- 
ful city  church ;  we  know  very  little  of  his  life,  but 
his  planets  occupy  the  three  points  usually  occupied 
in  a  chart  of  a  minister  of  the  Gospel,  viz.,  the  1st. 
for  study,  the  3rd.  for  writing,  and  the  llth.  for  pub- 
lic gatherings.  It  may  be  said  that  No.  5  had  a  weak 
llth.  Sign,  but  we  must  remember  that  a  gifted  sing- 
er was  associated  with  him  during  the  years  of  his 
greatest  success,  and  he  had  a  very  strong  llth.  Sign. 
No.  5  would  draw  women  very  strongly  through  his 
1st.  Sign,  and  he  would  draw  students  of  all  classes 
through  the  1st.;  he  should  have  been  remarkably 
successful  among  the  latter,  and  we  believe  he  was; 


RELIGION  63 

his   revival   in   Edinburgh   University   is   evidence   on 
that  point. 

We  have  one  suggestion  here  which  should  be  es- 
pecially helpful  to  ministers  of  the  Gospel.  A  man 
with  a  chart  such  as  No.  5  shows  might  not  require 
to  prepare  his  sermons.  With  a  heavy  conjunction  be- 
tween the  1st.  and  2nd.  Signs,  he  might  be  able  to 
open  his  mouth  and  speak  as  the  spirit  moved  him. 
Under  these  circumstances  his  address  would  eman- 
ate directly  from  his  horoscope,  whereas  if  he  had 
prepared  his  discourse  some  time  previously,  and  de- 
livered it  when  the  Moon  had  changed  to  another 
Sign,  it  would  come  awkwardly.  Ministers  frequent- 
ly select  a  different  sermon  an  hour  or  two  before  en- 
tering the  pulpit;  the  sermon  they  had  prepared  for 
the  occasion  seemed  out  of  place,  because  the  Moon 
had  changed.  To  obviate  this  difficulty,  they  should 
keep  an  Ephemeris  before  them  just  as  they  keep  a 
calendar,  and  always  prepare  the  sermon  about  two 
weeks  in  advance,  while  the  Moon  is  in  the  same 
Sign  in  which  it  will  be  when  the  sermon  is  delivered. 
If  an  old  sermon  is  to  be  used,  select  one  that  fits 
the  time.  Different  planets  may  appear  in  that  Sign 
and  that  will  lead  them  to  make  a  few  changes  in  it. 
This  rule  also  applies  to  lecturing,  music,  the  stage, 
and  everything  that  is  to  be  presented  to  a  public 
audience.  If  the  work  prepared  corresponds  with  the 
Sign  in  which  the  Moon  stands  when  you  come  be- 
fore an  audience,  you  will  meet  with  much  greater 
success  than  you  would  otherwise.  It  will  come  nat- 
urally, spontaneously,  and  from  the  heart ;  in  other 
words  it  will  come  with  power,  and  coming  with 
power  will  leave  a  deep  impression  upon  the  audience. 
We  want  to  get  rid  of  that  which  is  merely  formal 
and  mechanical.  A  singer  may  have  a  perfect  voice, 
and  yet  create  no  impression.  You  have  all  heard  this 


64  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

sort  of  singing  in  a  church  congregation.  Every- 
thing that  is  worth  while  must  have  heart  and  soul 
in  it.  In  preparing  this  book  all  that  falls  under  the 
1st.  Sign  was  written  while  the  Moon  was  in  the  1st. 
Sign,  and  the  other  Signs  the  same.  We  found  that 
we  could  not  succeed  otherwise. 


CHAPTER  VII. 
Education. 

We  feel  that  education  in  these  days  is  being 
handled  in  a  manner  satisfactory  to  all ;  we  should 
like  however  to  see  a  text  book  upon  moral  and  civil 
law  or  something  of  that  sort  to  establish  more  ef- 
fectually a  rule  of  conduct  for  our  young  people.  We 
wish  also  to  call  attention  to  the  danger  of  over 
crowding  in  connection  with  education.  A  child  who 
has  a  natural  talent  along  some  particular  line,  as 
most  children  have,  should  be  allowed  to  cultivate 
that  talent  even  at  the  expense  of  other  branches  of 
learning;  and  many  subjects  should  be  only  taught  to 
those  who  have  a  special  talent  for  them.  We  notice 
that  the  men  and  the  women  who  have  risen  to  first 
rank  in  the  world  have  been  largely  those  of  whom 
it  might  be  said,  that  their  schooling  had  been  ne- 
glected. Frequently  the  home  is  broken  up  by  death 
of  parents,  ill-health  or  poverty,  and  sometimes  iso- 
lated surroundings  have  interfered  with  educational 
privileges,  or  it  may  be  that  they  have  been  educated 
in  a  private  school  where  the  teacher  recognized  their 
special  talents  and  used  discretion  in  a  choice  of 
studies.  For  some  reason  they  were  allowed  to  drift 
along,  and  to  concentrate  their  energies  along  a  spec- 
ial line,  until  they  had  acquired  distinction.  A  good 


EDUCATION  65 

all-around  development  and  a  marked  special  devel- 
opment are  scarcely  to  be  expected.  Rosa  Bonheur, 
Robert  Burns,  Herbert  Spencer,  Stephenson,  Edison, 
and  a  host  of  others  might  be  mentioned  to  illustrate 
the  power  of  early  special  development.  This  is  one 
place  where  the  poor  man's  son  often  has  an  advan- 
tage over  the  rich.  He  is  not  burdened  with  a  full 
college  course.  "Jac^  °f  a^  trades  and  master  of 
none",  is  too  often  verified  in  actual  life. 

The  four  departments  governed  by  the  1st.  Sign, 
religion,  education,  marriage,  and  dress,  are  strangely 
mingled  and  intermingled  with  each  other.  It  has 
been  the  custom  for  many  years  for  the  Church  to 
solemnize  marriages.  We  see  no  reason  why  the 
State  might  not  do  so  just  as  properly:  the  State 
takes  charge  of  the  marriage  before  and  after  it  is 
solemnized ;  it  issues  the  license,  grants  divorce,  pro- 
secutes those  who  marry  illegally,  oversees  the  care  of 
the  children,  etc.  This  reminds  us  of  a  statement 
made  by  one  of  our  leading  clergymen  to  the  effect 
that  when  the  church  united  the  parties  in  marriage, 
only  the  church  could  grant  divorce.  Religion  and 
marriage  appear  to  be  naturally  associated ;  religion 
and  education  also  go  hand  in  hand.  When  a  young 
man  becomes  zealous  in  spiritual  things,  and  wishes 
to  enter  the  ministry,  he  is  sent  to  spend  years  in 
completing  his  education.  Sometimes  we  think  he 
is  educated  at  the  expense  of  religion,  and  often  loses 
his  fervor  before  he  enters  the  active  work  of  the 
ministry.  When  the  Gospel  is  sent  to  the  heathen, 
education  is  sent  along  with  it,  and  often  clothing 
as  well ;  religion,  education,  and  clothing  thus  trav- 
eling together.  Marriage  and  education  are  even 
more  frequently  found  hobnobbing  together.  Many 
courtships  are  started  in  connection  with  school  and 
college  life  and  many  who  are  disappointed  in  mar- 


66  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

riage  turn  their  attention  to  study.  We  would  dis- 
courage flirtation  in  connection  with  school  and  col- 
lege life,  although  it  would  be  rather  difficult  in  our 
present  system  of  co-education,  and  our  girls  should 
be  permitted  to  take  a  university  course,  just  the 
same  as  the  boys.  Love-making  and  study  coming 
under  the  same  sign,  one  detracts  from  the  other,  and 
we  would  advise  our  young  people  to  study  first  and 
court  afterward. 

According  to  the  Apostle  Paul,  marriage  detracts 
from  religion :  I  Corinthians  vii.,  32,  33 ;  and  probably 
dress  detracts  from  marriage.  We  recollect  a  young 
lady  who  made  the  following  remark  on  the  eve  of  her 
wedding:  "I  don't  feel  as  if  I  were  going  to  be  mar- 
ried, I  wonder  what  is  wrong  with  me" ;  and  yet  she 
had  been  engaged  for  several  years,  and  was  marry- 
ing the  only  sweet-heart  she  ever  had.  We  just  think 
that  her  mind  had  been  so  fully  pre-occupied  gather- 
ing up  all  sorts  of  finery  that  she  had  in  a  manner 
forgotten  the  man. 

Our  first  Chart,  No.  8,  is  that  of  a  professor  who 
is  noted,  not  only  as  an  educator,  but  as  a  writer. 
The  works  by  which  he  is  best  known  are  "Natural 
Law  in  the  Spiritual  World"  and  "Love  the  greatest 
thing  in  the  world."  Our  Chart  shows  the  position  of 
the  planets  at  the  time  the  latter  was  published.  Some 
men  would  have  been  getting  married  about  this  time 
(The  Moon  is  leaving  the  1st.  Sign  under  good  influ- 
ences) but  he  had  long  before  given  his  life  up  to  re- 
ligious and  educational  work,  hence  he  gives  us  a 
treatise  on  love  instead  of  being  married.  Probably 
had  he  been  married  at  this  time  the  world  would 
never  have  seen  this  little  book  of  which  185,000 
copies  were  sold  in  six  months. 

"Natural  Law  in  the  Spiritual  World"  was  pub- 
lished while  the  Moon  was  in  the  3rd.  and  4th.  Signs. 


EDUCATION 


67 


It  also  had  a  very  large  circulation,  and  21  books  and 
pamphlets  were  written  criticising  it.  He  succeeded 
in  making  a  little  stir  in  the  world,  and  he  is  just 
as  highly  respected  today  as  before  these  criticisms 
were  published.  Seventeen  biographies  were  written 
of  him  after  his  death.  He  was  professor  of  natural 
sciences  in  Edinburgh  University,  and  had  the  honor 
of  teaching  students  from  all  parts  of  the  world ; 
being  very  much  loved  by  the  students  and  his  college 
associates.  It  is  said  that  he  had  a  sunny  disposition 
and  a  nobility  of  character  that  attracted  all  men  to 
him.  "The  Greatest  Thing  in  the  World"  gives  us 
the  key  to  his  character.  He  is  a  plain  and  pointed 
writer,  and  everyone  should  read  this  little  volume. 
Such  passages  as  the  following  are  well  worth  mem- 
orizing: "What  makes  a  man  a  good  athlete?  Prac- 


PROFESSOR  OF   NATURAL  SCIENCE 


68  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

tice."  What  makes  a  man  a  good  man?  Practice." 
During  his  last  illness,  which  was  very  trying, 
he  said  to  a  friend,  "I  cannot  shake  hands,  but  I  have 
a  good  story  for  you."  He  was  noted  for  geniality 
and  cheerfulness.  He  was  a  man  who  was  brilliant 
socially,  and  yet  he  loved  the  quiet  places  of  the  earth. 
His  nature  studies  led  him  to  travel  in  many  obscure 
places.  Uranus  and  Saturn  in  the  3rd.  and  4th.  favor 
the  study  of  Natural  Science.  Assuming  as  we  do 
that  Saturn  rules  the  Earth,  and  Uranus  rules  the  air, 
plant  life  derives  all  nourishment  from  these  two 
sources. 

There  is  another  point,  in  connection  with  plant 
life  and  in  relation  to  color,  that  seems  to  be  worth 
investigating.  There  are  three  primary  colors :  red, 
blue,  and  yellow.  All  other  colors,  so  far  as  we  know, 
may  be  derived  from  these.  Mars  we  believe  gov- 
erns red,  Saturn  yellow,  and  Uranus  blue.  Our  main 
reason  for  believing  that  Mars  governs  red  is  the  fact 
that  the  planet  is  of  a  reddisft  color;  then  we  know 
that  Mars  governs  bloodshed  and  fire.  It  is  also  be- 
lieved that  this  color  stimulates  a  fighting  spirit.  "A 
red  rag  to  a  bull"  is  a  well  known  expression.  The 
fact  that  plants  in  a  dark,  closed  place  grow  yellow 
instead  of  green,  connects  yellow  with  the  earth. 
When  they  are  exposed  to  the  air,  they  draw  the  blue 
element  from  the  air  and  the  blue  combines  with  the 
yellow  to  form  green.  Blue  is  the  only  color  we  can 
connect  with  the  air.  Mountains  in  the  distance  ap- 
pear blue.  A  clear  sky  appears  blue,  and  water  at  a 
distance  appears  blue ;  this  is  the  blue  of  the  air. 
Water  itself  is  not  blue  any  more  than  mountains 
are  blue.  Here  we  have  a  foundation  for  the  study  of 
color.  These  few  hints  have  been  given  in  connection 
with  natural  science,  as  we  will  not  have  space  for  a 
special  chapter  on  color.  Nearly  all  coloring  matter 


EDUCATION 


69 


is  derived  from  plant  life,  or  low  forms  of  animal 
life.  It  strikes  one  at  first  as  strange  that  these  beau- 
tiful colors  which  form  the  foundation  of  all  color  de- 
rive their  beauty  from  the  influences  of  what  we  call 
the  bad  planets:  Uranus,  Saturn,  and  Mars,  and  yet 
we  must  remember  that  plant  life  feeds  on  the  corrup- 
tion and  demoralization  of  animal  life.  Plant  life 
does  not  require  any  pure  food  laws  in  order  to 
thrive.  Decay  and  putrefaction  provide  the  elements 
out  of  which  these  beautiful  blossoms  and  softly 
tinted  leaves  are  formed.  This  view  of  the  subject 
throws  light  upon  what  would  otherwise  appear  mys- 
terious to  the  student.  Plant  life  demands  the  demor- 
alization of  animal  life.  We  believe  that  animals 
come  under  planetary  influence  much  the  same  as 


No.  9 

PRESIDENT  OF  A  UNIVERSITY 


70 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


human  beings,   although   want  of  space  prevents  our 
opening  up  this  branch  of  the  subject. 

Chart  No.  9  is  that  of  another  student  of  Natural 
Science.  He  was  born  on  Jan.  19,  1851,  and  No.  8  on 
Aug.  17,  1851,  about  six  months  later.  This  brings 
them  practically  under  the  same  Sign,  and  conse- 
quently there  is  a  striking  similarity  between  the 
horoscopes  of  the  two  men.  Mars  removed  to  the 
12th.  in  the  latter  relieves  conditions  for  health  and 
accident,  in  his  horoscope,  and  gives  him  a  greater 
interest  in  animals  and  war,  and  all  that  pertains  to 
the  12th.  Sign.  He  has  been  interested  in  the  Alaskan 
fisheries,  and  has  made  a  specialty  of  Zoology  in  his 
Scientific  research.  Venus  and  the  Moon  standing 
between  the  4th.  and  5th.  Signs  lead  him  to  take*  an 
interest  in  "Eugenics,  or  the  art  of  being  well  born". 


AN  EMINENT  HISTORIAN 


EDUCATION 


71 


the  4th.  Sign  standing  for  parents  and  the  5th.  for 
children.  Mercury  coming  into  conjunction  with  the 
Sun  and  Mars  between  the  12th.  and  1st.  and  oppo- 
site a  large  conjunction  in  the  Transits  leads  him 
travel,  speak,  and  write  in  connection  with  the  War 
topic.  He  has  been  for  a  number  of  years  President 
of  one  of  the  most  richly  endowed  Universities  in  the 
world,  and  might  be  reclining  in  the  lap  of  luxury, 
but  he  still  feels  the  weight  of  suffering  humanity 
upon  his  shoulders. 

In  No.  10  we  have  a  distinguished  British,  Cana- 
dian historian,  who  made  himself  famous  or  in- 
famous by  advocating  the  annexation  of  Canada  to 
the  United  States;  a  writer  of  history,  teacher  of  his- 
tory, and  maker  of  history.  His  12th.  Sign  is  very 
strong.  At  first  sight  this  reminds  us  of  a  story  told 


jfe-'il 

A  TITLED   ASTRONOMER 


72 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


of  a  little  boy  who  was  asked  by  his  teacher  if  he  did 
not  believe  in  war.  "No,"  said  he  "war,  makes  his- 
tory, and  there  is  more  history  than  I  can  study  now." 
There  is  more  truth  than  poetry  in  the  child's  remark ; 
the  study  of  history  means  the  continuous  recital  of 
wars  and  conflicts  between  the  nations,  hence  the 
strong  12th.  Sign  in  the  horoscope  before  us.  His 
3rd.  and  4th.  stand  for  reading  and  writing  and  the 
12th.  for  war  also  political  and  social  reforms.  All 
his  planets  stand  at  these  two  points.  He  is  known 
to  be  a  man  who  was  not  afraid  to  express  his  views 
on  any  subject. 

No.  11  is  a  famous  English  astronomer,  who  bears  a 
title.  His  father  was  a  naturalist  and  doubtless  he 
inherited  a  taste  for  a  more  mysterious  branch  of  na- 
ture study,  that  of  the  heavens.  We  find  Venus  and 


No.  12 

BLIND,  DEAF,  AND  DUMB 


EDUCATION 


73 


Mercury  and  the  Moon  forming  a  conjunction  with 
Uranus,  Saturn  and  Mars  in  the  4th.  Sign.  From 
the  account  of  the  Creation  we  decided  that  astron- 
omy came  under  the  4th.  Sign.  Other  astronomers 
we  find  with  a  strong  4th.  The  4th.  Sign  we  believe 
gives  Mathematical  ability  and  this  is  very  essential 
to  the  successful  study  of  astronomy. 

This  great  scientist  has  published  about  twelve 
works  on  astronomy  and  has  been  President  of  the 
Royal  Astronomical  Society  and  Director  of  the  Ob- 
servatory. 

In  No.  12.,  we  have  a  teacher  blind,  deaf  and  dumb. 
One  would  wonder  how  she  could  impart  instruction 
to  any  one,  and  yet  she  taught  in  a  school  for  the 
blind.  It  is  thought  she  might  have  been  taught  the 
art  of  speech  had  the  method  followed  later  been 


TALENTED  PRIMARY  TEACHER 


74  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

understood.  Despite  her  severe  affliction,  it  is  said 
by  those  who  knew  her  that  she  enjoyed  life  as  much 
or  more  than  most  persons  do.  The  loss  of  her  senses 
was  due  to  an  attack  of  scarlet  fever  when  she  was 
scarcely  more  than  two  years  of  age.  Uranus  and 
Saturn  in  close  conjunction  with  the  Sun  in  the  2nd. 
Sign  near  the  1st.  caused  the  trouble.  Neptune  also 
comes  into  the  conjunction.  Great  care  should  be 
taken  in  prescribing  medicine  for  those  who  have  Nep- 
tune in  a  bad  position.  Danger  from  all  liquids  is 
indicated. 

Our  last  Chart,  No  13,  is  that  of  a  successful  lady 
teacher  in  a  city  school.  At  the  time  this  Chart  is 
taken,  Venus  and  Murcury  form  a  conjunction  in  her 
1st.  Sign;  Mars  however  is  in  the  1st.  and  she  lost 
her  husband  early  in  life.  He  died  suddenly  and  she 
was  left  with  a  boy;  her  llth.  Sign  being  especially 
good  the  boy  proved  to  be  a  great  comfort  to  her. 
Her  llth.  Sign  also  gives  her  success  with  children 
in  school  work.  Her  3rd.  is  ominous ;  brothers  and 
sisters  come  under  the  3rd.  sign  and  she  cared  for  an 
invalid  sister  for  many  years  in  addition  to  her  school 
work.  Hers  is  one  of  those  useful  lives,  which  doubt- 
less has  treasure  laid  up  in  heaven.  For  common 
school  work  the  1st.  and  llth.  are  the  drawing  Signs. 
A  teacher  and  an  actress  draw  on  the  same  points 
and  the  work  is  in  many  respects  similar.  In  higher 
education  other  points  come  in.  We  have  given  ex- 
amples in  Natural  Science,  Zoology,  History  and  As- 
tronomy. We  should  like  to  give  many  others.  It 
is  a  notable  fact  that  President  Wilson  formerly  of 
Princeton,  President  Hadley  of  Yale  and  President 
Lowell  of  Harvard  were  all  born  in  the  same  year  and 
have  similar  horoscopes. 


DRESS  75 

CHAPTER  VIII. 
Dress. 

We  make  no  distinction  between  men  and  women 
from  an  astrological  standpoint.  If  any  distinction 
should  be  made  we  have  not  discerned  the  fact;  each 
is  subject  to  like  temptations  and  endowed  with  like 
intellectual  gifts.  There  are  distinct  differences  in 
the  appearance  and  habits  of  the  two  sexes,  but  these 
we  attribute  to  physical  peculiarities. 

In  order  to  elucidate  planetary  influence  in  the  mat- 
ter of  dress  let  us  regard  Aries  as  the  1st.  Sign.  Tau- 
rus the  2nd.  Gemini  the  3rd.  and  so  on ;  Aries  then 
will  govern  the  upper  part  of  the  head,  Taurus  the 
lower ;  Gemini  the  shoulders,  and  hands.  In  1908 
Saturn  entered  Aries :  Saturn  is  a  cold  planet  and 
leads  to  wearing  thin  clothing  or  laying  the  skin  bare. 
Mars  is  a  warm  planet  and  leads  to  wearing  warm 
clothing  frequently  choosing  red  as  a  color.  A  con- 
junction of  Mars  and  Saturn  leads  to  such  eccentric- 
ities as  wearing  a  fur  collar  around  the  neck,  and  ex- 
posing the  bare  throat  and  chest  to  the  chilly  air,  as 
you  see  women  doing  occasionally.  Conjunctions  of 
Mars  and  Saturn  bring  on  epidemics  of  la  grippe, 
influenza  and  pneumonia,  induced  by  sudden  changes 
of  temperature ;  being:  over-heated  and  then  exposed 
to  a  chill.  The  body  will  stand  heat  or  cold  but  sud- 
den changes  from  heat  to  cold  are  dangerous.  We 
mention  this  fact  here  as  we  will  probably  not  be  in 
a  position  to  devote  a  chapter  to  disease. 

Saturn  in  Aries  governing  the  upper  part  of  the 
head,  led  women  to  adopt  the  practice  of  traveling 
with  their  heads  uncovered,  and  sitting  in  public 
places  with  their  hats  removed.  In  1909  Jupiter  came 
into  conjunction  with  Saturn  in  Aries,  and  Jupiter 


76  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

being  the  largest  planet  led  women  to  adopt  the  large 
hat  as  a  head  covering.  Saturn  in  Aries  and  Taurus 
also  led  men  to  shave  off  their  beards  and  women  to 
dope  with  powder  to  excess;  for  Saturn  rules  death 
and  anything  that  gives  a  deathly  appearance  to  the 
face.  Saturn  has  passed  on,  and  the  word  has  gone 
forth  that  powder  closes  up  the  pores  of  the  skin  and 
is  injurious;  and  so  it  is  not  so  extensively  used. 
Doubtless  someone  will  proclaim  the  fact  that  a  man 
is  not  at  his  best  without  a  beard  and  the  beard  will 
be  allowed  to  grow  again.  When  Saturn  enters  the 
3rd  Sign  ladies  adopt  the  style  of  wearing  their 
dresses  very  low  around  the  neck  and  short  sleeves, 
but  when  this  planet  enters  the  4th,  it  comes  into 
conjunction  with  the  Sun  in  the  5th.  The  Sun  always 
stands  in  the  5th,  controlling  the  region  of  the  heart. 
The  Sun  near  the  change  between  the  4th  and  5th, 
runs  a  conjunction  with  all  planets  in  these  two 
Signs.  Tight-lacing  comes  under  the  Sun  conjunc- 
tions, and  in  our  opinion  women  have  no  room  to 
throw  slurs  at  men  for  any  foolish  habit  in  which 
they  indulge,  until  they  abandon  this  reprehensible 
practice.  Neither  a  woman's  muscles  nor  her  vital 
organs  can  maintain  a  normal  condition  under  the 
pressure  of  steels.  Some  women  say  they  cannot 
live  without  them,  and  if  that  is  the  case,  it  is  a  sign 
that  they  have  been  injured  by  them.  The  muscles 
become  weakned  to  such  an  extent  that  some  sup- 
port is  necessary.  Women  should  have  the  same 
freedom  in  wearing  apparel  as  men.  The  close  fitting 
waist  is  neither  beautiful  nor  comfortable.  A  cos- 
tume that  is  graceful  and  convenient,  and  does  not 
demand  the  use  of  steel,  is  the  only  rational  cos- 
tume to  adopt.  It  is  of  the  utmost  importance  that  a 
woman's  muscles  should  have  full  play  and  should 
grow  strong  with  abundant  freedom  and  healthful 


DRESS  77 

exercise.  \YAe  also  believe  that  scant,  tight-fitting 
clothing  or  partial  dishabille  are  not  conducive  to  the 
highest  morality  nor  the  purest,  most  beautiful  sen- 
timentality. Angels  are  not  represented  attired  thus, 
and  the  pictures  which  are  associated  with  the  pure 
and  holy  life  of  Christ  show  the  beautiful,  artistic, 
flowing  robes  of  the  Jewish  and  Roman  countries. 

We  recollect  hearing  a  talented  elocutionist  recite 
a  story  from  the  life  of  Christ.  The  selection  was 
well  rendered,  and  she  was  an  attractive  looking 
young  lady,  but  her  costume  appeared  entirely  out  of 
place;  it  might  have  been  suitable  for  a  dance  hall. 
The  neck  was  low,  sleeves  about  three  inches  in 
length,  waist  close  fitting,  skirt  close  fitting,  about 
two  yards  in  width,  and  scarcely  reaching  the  shoe- 
tops.  There  seemed  to  be  something  so  utterly  in- 
congruous about  the  situation,  that  the  effect  pro- 
duced was  very  bad.  The  Sun  conjunction  governs 
the  limbs  above  the  ankles  as  coming  opposite  the 
heart.  This  conjunction  runs  very  strong  at  the  pres- 
ent time,  and  the  tendency  seems  to  be  to  show  up 
that  part  of  the  anatomy  at  any  cost.  Even  men  turn 
their  trousers  at  the  bottom  and  pull  them  up  when 
they  sit  down,  to  exhibit  their  fancy  hosiery.  The  feet 
should  be  allowed  all  possible  freedom  as  they  stand 
opposite  to  the  stomach,  and  are  consequently  in- 
timately connected  with  this  organ.  Sandal  effects 
would  be  very  desirable,  particularly  in  warm  cli- 
mates. Much  might  be  said  regarding  the  present  de- 
testable skirt  worn  by  women,  but  we  must  remem- 
ber that  many  women  wear  it  under  protest.  Many 
find  it  almost  a  necessity  to  go  to  the  ready  made 
clothing  store  and  buy  what  they  require.  When 
they  do,  they  must  either  wear  a  regulation  narrow 
skirt,  or  hunt  all  over  town  for  goods  to  match,  and 
take  it  to  a  dressmaker,  paying  almost  a  double  price 


78  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

for  their  purchase.  Most  women  wear  them  as  they 
buy  them,  but  many  wear  them  under  protest,  and 
many  would  not  wear  them  if  they  could  see  them- 
selves as  others  see  them.  Coming  down  to  facts, 
the  manufacturers  design  all  the  styles,  and  are  ex- 
ploiting the  health,  decency  and  comfort  of  all  wo- 
mankind, for  the  sake  of  the  immense  profits  which 
are  made  by  them. 

Remember,  only  about  one-half  the  material  is  re- 
quired that  was  used  a  few  years  ago  when  pleated 
skirts  were  worn,  and  you  have  to  pay  the  same  price 
for  a  suit.  Three  yards  of  material  at  $2.00  per  yard 
gives  them  a  premium  of  $6.00  on  a  suit.  Why  not 
make  the  skirts  narrow  and  short,  the  sleeves  short, 
and  the  neck  low?  It  all  helps  to  swell  the  coffers  of 
the  manufacturers  and  to  create  millionaires,  a  com- 
modity which  is  becoming  every  day  more  plentiful 
in  this  money  cursed  earth.  Don't  forget  when  you 
are  crushing  your  body  into  a  suit  that  is  too  narrow, 
or  too  short,  that  you  are  doing  this  to  help  some  poor 
millionaire  along ;  doubtless  he  will  be  very  grateful 
to  you.  We  hear  some  nice  people  speak  of  Adam 
and  Eve  as  being  naked  before  the  fall,  even  hinting 
that  clothing  and  wickedness  are  counterparts.  We 
have  very  little  knowledge  of  the  condition  of  Adam 
and  Eve  before  the  fall,  but  we  know  that  God  made 
coats  of  skin  for  them  after  the  fall,  and  that  should 
settle  the  matter  of  clothing  with  us.  The  best  living 
persons  are  those  who  dress  modestly.  Lack  of  mod- 
esty in  wearing  apparel  has  always  been  associated 
with  the  doings  of  the  underworld.  The  first  step 
towards  reforming  these  unfortunates  should  be  to  in- 
sist upon  modest,  inconspicuous  wearing  apparel. 
This  is  another  instance  of  reaching  the  cause  from 
the  effect.  Much  has  been  said  regarding  a  uniform 
for  schools  and  colleges,  and  we  believe  that  such  a 


DRESS  79 

course  would  be  very  beneficial  to  girl  students  and 
boys  as  well.  Girls  give  far  too  much  attention  to 
their  clothes,  and  boys  give  far  too  much  attention  to 
girls.  If  girls  were  all  dressed  alike,  they  would  not 
attract  so  much  attention,  and  they  would  not  spend 
so  much  valuable  time  planning  up  some  new  thing 
in  dress.  Education,  dress,  and  flirtation  all  come 
under  the  same  sign,  and  if  you  want  education  to 
flourish,  cut  out  the  other  two  as  far  as  possible.  Any 
one  of  these  detracts  strongly  from  the  others.  Re- 
ligion also  comes  under  the  same  sign,  and  we  be- 
lieve dress  detracts  from  religion.  Ask  any  minister 
of  the  gospel  who  is  the  greatest  saint  in  his  Church, 
and  he  will  almost  invariably  point  to  some  plain  un- 
pretentious person  who  just  puts  on  enough  style  to 
pass  in  a  crowd.  Those  who  dress  elaborately  are 
more  liable  to  attend  church  for  the  purpose  of  show- 
ing themselves,  than  to  attend  it  in  a  true  devotional 
spirit.  It  would  not  be  half  so  objectionable  to  dress 
elaborately  at  a  theatre  or  a  party.  These  occasions 
are  in  a  manner,  dress  occasions,  and  dress  does  not 
detract  from  anything  important  connected  with  them, 
in  church  and  school  however  dress  should  be  neat 
and  becoming,  but  not  elaborate,  a  uniform  costume 
preferable. 

If  women  are  to  keep  pace  with  men  in  intellectual 
development  they  must  dress  more  sensibly.  The  av- 
erage man  spends  not  more  than  an  hour  a  month  on 
his  clothing;  he  just  drops  into  a  clothing  house  or 
visits  a  tailor  occasionally  and  there  it  ends.  Compare 
this  with  the  brain  energy  and  time  spent  by  women 
on  their  many  elaborate  costumes.  We  would  not  for 
one  moment  advocate  the  adoption  of  masculine  dress 
by  women ;  we  see  no  reason  why  they  might  not 
have  a  few  frills  and  furbelows ;  it  is  extravagance 
and  craze  for  change  to  which  we  object. 


80 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


Men  get  new  ideas,  and  women  get  new  clothes.  If 
women  are  to  assist  in  the  reformation  of  the  world, 
they  must  cut  out  a  few  of  their  extravagances  in 
dress  and  social  functions;  as  we  have  said  before 
time  and  brain  energy  are  frittered  away  on  these 
things. 

No.  14  was  a  successful  saleslady,  who  went  into 
a  ladies  suit  department,  and  drew  heavy  sales  with 
little  or  no  previous  experience.  You  will  notice  that 
the  1st.  Sign,  governing  dress  is  good,  and  that  Jupiter 
and  the  Sun  stand  on  each  side  of  her  money  sign. 
To  be  a  good  salesman,  you  should  draw  money 
strongly.  What  you  draw  for  yourself  you  draw  for 
your  employer.  Certainly  the  lady  with  this  horo- 
scope would  not  work  cheaply;  the  more  she  drew 
the  more  she  would  want  for  herself.  Through  a  bad 


A   SUCCESSFUL   SALESLADY 


DRESS  81 

position  of  Venus,  in  the  traveling  sign  her  husband 
died  while  traveling  and  she  went  to  meet  the  body. 
He  left  a  large  sum  through  insurance  and  she  gave 
up  her  position  and  went  on  a  trip.  Probably  she 
would  spend  a  lot  of  money  before  she  settled  down. 
All  her  bad  planets  are  in  the  3rd.  and  4th.  It  is  one 
thing  to  get  money  and  another  to  keep  it. 

For  Boots  and  Shoes,  you  should  have  a  good  12th. 
Hosiery  good  llth.  and  12th.,  Underwear  10th.,  Gloves 
9th.,  Jewelry  8th.,  Hats  and  suits  7th.  In  selecting 
Xmas  presents  for  friends  you  usually  buy  something 
that  falls  under  the  sign  in  which  the  Moon  stands  in 
the  person's  horoscope.  If  it  is  in  the  1st.  Sign  you 
would  buy  a  book  or  something  for  the  head  and  so  on. 


82  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

CHAPTER  IX. 
t-  Love  and  Marriage. 

This  question  announced,  every  one  will  want  to 
know  what  hope  there  is  for  the  solution  of  the  mar- 
riage and  divorce  question.  We  wish  we  could  give 
them  a  formula  for  happy  mating,  and  turn  the  world's 
greatest  battle  ground  into  a  veritable  fairy-land, 
Avhere  love  and  happiness  reigned,  and  the  wail  of  the 
martyr  was  never  heard ! 

We  fear  however  that  we  cannot  do  this.  Marriage 
troubles  will  be  like  seed  time  and  harvest,  they  will 
endure  until  time  shall  be  no  more,  for  anything  we 
can  see.  Those  who  have  bad  planets  in  1st.  and  7th. 
Signs  must  expect  trouble  connected  with  these  Signs 
in  some  form.  We  will  tell  you  however  what  you 
can  do  when  you  find  that  marriage  is  not  prospering 
in  your  hands.  Uranus,  Saturn  and  Mars,  the  planets 
which  we  consider  detrimental  in  the  marriage  rela- 
tion, are  quite  otherwise  in  the  pursuance  of  intel- 
lectual attainments.  Uranus  gives  originality,  Saturn 
imparts  depth,  and  Mars  argumentative  power,  all  of 
which  become  essential  when  applied  to  intellectual 
pursuits.  This  view  of  the  question  explains  the  fact 
that  so  many  literary  men  and  women  of  note,  have 
had  difficulties  in  the  marriage  relation.  Don't  be 
discouraged;  there  is  a  place  for  every  one  in  the 
world,  where  he  can  be  successful  if  he  looks  for  it. 
Some  one  will  say,  you  are  discouraging  marriage, 
and  the  race  will  die  out;  No  danger!  Better  reduce 
the  numbers  until  we  have  a  better  place  for  little 
folks  to  live  in.  We  recollect  a  small  boy  who  said 
to  his  mother.  "The  only  thing  I  have  against  you 
Mama  is  because  you  borned  me."  If  all  the  children 
feel  that  way  better  leave  them  where  they  are.  This 


LOVE;  AND    MARRIAGE  83 

is  no  joke ;  few  persons  get  through  the  world  without 
wishing  many  times  that  they  had  never  been  born. 

Someone  will  want  to  know  which  is  the  best  way 
to  marry ;  they  will  wrant  to  know  whether  cupid  or 
eugenics  will  make  the  best  match.  In  our  opinion, 
eugenics  never  made  and  never  will  make  a  match. 
We  think  there  is  always  more  or  less  love  in  every 
marriage ;  and  some  of  the  most  disastrous  marriages 
seem  to  have  a  good  share  of  love  in  them.  We  rec- 
ollect a  case  where  a  man  and  woman  were  divorced; 
the  man  had  treated  his  wife  very  cruelly,  striking 
her  on  the  head,  and  endangering  her  life  by  frequent 
acts  of  violence;  he  also  used  very  abusive  language. 
This  would  not  seem  so  strange  in  a  man  who  became 
intoxicated,  but  he  did  not  drink.  Following  the  sep- 
aration, he  wrote  a  long  letter  to  her  almost  every 
evening,  pleading  with  her  to  come  back  to  him.  but 
she  replied  that  she  never  could  place  confidence  in 
him  again.  One  clay,  as  we  met  him  on  the  street, 
he  spoke  of  his  former  wife  and  asked  if  we  thought 
she  would  ever  come  back  to  him ;  we  replied,  that  it 
appeared  to  be  absolutely  certain  they  never  could  live 
together,  and  he  should  go  and  forget  it.  He  answered, 
"I  never  can  forget  her,"  and  his  eyes  filled  with 
tears,  as  he  turned  away.  We  have  not  secured  his 
horoscope,  but  probably  Venus  and  Mars  were  placed 
in  the  1st.  Sign.  Love  one  minute,  and  war  the  next. 
These  persons  would  have  the  same  luck  in  marrying 
another  party,  unless  the  planets  in  the  marriage  sign 
had  changed,  or  the  trouble  took  some  other  form. 
Some  have  been  very  happily  married  with  Mars  in 
the  1st.  Sign  but  it  has  ended  in  sudden  death. 

We  should  never  advise  any  one  with  regard  to 
marrying;  they  will  get  what  their  Sign  draws,  but 
if  they  find  things  going  badly  we  would  advise  them 


84  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

to  give  it  up.  Never  mind  what  the  world  thinks  of 
it.  The  world  hasn't  got  the  place  to  fill  and  you  have. 
So  many  struggle  on,  hoping  to  right  the  wrong,  or  to 
cover  up  what  may  appear  as  a  disgrace,  until  they 
have  more  than  wasted  many  years  of  a  valuable  life. 
It  may  be  that  teachers  and  clergymen  are  in  a  meas- 
ure exempt  from  these  troubles.  Religion  and  educa- 
tion coming  under  the  7th.  Sign  may  draw  from  mar- 
riage troubles.  One  would  think  that  ministers  were 
exempt  considering  the  harsh  judgment  they  give  on 
the  divorce  question,  and  the  peculiar  views  expressed 
by  them.  One  of  our  leading  ministers  gave  a  series 
of  sermons  on  divorce  recently,  and  he  stated  that  in 
his  opinion  married  persons  were  divorced  when  they 
ceased  to  love  each  other ;  and  if  they  continued  to  live 
together  they  were  committing  sin;  he  also  stated 
that  he  would  not  allow  them  to  remarry.  Such  a  law 
as  that  would  produce  more  disbanded  homes  than 
anything  else;  and  stray  children.  There  should  be 
no  more  disgrace  attached  to  a  divorce  than  is  attach- 
ed to  any  broken  up  partnership.  So  far  as  re-mar- 
age  goes,  a  divorced  person  is  either  married  or  he  is 
not  married ;  there  can  be  no  half  way  ground ;  if  he 
is  married  he  should  be  able  to  produce  his  partner; 
if  he  is  not  married  then  he  should  be  free  to  marry. 
Concerning  the  marriage  vow :  when  it  is  broken  by 
one  party  it  becomes  null  and  void,  the  same  as  any 
other  contract.  We  do  not  approve  of  the  wording  of 
the  marriage  ceremony.  Someone  objects  to  the  word 
obey  in  the  ceremony,  but  a  lady  truthfully  remarks 
that  she  might  be  able  to  obey  a  man  when  she  could 
not  love  and  honor  him ;  love  and  honor  cannot  be 
manufactured  to  order.  You  may  treat  a  person  with 
kindness  and  a  certain  degree  of  respect,  but  love 
and  honor  that  come  from  the  heart  must  be  won  and 


LOVB  AND    MARRIAGE  85 

held  by  merit  in  the  other  party  to  the  contract.  The 
marriage  ceremony  may  be  beautiful  and  sentimental, 
but  it  is  not  sane.  Many  a  man  goes  to  the  altar  and 
repeats  the  words,  "With  all  my  worldly  goods  I 
thee  endow,"  and  then  his  wife  has  to  beg  every 
nickel  she  gets  for  carfare.  Some  such  sentiment  as 
the  following  would  in  our  estimation  be  more  rat- 
ional ;  many  appropriate  forms  might  be  written : 

I.  Believing  that,  although  we  are  not  wholly  re- 
sponsible for  thoughts  and  feelings,  we  are  respons- 
ible for  words  and  actions,  we  pledge  each  other  that 
we   will   refrain   from   abuse  as  being  barbarous   and 
wholly  unnecessary. 

Realizing  that  cause  and  effect  act  and  react  upon 
each  other  we  believe  that  guarding  words  and  acts 
will  go  a  long  way  toward  controlling  thought  and 
feeling. 

II.  We  each  pledge  ourselves  to  pass  no  remarks 
in  the  absence  of  the  other  that  might  not  be  made 
with  perfect  courtesy  in  his  or  her  presence. 

III.  We  realize  that  it  is  the  small  leak  in  the  dyke 
that  must  be  guarded  if  we  are  to  avert  the  calamity 
of  a  great  flood.     We  therefore  pledge  ourselves  to 
act    in    a    straightforward,    truthful    manner    toward 
each  other,  concealing  nothing  that  might  in  the  fu- 
ture lead  to  disagreement,  and  plucking  the  weeds  as 
fast  as  they  appear  in  the  garden  of  love. 

IV.  If,  for  reasons  known  or  unknown,  one  par- 
ty to  the  contract  fails,  and  continues  to  fail  to  re- 
spond to  the  affection  of  the  other,  after  all  reason- 
able measures  have  been  resorted  to,  then  each  shall 
go  their  own  way,  realizing  that  the  great  talisman 
without  which  no  true  union  can  exist  has  fled. 


86  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

A  flickering  light,  or  a  brilliant  flame : 
It  came  unbidden,  and  it  leaves  the  same. 
From  whence  it  came,  and  whither  it  goes. 
Everyone  wonders,  but  no  one  knows. 

We  are  not  presenting  the  wording  of  these  clauses 
as  a  work  of  art,  but  we  believe  that  this  is  about  as 
far  as  a  marriage  contract  can  be  made  binding.  We 
would  have  a  special  contract  made  for  each  couple, 
covering  business  and  other  complications  that  might 
exist. 

As  the  marriage  ceremony  now  stands,  there  are  no 
specific  duties  mentioned,  and  the  vows  are  of  such 
a  character  that  they  might  as  well  not  exist.  If  the 
clause,  "With  all  my  worldly  goods  I  thee  endow", 
was  changed  to  something  more  rational,  a  man 
might  be  made  to  regard  it  as  a  serious  vow. 

Most  couples  who  have  been  divorced  have  lived 
together  much  longer  than  they  should  have  done. 
As  soon  as  the  crime  of  abuse  seems  inevitable,  the 
separation  should  take  place.  If  one  party  has  a  fixed 
determination  to  secure  divorce,  it  is  quite  evident 
that  something  is  seriously  wrong ;  if  both  parties  are 
so  inclined  the  fact  is  doubly  evident.  In  our  esti- 
mation it  is  quite  unnecessary  for  the  court  to  inquire 
into  all  the  details  of  the  trouble ;  the  result  is  the 
same  in  the  end,  and  holding  a  couple  together  is  only 
placing  a  premium  on  sin,  and  compelling  a  condition 
of  things  that  is  daily  leading  to  greater  wrong  doing. 
If  couples  were  divorced  as  we  suggest,  we  do  not  be- 
lieve there  would  be  a  single  divorcee  added  to  the 
list.  Once  the  parties  have  reached  the  point  of  ap- 
plying for  a  decree,  it  comes  to  that  in  the  end,  and 
often  there  are  more  children  to  be  provided  for,  and 
lives  ruined  in  a  hopeless  entanglement.  Misunder- 
standings may  occur,  but  there  is  ample  opportunity 


LOVE   AND    MARRIAGE  87 

for  these  to  get  straightened  out  when  the  parties  are 
living  under  the  same  roof;  there  must  be  something 
more  serious  than  that.  The  law  as  it  stands  places 
a  premium  on  crime.  A  couple  applies  for  divorce : 
'What  have  they  done?"  inquires  the  Judge.  Have 
they  attempted  murder,  or  broken  the  7th  Command- 
ment? No.  Have  they  hurled  rolling  pins  and  flat 
irons  at  each  other?  No.  Have  they  flung  abusive 
epithets  at  one  another?  No.  Well,  they  had  better 
go  back  and  try  it  over  again ;  when  they  have  learned 
to  do  one  or  all  of  these  things  they  will  be  granted 
divorce.  The  Judge  does  not  say  this,  but  these  are 
the  facts  of  the  case.  We  would  put  some  such  ques- 
tion as  this  to  the  applicants.  Have  you  exhausted  ev- 
ery known  resource  in  your  endeavor  to  live  in  peace 
and  harmony  and  to  provide  such  a  home  for  your 
children  as  children  should  have?  If  the  answer  is 
in  the  affirmative,  the  divorce  should  be  granted. 
There  should  be  no  such  thing  as  waiting  until  the 
devil  has  taken  complete  possession  of  the  home  be- 
fore relief  is  afforded. 

Much  has  been  said  in  the  churches  regarding  the 
attitude  of  Christ  toward  divorce.  Matthew  xix.  :9  is 
quoted,  and  the  corresponding  passage  in  Mark  x. : 
11,  12  is  also  quoted.  These  passages  do  not  agree; 
in  one  Christ  is  represented  as  allowing  those  who  are 
divorced  for  certain  reasons  to  remarry,  and  in  the 
other  none  would  be  allowed  to  remarry.  We  must 
remember  that  these  are  not  the  words  of  Christ ;  two 
men  who  heard  him  gave  their  version  of  what  they 
understood  him  to  say  on  the  subject ;  either  there 
is  a  mistake  in  recording  the  conversation,  or  in  trans- 
lating from  the  original ;  they  cannot  both  be  the 
exact  words  of  Christ.  The  mistake  has  crept  in  and 
it  doubtless  has  its  purpose  and  its  fulfillment.  As 
religion  and  marriage  come  under  the  same  sign,  a 


88  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

bad  marriage  sign  would  also  be  bad  for  religion,  and 
a  break  with  the  church  would  be  a  natural  astrologi- 
cal consequence.  In  the  person  of  John  Wesley  we 
have  one  who  had  both  marriage  and  church  troubles, 
and  they  were  very  severe  at  the  time,  and  yet  years 
after  his  death  he  was  regarded  as  the  greatest  saint 
of  his  time.  We  presume  that  his  memory  is  ruled 
by  astrological  conditions  and  that  the  bad  influences 
in  his  first  sign  have  passed  off.  Joan  of  Arc  was 
burned  as  a  witch  and  canonized  as  a  saint  many 
years  after  her  death.  We  should  do  what  is  right  ac- 
cording to  our  own  judgment  and  God  will  take  care 
of  the  result. 

Someone  may  wish  to  know  how  you  fall  in  love, 
and  what  part  the  planets  take  in  these  mysterious 
occurrences.  There  is  a  time  for  falling  in  love.  We 
once  heard  a  lady  say  that  she  fell  in  love  with  her 
husband  three  years  after  they  were  married ;  we 
presume  the  Moon  struck  her  marriage  sign  at  that 
time.  Another  tells  us  that  she  fell  in  love  just  be- 
fore the  wedding,  on  being  presented  with  a  boquet 
of  flowers.  Venus,  the  beautifier  of  the  earth  and 
goddess  of  love,  was  evidently  present.  A  man 
should  fall  in  love  before  he  asks  a  woman  to  marry 
him.  In  traveling  you  will  notice  that  couples  be- 
come very  spoony  when  the  Moon  is  in  conjunction 
with  Venus,  and  there  are  many  conditions  in  the 
horoscope  which  tend  toward  falling  in  love.  A 
combination  of  these  may  result  in  giving  us  a  strong 
dose,  and  if  the  influences  are  good  it  may  result  in 
a  whirlwind  courtship  and  marriage ;  but  if  they  are 
not  good,  it  may  result  in  a  serious  disappointment. 
Men  and  women  have  often  considered  themselves 
exempt  from  these  things,  but  when  the  time  came, 
and  all  the  conditions  that  made  for  falling  in  love  got 


LOVE  AND  MARRIAGE  89 

piled  up  in  a  heap,  they  discovered  their  mistake. 
Those  who  have  been  exempt  for  a  long  time  are  the 
ones  who  are  most  likely  to  get  a  strong  dose  when 
it  comes.  Venus  changes  once  in  20  years,  and  a 
change  of  Venus,  particularly  entering  or  leaving  the 
1st  or  llth  Signs,  renders  the  subject  more  susceptible 
to  such  influences.  Sometimes  Mercury  or  the  Moon 
or  both  change  in  conjunction  with  Venus,  and  this 
adds  strongly  to  the  influence  of  Venus.  Those  run- 
ning a  strong  1st  or  llth  Sign  are  subject  to  deep  im- 
pressions, and  if  both  signs  are  strong,  they  have  a 
nature  that  is  highly  emotional.  The  Transits  also 
have  their  influence,  the  Moon  and  Earth  in  the  1st 
and  llth  Signs,  particularly  if  Venus  or  many  other 
planets  form  a  conjunction  with  them,  greatly  in- 
creases the  susceptibility  of  the  subject.  Many  plan- 
ets changing  between  Signs  causes  the  horoscope  to 
work  very  powerfully,  for  everything  that  is  indicated 
in  it  good  or  bad.  It  is  quite  possible  as  we  have  said 
before  for  all  these  conditions  to  occur  at  one  and  the 
same  time.  "The  time,  the  place,  and  the  girl"  is  no 
joke.  The  person  for  whom  you  form  an  attachment 
is  described  by  the  planets  in  your  horoscope;  if 
only  good  planets  appear  in  the  5th  and  llth  Signs 
and  Venus  is  found  in  conjunction  with  good  planets, 
then  the  attachment  formed  should  be  a  very  fortun- 
ate one.  More  frequently,  however,  we  find  good  and 
bad  planets  intermingled,  particularly  if  the  influences 
are  very  strong.  Mars  indicates  quarreling,  Saturn 
places  hindrances  in  the  way,  and  produces  alliances 
with  elderly  persons,  Uranus  love  affairs  with  mar- 
ried persons ;  these  are  merely  examples  of  such  influ- 
ence. In  view  of  the  fact  that  love  is  a  matter  of 
time  more  than  anything  else  and  that  at  some  stages 
of  our  experience  we  are  liable  to  be  helplessly 


—7 


90  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

plunged  into  a  love  affair  without  our  consent  of  fore- 
knowledge, we  should  be  careful  of  our  environment; 
for  example,  such  familiarity  as  is  allowed  in  dancing 
is  very  unwise  and  entirely  uncalled  for,  although 
dancing  should  be  a  very  pleasant  and  healthful  rec- 
reation if  a  little  more  common  sense  were  applied  to 
it. 

These  things  are  no  joke ;  half  the  murders  and  sui- 
cides, not  saying  anything  about  cases  of  insanity, 
are  due  to  just  such  conditions.  We  don't  refer  to 
light  fancies,  and  mere  physical  sentiment;  we  refer 
to  the  overpowering,  deep  seated,  ever  present,  soul 
penetrating  affection,  that  cannot  be  thrown  off  at 
will,  but  rather  igrows  with  years ;  that  affection  which 
haunts  the  subject  night  and  day,  and  makes  him  to 
feel  that  he  cannot  live  apart  from  the  object  of  his 
love.  A  lady  once  wrote  to  a  newspaper  for  advice 
as  to  what  she  should  do  in  the  matter  of  having  fal- 
len in  love  with  a  married  man,  and  those  who  at- 
tempted to  advise  her  seemed  to  be  quite  as  helpless 
as  the  questioner.  The  girl  stated  that  she  had  done 
all  in  her  power  to  break  up  the  attachment,  and  al- 
though she  did  not  see  him  for  a  year,  her  condition 
remained  unchanged;  such  experiences  are  far  too 
common.  Venus  left  to  herself  would  make  nought 
but  happy  matches,  but  Venus  often  runs  a  conjunc- 
tion with  other  planets.  What  is  falling  in  love  any- 
way? Some  would  say  it  is  forming  a  soul  union,  oth- 
ers would  say  it  is  a  species  of  hypnotism,  and  yet  it 
does  not  answer  to  the  definition  of  either.  A  union 
implies  two  parties  acquiescing,  and  in  this  case  the 
experience  may  be  entirely  on  one  side.  How  often 
it  happens  that  one  person  falls  desperately  in  love 
with  another,  who  experiences  no  sensation  and  is 
conscious  of  no  change  in  his  attitude  toward  the 
person  who  loves  him.  Two  persons  seldom  fall  in 


LOVE  AND  MARRIAGE  91 

love  at  the  same  time ;  one  usually  precedes  the  other. 
It  would  be  difficult  to  find  persons  whose  horo- 
scopes correspond  so  exactly,  and  if  you  could 
they  would  not  attract  each  other;  opposites  attract. 
That  is  an  essential  law  of  nature,  the  object  being 
to  effect  a  proper  balance  in  the  coming  generation; 
the  weak  points  in  one  .should  be  the  strong  points 
in  the  other. 

We  have  found  that  falling  in  love  is  not  a  soul 
union,  at  least  until  two  parties  acquiesce  in  it,  neith- 
er is  it  hypnotism,  a  hypnotist  can  usually  undo  his 
work ;  it  resembles  photography  more  nearly  than 
anything  else  of  which  we  can  think.  When 
the  time  conies  Venus  adjusts  the  machinery,  and 
takes  a  flash-light  picture,  and  someone  goes  away 
with  the  image  of  another  person  on  his  soul.  The 
person  who  was  photographed  may  not  be  conscious 
of  any  sensation,  any  more  than  you  are  when  the 
photographer  turns  his  camera  upon  you.  The 
strength  of  the  impression  depends  upon  the  strength 
of  the  conditions  existing  in  the  horoscope,  but  the 
person  photographed  becomes  as  it  were  a  part  of 
yourself  without  whom  you  are  undone ;  seeming  to 
be  ever  present  with  you,  haunting  you  night  and  day. 
Years  may  pass,  the  winds  of  adversity  and  the  scald- 
ing tears  of  sorrow,  may  wash  up  against  the  picture, 
and  yet  it  is  there;  firing  the  brain  until  it  becomes 
like  a  great  steam-engine  swelling  to  the  bursting 
point  with  emotion.  However,  if  we  knew  what  to 
do  with  all  this  pent-up  emotion  it  would  not  be  so 
bad,  but  most  men  or  women  when  they  find  that  the 
person  with  whom  they  have  fallen  in  love  is  not  re- 
sponsive, become  discouraged  and  morose,  perhaps 
place  a  loaded  revolver  to  their  heads  or  jump  off  a 
bridge;  the  former  being  suggested  by  Mars,  and  the 
latter  by  Uranus  and  Neptune.  Mars  governs  fire- 


92  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

arms,  Uranus  falling,  and  Neptune  the  water.  If 
these  persons  only  knew  that  this  pent-up  emotion 
was  the  very  thing  that  they  make  poets,  novelists, 
artists,  musicians,  etc.  out  of,  they  might  be  able  to 
accomplish  something  in  the  world.  How  often  sui- 
cides write  beautiful  letters  and  compose  beautiful 
poetry  before  the  last  great  act  in  the  drama  of  life. . 
Often  the  greatest  relief  you  can  find,  when  things  are 
going  wrong,  and  your  mind  is  in  a  turmoil,  anu  your 
burden  seems  greater  than  you  can  bear  is  to  sit 
down  and  write,  write  until  you  feel  a  sense  of  relief, 
even  if  it  takes  you  two  days ;  better  that  than  com- 
mit suicide,  even  if  the  writing  counts  for  nothing. 
The  world's  most  beautiful  poetry  and  prose  were 
written  while  the  author  was  in  just  such  a  frame  of 
mind ;  if  you  realized  that  this  turbulent  and  highly 
emotional  state  of  mind  was  just  the  thing  that  would 
give  you  power  to  stir  the  world  by  song  or  verse, 
or  in  a  thousand  other  ways,  you  might  be  more  easily 
reconciled  to  your  lot.  We  have  made  a  close  study 
of  this  phase  of  the  question  and  believe  that  we  can 
guarantee  the  truth  of  the  assertion  that  unrequited 
love  has  been  one  of  the  leading  agencies  in  stirring 
men's  souls  to  deeds  of  greatness  in  the  world.  Paint- 
ing, music,  science,  or  any  other  form  of  study  re- 
lieves pressure  on  the  brain. 

When  we  appeal  to  the  Bible  for  light  upon  the 
question  of  marriage  it  is  not  forthcoming.  In  old 
testament  times  men  married  as  many  wives  as  they 
cared  to  take.  Jacob  married  two  and  lived  with  them. 
The  children  of  Israel  could  boast  of  four  mothers  all 
living;  Solomon,  another  man  approved  by  God,  had 
many  wives.  Wlien  the  ten  commandments  were 
given  to  Moses,  man  was  forbidden  to  covet  his  neigh- 
bor's wife,  and  the  seventh  commandment  forbade 


LOVE  AND  MARRIAGE  93 

the  committing  of  adultery.  Just  what  constituted 
the  committing  of  adultery,  it  is  pretty  difficult  to  de- 
termine, but  throughout  the  old  testament  it  seems 
to  be  confined  to  a  man  having  illicit  relations  with 
his  neighbor's  wife.  The  new  testament  explana- 
tion covers  evil  thoughts  as  well  as  actions.  Mat- 
thew Henry  tells  us  that  men  were  allowed  to  di- 
vorce their  wives  in  these  times,  so  that  they  would 
not  kill  them  when  they  hated  them.  Human  nature 
is  the  same  from  the  beginning  to  the  end.  In  new 
testament  times  the  one  wife  idea  prevailed  to  a  great- 
er extent,  and  in  our  days,  economic  conditions  neces- 
sitate the  enforcement  of  strict  rules  regarding  mar- 
riage ;  and  yet  in  some  countries  a  man  may  have  as 
many  wives  as  he  wishes.  It  is  said  of  a  certain  king 
that  he  is  obliged  to  marry  every  girl  who  asks  him, 
and  the  story  goes  that  he  got  a  suffragist  in ;  you  can 
imagine  the  result.  God  is  the  same  God  that  he  was 
in  Jacob's  time,  and  that  which  is  wrong  now,  was 
wrong  then.  Strict  marriage  laws  are  not  so  much  a 
question  of  right  and  wrong,  as  they  are  a  question 
of  economic  necessity.  There  are  many  men  who 
cannot,  or  do  not  even  support  one  wife  in  the  pres- 
ent straightened  condition  of  affairs.  A  higher  civil- 
ization also  leads  to  more  acute  feeling,  and  few  men 
or  women  would  tolerate  living  under  the  same  roof 
with  a  rival,  or  living  under  another  roof  if  they  could 
avoid  such  a  condition.  There  are  moral  require- 
ments, and  legal  requirements,  and  it  takes  them  all 
to  keep  the  world  straight,  and  then  some.  Stringent 
marriage  laws  are  a  necessity,  and  divorce  laws  also 
seem  to  be  a  necessity.  Divorce  is  like  war,  we  wish 
it  could  be  brought  to  an  end,  but  we  do  not  believe 
it  could  be  done.  Whatever  the  new  testament 
teaches  regarding  divorce,  it  certainly  advocates  the 
relief  of  suffering  in  every  possible  way.  Christ,  our 


94  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

great  exemplar,  never  witnessed  suffering  without  re- 
lieving it.  We  must  regard  the  spirit  of  the  Bible  as 
greater  than  the  letter,  and  strive  in  all  things  to  cul- 
tivate that  spirit. 

After  writing  the  preceding  lines,  we  accidentally 
struck  a  book  on  "Marriage  and  Divorce,"  and  read  it 
through,  or  practically  so,  before  leaving  it.  The  au- 
thor was  a  clergyman,  officiating  in  a  church  opposed 
to  divorce,  and  he  would  wipe  it  out  entirely.  He  ad- 
mitted that  God  allowed  men  in  old  testament  times 
to  marry  as  many  wives  as  they  wished,  but  he 
claimed  that  we  were  not  allowed  the  same  privilege. 
We  believe  that  God  is  the  same  God,  and  man  is 
much  the  same  man,  that  he  was  in  the  time  of  Jacob ; 
and  that  God  is  not  interfering  in  the  matter.  Mar- 
riage and  divorce  laws  are  human  made,  and  are 
enacted  according  to  what  are  deemed  to  be  the  neces- 
sities of  the  case.  They  differ  very  materially  in  dif- 
ferent states  and  countries.  We  do  not  believe  that 
God  would  allow  one  man  to  marry  700  wives,  and 
prohibit  another  from  marrying  one ;  that  is  what  the 
clergyman  would  have  us  think.  Suppose  a  man  mar- 
ries at  the  age  of  25  and  his  wife  leaves  him  within 
two  years  (we  are  assuming  that  he  is  not  to  blame)  ; 
then  he  must  spend  the  balance  of  his  life  alone,  while 
another  man  who  lives  in  another  age  can  marry  700. 

We  have  previously  explained  how  persons  may 
under  these  circumstances  devote  themselves  to  intel- 
lectual pursuits  and  meet  with  success.  So  they  may 
until  fate  brings  them  into  contact  with  some  other 
person  for  whom  they  form  a  strong  attachment,  and 
then  it  is  all  off  with  them  again.  We  must  remem- 
ber that  no  one  person  is  in  a  position  to  judge  for 
another.  Some  persons  who  run  strong  1st  and  llth 
Signs  are  very  unhappy  alone,  while  others  are  not 
affected  by  these  things.  If  the  study  of  this  book 


LOVE  AND  MARRIAGE  95 

teaches  us  anything,  it  should  teach  us  to  be  very 
guarded  in  criticising  the  actions  of  others.  We  do 
not  know  what  we  would  do  in  their  place.  We  have 
a  sort  of  feeling  that  a  man  who  never  had  any  per- 
sonal experience  with  separation  or  divorce,  has  no 
more  right  to  publish  a  book  upon  it,  than  a  man 
would  have  to  publish  a  book  on  mining  when  he 
never  saw  the  inside  of  a  mine,  or  a  woman  would 
have  to  publish  a  book  upon  the  duties  of  mothers, 
when  she  never  had  children  of  her  own.  Who  can 
tell  you  about  Africa,  the  man  who  traveled  through 
it,  or  the  man  who  never  left  the  United  States? 

If  the  great  consensus  of  opinion  among  divorced 
persons  shows  that  they  prefer  the  trials  which  accrue 
from  separation  and  divorce,  to  a  bad  marriage,  give 
it  to  them.  True  Christ  limited  divorce,  but  as  we 
have  previously  mentioned,  the  various  accounts  of 
what  he  said  do  not  correspond,  besides  it  is  an  evil 
much  the  same  as  war  is  an  evil,  and  yet  we  do  not 
believe  that  the  world  can  exist  without  war.  Wrar 
is  a  cure  for  a  greater  evil,  so  also  is  divorce.  Christ 
said,  ''Thou  shalt  not  kill,"  but  if  someone  is  taking 
your  life  you  are  justified  in  taking  theirs  in  self  de- 
fense. Divorce  in  order  to  protect  the  innocent  and 
suffering  ones  of  the  earth  and  to  prevent  the  com- 
mission of  greater  crimes  becomes  right.  You  par- 
ents know  that  it  would  be  very  wrong  to  punish  your 
children  if  they  were  innocent,  but  when  punish- 
ment becomes  necessary  it  is  right.  Punishment  may 
be  regarded  as  an  evil,  but  abolishing  punishment 
does  not  abolish  crime,  neither  does  abolishing  di- 
vorce, abolish  the  terrible  evils  that  lead  to  it.  Prob- 
ably three-fourths  of  the  divorce  cases  are  due  to  wick- 
edness, on  one  side  or  both.  Drunkenness,  profanity, 
cruelty,  dishonesty,  lying,  slander  and  immorality  are 


.96  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

potent  influences  in  bringing  about  divorce.  There 
may  be  one-fourth  cases  where  mistakes  have  been 
made  for  which  neither  party  can  be  held  responsible 
and  yet  it  is  practically  impossible  for  them  to  live  to- 
gether. Some  of  these  the  parties  had  no  opportunity 
of  discovering  until  after  marriage,  besides,  if  men  and 
women  were  to  wait  until  all  the  conditions  were  fav- 
orable for  marriage,  there  would  be  no  marriages,  'for 
a  perfect  man  or  woman  can  not  be  found.  With 
women  the  question  is  a  very  difficult  one  as  they 
must  select  a  husband  from  the  few  who  chance  to 
offer  themselves.  If  they  had  the  same  opportunity 
of  choosing  that  men  have  they  would  frequently 
make  a  different  choice.  It  is  said  that  women  re- 
ceive twice  as  many  divorces  as  men,  and  their  lim- 
ited opportunity  for  selection,  may  partly  account  for 
the  fact.  We  believe  if  divorced  women  were  asked 
for  their  opinion,  many  would  tell  you  that  they  were 
never  married  in  the  true  sense  of  the  word.  Much 
is  said  regarding,  "the  twain  becoming  one  flesh." 
This  is  simply  a  polite  way  of  referring  to  the  inti- 
macy that  must  exist  between  them.  If  there  is  any 
union  it  must  be  a  spiritual,  or  soul  union  (we  make 
no  distinction  bejtween  mind,  soul,  and  spirit),  with- 
out this  there  is  none.  Frequently  a  woman  marries 
a  man  in  an  indifferent  sort  of  way,  and  if  he  proves 
to  be  the  right  kind  of  man,  he  wins  her  respect  and 
love  follows ;  but  if  he  treats  her  cruelly,  no  union 
ever  existed,  or  ever  will  exist.  It  requires  two  to 
form  a  union. 

"What  God  hath  joined  together,  let  not  man  put 
asunder,''  is  another  passage  frequently  quoted.  Man 
never  put  them  asunder;  they  were  put  asunder  be- 
fore they  applied  for  divorce,  and  probably  man 


LOVE  AND  MARRIAGE  97 

had  nothing  to  do  with  it.  The  chances  are  that  there 
was  some  sham  work  about  the  joining  together.  As 
we  have  said  before,  there  must  be  more  or  less  love 
in  every  marriage,  but  we  are  inclined  to  think  that 
a  strong  mutual  attachment  at  the  time  of  marriage  is 
a  rare  phenomenon. 

In  the  passage  previously  referred  to  Christ  was 
talking  to  his  disciples,  and  was  laying  down  rules  for 
an  ideal  world.  He  says,  "Moses,  because  of  the 
hardness  of  your  hearts,  suffered  you  to  put  away 
your  wives,  but  from  the  beginning  it  was  not  so."  He 
does  not  say  that  Moses  did  wrong  in  permitting 
them  to  separate ;  he  said  it  was  a  condition  of  things 
brought  about  by  the  hardness  of  their  hearts,  and 
God  had  not  intended  it  to  be  so  at  the  beginning. 
Later  he  says :  "All  men  cannot  receive  this  saying, 
save  they  to  whom  it  is  given.  He  that  is  able  to  re- 
ceive it  let  him  receive  it."  In  I.  Cor.,  Ch.  vii.  we 
read :  "To  avoid  fornication  let  every  man  have  his 
own  wife,  and  let  every  woman  have  her  own  hus- 
band." Paul  didn't  say,  to  avoid  fornication,  put  the 
women  on  one  side  of  the  earth,  and  the  men  on  the 
other,  neither  did  he  say  let  every  man  who  is  fortun- 
ate enough  not  to  lose  her,  and  would  not  care  much 
if  he  did,  have  his  own  wife ;  he  said,  let  every  man 
who  wishes  have  his  own  wife,  and  every  woman  her 
own  husband.  And  yet  Paul  was  a  bachelor,  and 
rather  discouraged  marriage.  We  who  prefer  a  single 
life  should  not  interfere  with  the  rights  of  others,  who 
may  be  and  are  very  differently  constituted. 
Divorce  and  re-marriage,  war,  and  punisjiment 
are  all  necessary  in  order  to  cope  with  great- 
er evils.  There  are  those  who  claim  that  pun- 
ishment is  not  necessary,  but  the  writer,  who 
has  spent  many  years  in  educational  work,  and 


98  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

has  had  a  wide  experience  in  the  handling  of 
youth,  would  beg  to  differ  with  them.  Many 
persons  can  be  ruled  by  kindness,  but  not  all. 
We  recollect  a  case  that  came  under  our  own 
observation,  in  connection  with  prison  work.  Sev- 
eral ladies  had  become  interested  in  two  young 
men  who  were  serving  a  term  for  forgery:  on  their 
release  positions  were  found  for  them,  and  a  room 
in  a  respectable  home.  They  professed  to  be  relig- 
ious, and  all  went  well  until  the  lady  with  whom 
they  lived  discovered  papers  showing  that  they  had 
been  practicing  on  the  business  signature  of  a  man 
whose  wife  had  taken  a  leading  part  in  ministering 
to  their  comfort.  She  had  in  fact  done  everything  in 
her  power  to  help  them  out  of  their  difficulty.  And 
this  is  not  a  solitary  case.  Try  kindness  first,  and 
when  that  fails  something  else  mast  be  resorted  to. 
If  we  can  dispense  with  war,  punishment,  divorce, 
and  remarriage,  it  will  be  when  the  millennium  comes, 
if  there  be  such  a  time.  If  we  would  seek  to  abolish 
divorce,  we  must  abolish  the  evils  that  so  frequently 
lead  to  it. 

Planetary  influence  is  such  a  strong  factor  in  deter- 
mining prosperity  in  the  marriage  relation,  that  it 
must  be  reckoned  with.  Some  will  find  a  second  mar- 
riage much  better  than  the  first,  and  some  will  find 
it  worse.  Some  of  the  happiest  marriages  we  have 
known  ended  in  premature  death,  and  yet  who  would 
say  that  a  few  years  of  happy  married  life  should  be 
despised,  even  though  it  did  end  in  grief.  This  old 
world  is  tough  whatever  way  you  take  it,  and  it  is 
merely  a  question  of  the  best  way  of  getting  through 
it. 

We  are  presenting  you  with  an  actor  who  was  mar- 
ried five  times,  and  a  lady  who  was  married  four 


LOVE,  AND    MARRIAGE  99 

times  and  engaged  to  the  fifth.  Both  have  horo- 
scopes which  run  very  strongly  for  marriage,  and 
they  would  be  very  unhappy  living  alone ;  yet  all  their 
bad  planets  govern  marriage,  and  trouble  is  certain  to 
follow.  We  can  still  console  them  that,  while  their 
sorrows  are  there,  they  are  not  having  them  along 
some  other  line.  If  we  had  the  opportunity  of  laying 
down  our  burden  and  taking  up  another,  we  might 
wish  for  our  own  back  again. 

In  our  opinion,  the  only  rational  way  to  handle  the 
divorce  question  is  to  investigate  the  causes  leading 
to  divorce,  and  deal  with  them.  If  the  liquor  habit 
is  a  cause,  deal  with  it ;  if  dancing  is  a  cause,  deal  with 
it;  if  infidelity  is  a  cause,  deal  with  it  also.  A  lady 
writing  of  her  experience  in  the  underworld  states 
that  75  per  cent,  of  the  patrons  were  married  men.  If 
that  were  so  there  was  something  wrong  at  home. 
A  man  who  loved  his  wiire  as  he  should  love  her 
would  not  be  there.  A  statement  like  that  makes  the 
marriage  question  look  very  bad. 

Men  should  regard  matrimony  as  they  legard  any 
business  enterprise.  When  the  contract  is  signed, 
and  all  the  preliminary  business  settled,  they  should 
concentrate  their  thought  and  energy  upon  making 
the  business  a  success;  they  should  do  the  same  with 
matrimony.  Usually  a  man  thinks  the  wedding  clay 
is  the  winding  up  of  his  matrimonial  enterprise.  In 
place  of  that  it  should  be  the  beginning.  He  is  stak- 
ing his  life  happiness  in  it.  His  reputation  and  money 
are  also  at  stake,  as  he  will  find  if  he  makes  a  failure 
of  it. 

A  man  should  consider  no  sacrifice  too  great,  unless 
it  be  a  sacrifice  of  principle,  which  will  win  or  hold 
the  affection  of  his  wife ;  and  a  woman  should  feel  the 
same  toward  her  husband.  Often  you  must  stoop  to 


100  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

conquer  and  sacrifice  frequently  brings  great  rewards. 
Many  men  and  women  are  so  intent  upon  the  pursuit 
of  pleasure,  that  they  must  just  do  everything  they 
feel  like  doing,  without  regard  for  the  consequences. 
Reason  should  control  us  instead  of  feeling,  if  we  are 
to  live  a  true  life.  Our  feeling  depends  on  heredity, 
environment,  and  planetary  influence.  What  we  do 
depends  on  ourselves. 

You  may  recall  many  cases  where  men  and  women, 
under  the  impulse  of  strong  feeling,  have  been  guilty 
of  acts  which  ruined  their  lives  in  a  very  short  space 
of  time.  We  must  rise  superior  to  feeling  and  want- 
ing, if  we  are  to  succeed  in  life.  WTe  cannot  eradicate 
our  feelings,  and  oftentimes  we  cannot  control  them, 
but  we  can  control  our  actions.  Practice  makes  per- 
fect even  in  goodness ;  suffering  may  and  will  come, 
but  let  us  cultivate  goodness.  We  may  develop  char- 
acter and  principle.  This  much  lies  within  ourselves. 

This  chapter  would  not  be  complete  without  a  page 
upon  cranks,  just  common  everyday  cranks.  These 
people  frequently  do  not  have  any  bad  habits ;  they 
make  up  for  all  the  defects  they  don't  have  in  pure, 
unadulterated  crankiness.  This  is  said  to  be  the  sin 
of  the  saint,  or  vice  of  the  virtuous.  Such  a  man 
considers  it  to  be  beneath  his  dignity  to  appear  pleas- 
ed with  anything  his  wife  does.  One  of  this  class 
was  heard  to  say  that  you  should  never  tell 
a  woman  she  had  done  well,  for  it  might  put  a  dam- 
per on  her  ambition ;  "Always  tell  her,"  said  he, 
"that  her  work  might  be  improved."  Another 
stock  remark  of  this  sort  of  man  is,  "The  worse  you 
treat  a  woman  the  better  she  likes  you."  Always  be- 
ware of  a  man,  if  you  hear  him  say  that.  We  have 
heard  it  a  number  of  times,  but  cannot  imagine  where 
it  originated.  A  crank  laughs  when  you  look  sober, 


LOVE  AND  MA,R£'IAGE'          'j'',W 

and  looks  sober  when  you  laugh,  that  is  one  way  of 
detecting  him.  He  is  always  afraid  of  appearing  too 
agreeable.  When  all  ordinary  methods  fail,  he  tells 
his  wife  that  he  will  not  be  home  to  luncheon,  and 
when  she  goes  out,  he  comes  home  and  tells  the 
neighbors  that  his  wife  is  always  out  and  will  not 
cook  for  him.  What  would  you  do  with  him? 

Chart  No  15  shows  a  very  happy  marriage.  In  the 
1st  you  will  notice  all  the  good  planets  in  or  near  the 
1st  Sign,  and  two  bad  planets  in  the  10th;  the  Moon 
is  passing  into  the  llth  Sign.  Many  persons  are  mar- 
ried as  the  Moon  passes  into  the  llth  Sign;  that  be- 
ing the  children  Sign,  a  birth  usually  follows.  Her 
4th  Sign,  being  bad,  causes  her  to  have  many  troubles 
during  childhood.  Her  health  had  not  been  good,  and 
she  had  a  languid,  disheartened  look,  as  if  she  had 


A   VERY    HAPPY    MARRIAGE. 


102  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

been  dragged  up  against  her  will.  Six  months  after 
she  was  married  we  had  the  pleasure  of  meeting  her 
while  traveling,  and  we  scarcely  recognized  her  to 
be  the  same  girl ;  the  contour  of  her  face  was  changed ; 
her  eyes  were  bright  and  sparkling,  her  complexion 
clear  and  her  voice  musical ;  her  step  was  bouyant, 
and  she  exhibited  a  queenly  air.  We  at  once  assumed 
that  the  marriage  had  been  a  happy  one,  and  on  look- 
ing up  her  birthdate  found  that  she  had  all  the  good 
planets  around  the  1st  Sign.  The  Moon  was  entering 
her  llth  Sign  in  conjunction  with  Uranus  and  Mars 
in  the  10th,  so  that  it  might  not  be  fortunate  for  chil- 
dren ;  houses  and  land,  father  and  mother  would  be 
under  bad  omen.  She  has  no  greater  share  of  earthly 
happiness  than  others,  but  her  marriage  Sign  will  al- 
ways be  a  place  of  refuge. 

We  recollect  seeing  the  result  of  a  census  taken  by 
one  of  our  leading  periodicals,  and  it  was  found  that 
the  great  majority  of  girls  who  were  happily  married 
had  lost  one  or  both  parents  and  had  something  of  a 
rough  time  during  childhood.  We  can  easily  account 
for  this  fact ;  the  girls  who  had  bad  planets  in  the  4th 
Sign  could  not  have  them  around  the  marriage  sign  at 
the  same  time;  so  you  see  there  is  compensation  for 
all,  and  "Mama's  darling"  is  more  likely  to  be  unhap- 
pily married  than  the  little  waif  who  "just  grovved" 
like  Topsy. 

We  recollect  a  lady  who  was  a  widow,  and  suffer- 
ing hardship,  remarking  that  she  had  a  very  happy 
childhood,  and  she  could  not  expect  to  be  very  happy 
all  through  life.  We  would  not  have  you  think  for 
one  moment  that  all  the  boys  and  girls  who  have  rich 
parents  have  a  very  happy  childhood,  for  there  are 
many  conditions  which  bring  misery  among  the  rich 
as  well  as  among  the  poor. 


LOVE)   AND    MARRIAGE 


103 


In  Chart  No.  16  we  see  a  vicious  looking  marriage 
sign,  the  Moon  between  Saturn  and  Mars  in  the  Na- 
tivity, and  Uranus,  Saturn,  and  Mars  opposite  in  the 
Transits ;  nothing  good  nearer  than  the  12th  Sign. 
We  might  describe  her  after  a  year's  trial  of  married 
life,  but  it  is  unnecessary.  We  have  all  seen  them 
many  times,  when  a  dejected,  half  bitter  look  settles 
down  upon  them.  When  that  look  settles  upon  you, 
it  is  time  to  be  moving,  even  if  they  do  call  you  a 
tramp. 

The  12th  Sign  provided  a  wedding  feast;  there  was 
also  traveling  connected  with  the  wedding,  and  this 
came  under  good  influences,  one  bad  planet  being 
found  with  seven  good.  It  came  before  the  wedding, 
however.  This  marriage  ended  in  divorce,  when 
Venus  and  Mercury  entered  the  1st  Sign  in  conjunc- 


A    VERY    UNHAPPY    MARRIAGE 


104 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


tion ;  we  often  find  good  planets  entering  the  mar- 
riage sign  bring  about  divorce.  One  would  think 
that  they  should  bring  more  happiness  into  the  home, 
instead  of  breaking  it  up,  but  it  would  seem  that  even 
God  himself  cannot  restore  confidence  and  love  in  a 
home  where  nothing  but  bitterness  prevails.  God 
cannot  convert  a  sinner  against  his  will,  neither  can 
he  convert  a  bad  husband  against  his  will.  When 
good  planets  come  in,  the  party  usually  gets  a  change. 
It  may  be  freedom  from  marriage  ties  or  a  second 
union.  In  No.  16  we  find  a  good  4th  Sign  and  this 
young  lady  had  a  good  home. 

Chart  No.  17  is  that  of  a  young  lady  of  whom  we 
have  no  knowledge,  excepting  that  a  friend  asked  us 
to  look  up  her  birthdate,  remarking  that  she  had  so 
many  admirers  she  could  not  entertain  them  all.  We 


A  VERY  POPULAR  YOUNG  LADY. 


LOVE  AND  MARRIAGE 


105 


first  noticed  that  she  had  five  planets  in  the  mar- 
riage sign,  and  Mars  standing  as  sentinel  in  the  12th 
near  the  1st  Sign;  the  Sun  and  Neptune  are  changing 
on  each  side  of  the  llth  Sign,  and  Uranus  in  the  2nd 
near  the  3rd  would  cause  trouble  in  traveling,  also 
with  letters,  and  telephone  messages.  At  this  parti- 
cular time  the  Earth  and  Moon  ar£  in  the  1st  Sign 
in  the  Transits,  and  the  Moon  in  the  Nativity  is  near- 
ing  the  2nd.  It  has  been  working  affairs  up  in  the 
1st  Sign  for  nearly  two  years.  The  Transits  also  fail 
on  these  three  points.  This  is  probably  the  strongest 
point  for  marriage  in  this  horoscope. 

Chart  No.  18  shows  a  lady  who  claims  to  have  re- 
ceived five  proposals  in  one  month.  She  also  told  us 
that  she  had  not  received  an  offer  for  years  previous- 
ly. You  will  notice  that  Mercury  is  entering  her 


REC'D  FIVE  PROPOSALS  IN  ONE  MONTH 


106  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

1st  Sign,  and  that  the  Moon  is  leaving  the  3rd  Sign; 
this  connects  her  love  affairs  with  writing,  traveling, 
and  brothers  and  sisters.  She  was  a  lady  stenogra- 
pher at  a  time  when  stenography  was  in  its  infancy. 
She  has  seven  good  planets  in  her  1st  Sign;  so  we 
presume  there  were  no  quarrels  and  misunderstand- 
ings. All  her  a'dmirers  walked  right  up  and  pro- 
posed. One  proposal  she  told  us  came  through  her 
brother.  She  then  went  for  a  holiday  and  met  the 
only  man  with  whom  she  had  fallen  in  love ;  however 
she  married  one  of  the  five  and  stated  that  she  was 
not  sorry  for  having  done  so. 

No.  19  is  a  lady  who  was  married  four  times  and 
engaged  to  the  fifth ;  so  far  as  we  could  learn  there 
was  only  one  good  man  among  them,  and  he  died 
after  a  long  illness.  Seven  planets  are  in  the  1st  Sign, 


No.  19 

MARRIED  FOUR  TIMES  AND  ENGAGED  TO  FIFTH 


LOVE  AND  MARRIAGE 


107 


including  three  bad  planets.  Mercury  will  soon  enter 
the  5th,  and  her  horoscope  becomes  stronger  until 
about  fifty  years  of  age,  then  it  weakens  down  some- 
what. One  husband  was  imprisoned  for  life,  another 
suicided,  and  another  proved  to  be  a  married  man. 

She  was  a  bright,  interesting,  jolly  woman,  and 
very  kind  hearted.  Back  of  it  all  you  could  detect  a 
vein  of  sadness. 

No.  20  is  the  horoscope  of  a  man  over  forty  years 
of  age  who  was  separated  from  his  first  wife  and  mar- 
ried to  a  girl  under  twenty.  You  will  notice  Uranus 
between  the  12th  and  1st  Signs.  Uranus  frequently 
indicates  separation.  Mercury  coming  into  the  1st 
Sign  indicates  a  young  person  connected  with  love 
affairs.  The  Moon  is  leaving  his  1st  Sign,  the  most 
common  time  for  Cancer  person?  to  marry.  Transits 


Jib  3.0 
ttRIDE   18»   GROOM  47   YEARS   OF  AGE. 


108 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


running  strong  on  the  5th  and  llth  favor  marriage 
with  a  young  person.  When  the  Moon  passes  through 
his  3rd  Sign  he  dies  in  a  steamboat  disaster. 

Chart  No.  21  gives  you  a  marriage  by  elopement ; 
the  young  lady'  parents  are  wealthy  and  she  elopes 
with  a  poor  man;  this  brings  a  storm  in  the  sign  of 
her  father  and  mother  where  her  planets  run  very 
strong;  later  on  Mars  and  Saturn  in  the  Transits  pass 
off  and  she  becomes  reconciled  to  her  parents.  The 
marriage  seems  to  have  been  happy  otherwise.  Mars 
in  her  money  sign  draws  trouble  over  money. 


2.1 
MARRIAGE   BY    ELOPEMENT. 


MONEY  AND  HEAVEN  109 

CHAPTER  X. 
Money  and  Heaven. 

It  has  been  decided  that  money  and  heaven  come 
under  the  2nd  Sign  and  that  is  why  they  are  coupled 
here.  Under  money  we  strike  the  hard-headed 
business  man ;  business,  not  sentiment,  is  the  ruling 
impulse  in  his  life.  When  he  marries,  he  does  so 
from  an  economic  standpoint.  He  sees  an  opportuni- 
ty to  get  something  for  nothing,  and  it  would  not  be 
good  business  to  let  such  an  opportunity  pass. 
He  usually,  however,  marries  one  of  the  senti- 
mental type.  Opposites  attract ;  for  the  sake  of 
the  rising  generation  this  wise  provision  is  made.  A 
person  who  has  reached  one  extreme  must  marry  a 
person  approaching  the  other  extreme,  or  otherwise 
entail  havoc  upon  the  children.  Fate  concerns  her- 
self much  more  about  the  effect  on  the  next  genera- 
tion, than  the  happiness  of  the  individuals  mated. 
They  never  understand  each  other;  he  does  not  un- 
derstand her  sensitive  sentimental  nature,  and  she 
does  not  understand  his  hard-headed  practical  nature, 
and  each  blames  the  other  for  the  qualities  with  which 
nature  has  endowed  them.  He  may  try  to  assume  a 
degree  of  sentimentalism,  but  it  does  not  fit  and  she 
accuses  him  of  assuming,  which  seems  to  her  to  be  a 
greater  grievance  than  the  former,  and  so  it  goes. 
Commonly  a  man  or  woman  with  a  strong  money  sign 
has  planets  in  the  1st  or  llth  or  both.  We  are  speak- 
ing of  those  who  are  in  a  manner  devoid  of  sentiment. 

We  get  our  idea  of  heaven  or  future  reward,  as 
it  has  been  called,  being  placed  under  the  2nd 
Sign  from  the  account  of  the  creation  as  given  in 
Genesis  Ch.  1 :  6,  7,  8.  All  the  other  Signs  corres- 


110  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

pond  with  the  account  given  and  there  is  no  reason 
why  this  should  not.  Our  views  are  also  corroborated 
by  many  other  passages  in  Scripture.  In  Matt.  6:19- 
21  the  following  appears.  "Lay  not  up  for  yourselves 
treasures  upon  earth,  where  moth  and  rust  doth  cor- 
rupt, and  where  thieves  break  through  and  steal,  but 
lay  up  for  yourselves  treasures  in  heaven,  where  neith- 
er moth  nor  rust  doth  corrupt,  and  where  thieves  do 
not  break  through  nor  steal,  for  where  your  treasure 
is  there  will  your  heart  be  also." 

The  passage  in  Matt.  19:16,  which  speaks  of  its 
being  easier  for  a  camel  to  pass  through  the  eye  of  a 
needle  than  for  a  rich  man  to  enter  into  the  Kingdom 
of  Heaven,  has  provoked  a  great  deal  of  discussion. 
The  needles  eye  referred  to  may  be  a  pass  by  that 
name  or  it  may  not;  whether  or  not,  the  inference  is 
that  we  cannot  have  our  reward  in  this  world  and  in 
the  next  as  well.  All  the  teachings  of  the  Bible  cor- 
roborate this  view.  The  rich  man  spoken  of  in  this 
case  was  told  to  sell  all  that  he  had  and  to  give  it  to 
the  poor,  and  he  would  have  treasures  laid  up  in 
heaven ;  but  he  went  away  sorrowful  for  he  had  great 
possessions.  We  are  told  that  if  we  give  any  thing 
up  for  the  sake  of  Christ  we  will  receive  an  hundred 
fold  in  the  life  to  come. 

Christ  tells  his  disciples  to  take  no  thought  for  what 
they  should  eat  or  wear,  but  to  seek  first  the  Kingdom 
of  God,  and  all  these  things  would  be  added  unto  them 
— such  things  as  were  necessary ;  he  does  not  promise 
them  wealth. 

In  Matt.  25:31-46  we  find  what  is  called  a  descrip- 
tion of  the  last  judgment,  where  we  are  told  how 
our  surplus  money  should  be  used.  "I  was  hungered 
and  ye  gave  me  meat,  I  was  thirsty  and  ye  gave  me 
drink,  I  was  a  stranger  and  ye  took  me  in,  naked  and 
ye  clothed  me.  I  was  sick  and  ye  visited  me,  I  was  in 


MONEY  AND  HEAVEN  111 

prison  and  ye  came  unto  me.  Inasmuch  as  ye  have 
done  it  unto  one  of  the  least  of  these  my  bretheren 
ye  have  done  it  unto  me." 

"To  those  on  the  left  he  shall  say,  Inasmuch  as  ye 
did  it  not  to  one  of  the  least  of  these  ye  did  it  not  to 
me.  And  these  shall  go  away  into  everlasting  pun- 
ishment." 

These  are  the  words  of  Christ.  No  man  or  woman 
would  ever  write  such  words.  Men  and  women  would 
prefer  a  free  and  easy  world  where  they  could  do  any- 
thing they  liked  without  fear  of  punishment ;  but  God 
is  handling  the  universe  and  he  knows  what  is  requir- 
ed. He  sees  the  end  from  the  beginning.  This  old 
world  would  get  into  an  awful  muddle  if  any  of  us 
were  running  it. 

The  only  way  any  man  can  become  rich,  or  remain 
rich  even  on  inherited  wealth,  is  by  closing  his  eyes 
and  his  ears  to  the  appeals  for  help  made  to  him  on 
every  side.  He  cannot  ride  on  one  of  the  streets  of 
our  great  cities,  or  climb  the  mountain  side  of  a  quiet 
summer  resort,  or  pick  up  a  newspaper  without  meet- 
ing a  silent  appeal  for  help.  If  he  is  a  Christian  the 
verse  just  quoted  should  come  to  him.  "Inasmuch 
as  ye  did  it  not  to  one  of  the  least  of  these  ye  did  it 
not  to  me."  Just  what  amount  of  money  a  Christian 
might  properly  be  allowed  to  horde  up  for  his  own 
pleasure  and  to  provide  against  future  possibilities 
would  be  a  difficult  matter  to  decide.  Fortunately 
that  is  not  a  poor  man's  trouble.  A  man  however 
who  passes  the  million  mark  should  feel  the  weight 
of  it  upon  his  conscience,  particularily  if  it  has  been 
gained  as  much  wealth  has  been  by  grinding  the  poor, 
and  turning  a  deaf  ear  to  calls  for  help.  These  must 
constantly  meet  every  person  who  travels  through  the 
world,  at  home  or  abroad.  We  recollect  at  one  time 
meeting  a  man  who  received  notice  that  he  was  com- 


112  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

ing  into  an  unexpected  fortune  by  inheritance.  With 
his  face  aglow  he  said,  "and  I'm  not  going  to  forget 
my  friends  either."  We  were  relating  the  story  to  an- 
other person  of  our  acquaintance  who  made  the  re- 
mark. "If  he  doesn't  forget  his  friends  he'll  be  a  hu- 
man miracle."  This  latter  remark  was  made  by  a  very 
old  man  who  had  seen  much  of  the  world. 

The  question  of  money  is  a  mere  gamble.  The 
-man  who  draws  money  gets  it,  but  while  he  is  get- 
ting money  he  should  be  careful  that  he  is  not  missing 
something  more  important. 

Some  of  you  will  say,  "I  have  made  my  own  for- 
tune; God  had  nothing  to  do  with  it."  Who  is  there 
among  you  who  will  say,  my  money  is  in  my  own 
keeping,  God  cannot  touch  it.  You  would  not  dare 
to  say  it.  You  know  God  can  take  it  from  you  by 
fire,  flood,  robberies,  embezzlements,  or  in  a  thousand 
different  ways  as  he  has  done  with  others.  Your  mon- 
ey is  in  God's  hands,  and  everything  else  you  own ; 
your  life  and  the  lives  of  your  family  and  friends  are 
in  his  hands ;  all  we  are  and  all  we  have  is  in  his 
hands ;  all  the  good  things  we  have  we  are  keeping  at 
his  option.  Such  thoughts  should  make  us  very  hum- 
ble, and  very  thankful  as  well. 

It  may  be  urged  that  capitalists  provide  labor.  So 
they  do,  but  large  capitalists  form  large  business  mo- 
nopolies which  are  a  curse  to  a  country.  They  can 
do  their  part  very  nicely  on  half  a  million  and  have 
what  they  call  a  good  time,  too.  A  limited  amount  of 
capital  invested  in  legitimate  business,  and  paying 
an  honest  dividend  to  labor  is  to  be  respected. 

When  wages  however  are  cut  down  to  half  what 
they  should  be,  and  monopolies  are  formed  to  the 
exclusion  of  all  honest  competition,  millionaires  still 
pocketing  immense  profits ;  the  situation  does  not 
look  Christian  like,  to  say  the  least.  Such  men  are 


MONEY  AND  HEAVEN  113 

ably  dealt  with  in  James  5  :l-7.  "Go  to  now  ye  rich 
men  weep  and  howl  for  your  miseries  that  shall  come 
upon  you." 

Your  riches  are  corrupted,  and  your  garments  are 
moth  eaten. 

Your  gold  and  silver  is  cankered ;  and  the  rust  of 
them  shall  be  a  witness  against  you,  and  shall  eat 
your  flesh  as  it  were  fire.  Ye  have  heaped  treasure 
together  for  the  last  days. 

Behold  the  hire  of  the  labourers  who  have  reaped 
down  your  fields,  which  is  of  you  kept  back  by  fraud, 
crieth :  and  the  cries  of  them  which  have  reaped  are 
entered  into  the  ears  of  the  lord  of  Sabaoth. 

Ye  have  lived  in  pleasure  on  the  earth,  and  been 
wanton ;  ye  have  nourished  your  hearts,  as  in  a  day  of 
slaughter. 

Ye  have  condemned  and  killed  the  just ;  and  he  doth 
not  resist  you. 

Be  patient  therefore  brethren  unto  the  coming  of 
the  Lord." 

The  rich  in  this  world  make  the  poor  to  a  large 
extent;  that  fact  is  too  obvious  to  require  explana- 
tion. It  seems  incredible  that  any  man  or  woman 
who  has  been  raised  in  poverty  could  oppress  the 
poor;  but  they  are  usually  the  meanest  of  the  mean 
in  money  matters  when  they  come  to  be  wealthy.  It 
doesn't  take  much  to  turn  the  head  of  poor  silly  hu- 
manity. 

In  speaking  of  money  and  heaven,  there  is  one  point 
where  they  fit  very  close  together.  Did  you  ever 
see  some  poor  man  or  woman  struggling,  day  in,  day 
out  for  years,  trying  to  make  a  scanty  income  provide 
the  necessities  for  themselves  and  family,  and  at  last 
a  little  windfall  strikes  them,  and  the  terrible  pressure 
that  threatened  to  crush  the  life  and  soul  out  of  its 
victims  is  removed.  Well,  if  there  is  any  experience 


114  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

in  life  that  is  calculated  to  give  a  poor  mortal  a  fore- 
taste of  heaven,  that  is  the  one.  Just  think  how  some 
of  you  wealthy  people  could  carry  heaven  with  you 
wherever  you  go.  A  thousand  dollars  dropped  here 
and  there  as  you  go  would  never  be  missed  by  you, 
and  just  think  of  the  joy  it  would  bring  to  the  needy 
ones,  and  think  of  the  joy  and  gladness  that  would 
be  reflected  in  your  lives.  That  is  one  of  the 
ways  whereby  you  can  build  heaven  upon  earth ;  one 
of  the  ways  by  which  money  can  be  turned  into  hea- 
ven. In  so  doing  you  are  also  laying  up  treasure  in 
the  world  which  is  to  come.  Money  can  almost  buy 
heaven,  but  not  the  way  some  folks  try  to  buy  it. 
Another  point  we  would  have  you  remember  is  that 
charity  begins  at  home.  The  people  nearest  to  you 
are  those  for  whom  God  holds  you  especially  respons- 
ible. He  does  not  expect  you  to  hunt  all  over  the 
earth  for  a  place  to  do  an  act  of  kindness  ;  he  sends 
the  needy  to  your  door;  he  brings  them  into  your 
daily  life ;  you  don't  need  to  search  for  them.  These 
are  the  persons  who  will  be  called  to  witness  against 
you  in  the  last  day.  Little  acts  of  kindness  that  the 
world  never  hears  of,  that  is  the  kind  of  giving  God 
loves. 

In  closing  we  would  call  your  attention  to  a  few 
lessons  that  may  be  learned  about  heaven.  We  have 
told  you  what  in  our  opinion  will  make  hell.  The 
inhabitants  will  make  the  place,  and  heaven  will  be 
made  in  the  same  way.  In  Gal.  v.,  19,  we  are  told 
what  will  make  hell :  "Adultery,  fornication,  unclean- 
ness,  lasciviousness,  idolatry,  witchcraft,  hatred,  var- 
iance, emulations,  wrath,  strife,  seditions,  heresies,  en- 
vyings,  murders,  drunkenness,  revelings,  and  such- 
like. If  these  would  not  make  a  lake  of  fire, 
we  do  not  know  what  would.  But  the  fruit  of 


MONEY  AXD  HEAVEX  115 

the  Spirit  is  love,  joy,  peace,  long  suffering,  gentle- 
ness, goodness,  faith,  meekness,  temperance:  against 
such  there  is  no  law.  These  will  make  heaven.  If 
you  are  in  any  doubt  about  where  you  stand,  square 
yourself  up  by  this  dividing  line.  Do  you  love  the 
former,  or  do  you  love  the  latter?  Happy  are  those 
who  can  say,  Behold,  the  former  things  have  passed 
away! 

Don't  let  anyone  poison  your  mind  with  the  idea 
that  God  is  cruel  or  unkind.  We  have  heard  men 
say,  "God  must  be  a  monster  of  cruelty  if  he  would 
create  man  with  desires  and  inclinations  to  commit 
sin,  and  then  condemn  him  to  everlasting  punishment 
for  gratifying  these  desires." 

In  the  first  place,  God  created  man  perfect  as  he 
himself  is  perfect.  In  his  own  image  created  he 
mar  but  he  also  created  him  a  free  agent  to  act  as 
he  chose ;  had  God  not  done  so  there  would  have  been 
a  still  greater  cry  against  his  omnipotence.  Man  was 
not  only  created  perfect,  but  he  was  told  what  he 
must  do  in  order  to  maintain  his  state  of  perfection. 
Man  disobeyed  God,  and  made  friends  with  the  devil, 
God's  enemy,  and  Adam  is  not  the  only  man  who 
took  sides  against  God.  We  are  not  responsible  for 
what  Adam  did.  Where  do  we  stand?  God  has  left 
us  a  complete  revelation  so  simple  that  a  child  can 
understand  it,  telling  us  what  we  must  do  to  inherit 
eternal  life. 

"God  so  loved  the  world  that  he  gave  his  only  be- 
gotten Son,  that  whosoever  believeth  in  him  should 
not  perish,  but  have  everlasting  life."  What  more 
could  he  do?  God  never  sent  any  man  to  the  place 
of  the  lost ;  he  sends  himself  there.  If  a  man  steals  a 
horse,  do  you  blame  the  legislator  who  made  the  law 
forbidding  stealing,  or  the  judge  who  sentences  him 


116  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

according  to  the  law?  Certainly  net,  you  blame  the 
man  himself.  Let  us  be  reasonable. 

We  believe  that  heaven  is  a  place ;  John  xix. :  2,  3 : 
"In  my  Father's  house  are  many  mansions.  I  go  to 
prepare  a  place  for  you,  and  if  I  go  and  prepare  a 
place  for  you  I  will  come  again  and  receive  you  unto 
myself,  that  where  I  am,  there  ye  may  be  also."  We 
are  to  live  with  Christ  in  a  place  specially  prepared 
by  him,  but  that  does  not  necessitate  our  remaining 
there.  Wrhile  heaven  is  our  home,  our  world  may  be 
the  universe. 

A  beautiful  description  of  heaven  is  given  in  the 
two  last  chapters  of  Revelation.  Heaven  is  described 
as  having  a  wall  great  and  high,  the  length,  breadth, 
and  height,  each  12,000  furlongs.  In  this  waJJ  were 
12  gates,  having  the  names  of  the  12  tribes  of  Israel 
written  thereon.  12  foundations  were  under  the  wall 
of  the  city,  bearing  the  names  of  the  12  apostles.  The 
wall  was  built  of  jasper,  and  the  city  of  pure  gold. 
The  foundations  of  the  city  were  garnished  with  all 
manner  of  precious  stones,  and  the  12  gates  were  12 
pearls.  The  Glory  of  God  was  the  light  thereof,  and 
there  was  no  night  there.  A  river  pure  as  crystal 
ran  through  it,  and  the  Tree  of  Life  grew  on  either 
side  and  yielded  her  fruit  every  month.  The  only 
number  used  in  the  description  is  the  number  12 — 
12  foundations,  12  gates,  the  City  measuring  12,000 
furlongs.  Then  the  tree  of  life  grew  12  manner  of 
fruits  and  yielded  her  fruit  every  month.  12,000  were 
chosen  from  each  tribe.  Rev.  vii. ;  4.  Those  who 
stand  before  the  throne  shall  be  clothed  with  white 
robes,  and  palms  in  their  hands.  Rev.  vii.;  9.  And 
the  angel  said,  "These  are  they  which  came  out  of 
great  tribulation,  and  have  washed  their  robes,  and 
made  them  white  in  the  blood  of  the  Lamb.  There- 
fore are  they  before  the  throne  of  God,  and  serve  him 


MONEY  AND  HEAVEN 


117 


day  and  night  in  his  temple:  and  he  that  sittest  on 
the  throne  shall  dwell  among  them.  They  shall  hun- 
ger no  more,  neither  thirst  any  more,  neither  shall 
the  sun  light  on  them,  nor  any  heat.  For  the  Lamb 
which  is  in  the  midst  of  the  throne  shall  feed  them,  and 
shall  lead  them  into  living  fountains  of  waters:  and 
God  shall  wipe  away  all  tears  from  their  eyes."  Again 
in  Rev.  xxi.  4.  "And  God  shall  wipe  away  all  tears 
from  their  eyes  and  there  shall  be  no  more  death, 
neither  sorrow,  nor  crying,  neither  shall  there  be  any 
more  pain:  for  the  former  things  are  passed  away." 
The  angel  tells  John  to  write,  for  these  things  are  true 


AX   OIL  KING 


118 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


and  faithful,  and  again  he  says,  "The  Lord  God  hath 
sent  me  to  shew  unto  his  servants  the  things  which 
must  shortly  be  done."  There  is  no  reason  why  this 
description  should  not  be  taken  literally.  We  certain- 
ly could  not  conceive  of  a  more  beautiful  place  or 
pleasanter  surroundings.  "The  Lamb  shall  feed  them 
and  God  himself  shall  wipe  away  all  tears  from  their 
eyes."  If  it  is  not  to  be  taken  literally,  it  certainly 
means  that  our  highest  expectations  will  be  fulfilled. 

No.  22,  the  1st.  Chart  illustrating  money,  is  a  great 
oil  king.  You  will  notice  that  in  1888  five  good  plan- 
ets appeared  in  his  2nd.  Sign  for  money,  and  Jupiter 


A   GREAT   LADY    FINANCIER 


MONEY  AND   HEAVEN 


119 


in  the  4th.  for  houses  and  land.  Neptune  and  the  Sun 
are  in  his  2nd.  Sign,  and  are  the  only  permanent  plan- 
ets in  it.  Neptune  stands  for  liquids,  and  the  Sun  for 
light,  hence  money  made  by  oil.  One  bad  planet 
stands  in  his  3rd.  Sign,  governing  traveling  and  writ- 
ing ;  writing  always  includes  legal  documents  and  let- 
ters. The  remaining  bad  planets  appear  in  the  12th. 
Sign,  drawing  enemies  and  trouble  with  everything 
that  comes  under  the  12th.  In  1913  Mercury  is  in 
the  12th.  Sign,  and  the  Moon  entering  his  2nd.:  this 
position  tends  to  draw  enemies  connected  with  money. 
No.  23  is  a  great  lady  financier.  She  has 


FOUNDER  OF  MANY  LIBRARIES 


120 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


6  good  planets  between  her  2nd.  and  3rd.  Signs,  and 
all  her  bad  planets  removed  some  distance  from  this 
point.  Money  should  roll  right  into  her  pocket-book. 
Mars  in  the  1st.  Sign  brings  death  to  her  husband, 
and  also  causes  her  to  be  careless  regarding  her  per- 
sonal appearance.  Uranus  in  the  4th.  causes  her  to 
occupy  an  unpretentious  residence.  There  are  no 
spending  planets  around  her  money  sign.  If  she  had 
one  or  two  bad  planets  around  her  2nd.  Sign  and 
good  planets  in  the  1st.  or  4th.,  she  would  spend 
money  on  making  a  good  appearance,  building  a  fine 


NOTED  SHIP-BUILDER 


MONEY  AND  HEAVEN 


121 


home,  and  dressing  gaily.     She  is  77  years  of  age, 
and  still  oversees  her  business  interests. 

No.  24  is  a  great  steel  king  who  becomes  wealthy 
through  the  3rd  and  4th  Signs.  The  3rd  connects  his 
business  with  traveling  and  the  4th  constructive 
work,  hence  the  manufacture  of  steel  rails;  he  has 
probably  made  good  on  land  as  well.  In  1902  all  his 
planets  stand  in  the  3rd  and  4th  excepting  Saturn, 
which  appears  in  the  12th  Sign.  He  has  two  spend- 
ing planets  in  the  3rd  and  4th  Signs,  and  this  leads 
him  to  take  his  money  out  of  steel  rails,  and  to  put  it 
into  libraries.  Books  and  libraries  come  under  the 
3rd  and  4th  Signs,  the  same  as  steel  rails.  He  does 


OWNER    OF   TELEPHONE   LINE 


122 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


not  bank  money  like  one  who  has  a  strong  2nd  Sign. 
He  is  also  an  author,  and  should  be  a  master  hand 
with  the  pen. 

In  No.  25  we  have  a  great  ship-builder.  Neptune 
stands  between  the  3rd  and  4th  Signs  with  seven  plan- 
ets. What  more  would  you  want?  Jupiter  stands  in 
the  1st  giving  inventive  ability.  The  Transits  are 
also  very  strong  at  this  point.  Such  a  horoscope 
would  give  him  success  with  anything  coming  under 
the  3rd  and  4th  Signs,  but  Neptune  standing  between 
the  two  and  in  the  middle  of  the  conjunction  connects 
him  strongly  with  the  water  and  traveling  by  boat. 


Afo  27 

A   GREAT   INHERITANCE 


MONEY  AXD   HEAYEX 


123 


In  No.  26  planetary  conditions  resemble  those  in 
No.  24.  Mars  appears  in  the  2nd,  however,  and  this 
indicates  quarreling  over  money  matters,  and  possible 
law  suits.  His  12th.  Sign  is  good,  and  this  lessens  the 
darger  of  law  suits.  He  started  life  as  an  employee 
o'  a  telephone  company,  and  later  became  the  owner 
ci"  a  telephone  line.  He  is  still  quite  a  young  man. 

We  prefer  to  study  the  lives  of  those  who  have 
made  their  own  fortunes  as  it  were ;  when  wealth  is 
inherited  we  expect  to  find  the  influences  governing 
it,  in  the  horoscopes  of  the  parents  or  grand-parents 
in  a  large  degree. 


GREAT   FINANCIER 


124 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


No.  27  inherited  an  immense  fortune  from  his 
father  in  November,  1912.  His  chart  is  given  just  as 
it  stood  on  his  21st  birthday,  when  all  his  good  plan- 
ets were  in  his  2nd  and  4th  Signs.  The  4th  Sign  gov- 
erns the  father  and  mother,  and  five  good  planets  in 
the  4th  would  indicate  large  gains  from  his  father. 
Neptune  in  the  2nd  would  indicate  money  coming 
through  water  or  liquids,  and  in  this  case  his  father 
was  drowned.  Saturn,  Mars,  and  Uranus,  all  his  evil 
planets  are  left  to  govern  the  llth  and  12th  Signs, 
and  everything  adjacent  to  them.  Jupiter  stands  op- 
posite Neptune  in  the  2nd  Sign,  and  only  one  bad 


/1/oSW 

SUDDEN   PROMOTION 


MONEY  AND  HEAVEN 


125 


planet  stands  in  the  4th  in  the  Transits.  The  Moon  in 
the  Nativity  is  in  the  4th,  and  Venus  and  Mercury 
form  a  conjunction  there  with  good  planets.  His  12th 
and  1st  were  not  good  at  that  time.  This  is  the  most 
important  point  in  his  life. 

In  No.  28  we  come  to  wealth  gained  through  the 
llth  Sign;  all  the  good  planets  are  placed  in  the  llth. 
Planets  in  the  10th  run  a  conjunction  with  a  power- 
ful llth  Sign,  thus  we  find  him  inheriting  ten  millions 
from  his  father  to  begin  with.  In  the  same  way  he 
would  always  draw  well  in  land.  He  acted  as  direc- 
tor of  a  number  of  railways.  A  person  with  a  strong 


3o 

MILLIONAIRE  CATTLEMAN 


126 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


3rd  and  4th  would  become  wealthy  in  the  building  of 
railroads,  while  a  strong  llth  would  draw  money 
through  collecting  the  fares ;  the  same  as  a  per- 
son having  a  strong  llth  would  draw  money  from 
large  audiences.  Theatre  tickets  and  railway 
tickets  work  along  the  same  line.  It  is  said  that  his 
wealth  consisted  chiefly  in  stocks  and  securities. 
With  six  good  planets  in  the  llth  Sign  he  would 
draw  from  everyone  with  whom  he  came  into  con- 
tact; he  would  be  a  dangerous  man  to  gamble  with. 

He  died  on  a  visit  to  Europe  with  the  Moon  leaving 
his  traveling  Sign. 


SCIENCE    PRODUCES    WEALTH 


MONEY  AND  HEAVEN  127 

No.  29  is  a  lady  who  became  wealthy.  This  chart 
shows  her  as  a  young  lady  whose  parents  had  been  in 
straightened  circumstances,  going  to  New  York  and 
attracting  the  attention  of  millionaires.  Before  many 
years  she  was  married  to  a  rich  man,  and  later  her 
husband  died,  leaving  all  his  wealth  to  his  widow. 
She  then  took  an  active  part  in  public  affairs  spend- 
ing her  money  freely  for  any  charity  in  which  she  be- 
came interested.  This  little  girl  had  to  go  out  to 
wrork,  earning  not  as  much  as  lots  of  little  girls  spend 
on  candy,  but  she  didn't  go  and  commit  suicide. 

When  you  girls  strike  a  very  bad  place,  you  must 
remember  there  is  a  very  good  place  somewhere  in 
your  horoscope.  Give  it  a  fair  trial  before  you  at- 
tempt suicide,  and  when  you  come  into  the  good 
place,  don't  forget  the  little  girl  who  is  in  trouble  as 
you  were  once. 

You  will  notice  in  the  chart  that  the  Moon  has  been 
in  conjunction  with  Uranus  leaving  the  4th  Sign.  The 
4th  is  the  Sign  of  the  father  and  mother.  It  has  now 
passed  on  where  it  strikes  Neptune,  Mercury,  Venus, 
and  the  Sun — four  good  planets  in  the  llth  Sign, 
which  is  the  Sign  of  friends  among  strangers.  These 
good  planets  show  that  she  draws  great  favors  from 
friends;  a  strong  llth  also  brings  her  a  youthful  old 
age. 

We  have  now  to  present  a  man  whose  money  comes 
through  the  12th  Sign;  he  is  a  millionaire  cattle  man. 
He  and  his  partner  owned  at  one  time  86,000  cattle 
and  100,000  sheep,  besides  the  land  'which  provided 
them  with  pasture.  He  came  from  Germany  at  19 
years  of  age,  and  began  life  as  a  butcher's  boy.  Ve- 
nus passes  through  the  3rd  and  4th  Signs,  reaching 
the  5th  at  80  years  of  age.  Mercury  passes  through 
the  3rd  and  4th  twice,  entering  the  12th  at  34  and  at 
80.  A  conjunction  of  Venns  and  Mercury  in  the  3rd 


128  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

and  4th  drew  land.  He  is  well  known  to  the  business 
men  of  California. 

Our  last  Chart,  No.  31  is  that  of  a  lady  who  not 
only  accumulated  wealth  mounting  into  the  millions, 
but  had  a  very  eventful  life.  An  element  of  mystery 
also  appears  in  her  teachings. 

This  Chart  shows  the  birth  of  her  child.  The 
Moon  stands  with  Mars  in  her  llth  Sign,  no  good  plan- 
et near  it.  Although  her  relatives  were  wealthy  the 
boy  was  not  allowed  to  live  with  her;  this  caused 
her  to  grieve  constantly  and  her  health  remained  bad 
Finally  a  physician  ventured  the  opinion  that  if  she 
had  her  child  she  would  improve  in  health,  and  he 
persuaded  her  to  marry  him.  She  did  so  only  on  con- 
dition that  the  child  should  live  with  her.  She  kept 
him  for  a  time,  but  his  foster  mother  took  him  away, 
telling  him  that  his  mother  was  dead;  and.  she  did 
not  see  her  boy  for  many  years.  When  she  met  him 
again  he  was  not  like  her  son,  so  that  nothing  but 
grief  accompanied  her  llth  Sign.  In  her  declining 
years  she  adopted  a  son,  but  there  was  still  too  much 
Mars  around  her  llth  Sign. 

Uranus  in  the  marriage  Sign  also  caused  trouble, 
her  first  husband  died,  her  second  eloped  with  another 
woman,  and  the  third  died.  Had  she  turned  her  back  on 
marriage  and  chosen  a  public  career,  she  might  have 
been  happier.  The  doctrine  of  faith-healing  consti- 
tutes the  mysterious  part  of  her  life.  So  far  as  her 
own  cure  was  concerned  she  might  have  been  relieved 
of  the  trouble  by  the  fall  with  which  she  met.  We 
hear  of  such  cases  occasionally.  The  suffering  she 
experienced  for  a  few  days  might  have  been  the  re- 
sult of  the  reaction  caused  by  the  change,  or  it  may 
have  been  real  miraculous  faith-healing.  The .  Moon 
is  in  her  3rd  Sign,  or  rather  leaving  her  3rd,  and  Ve- 
nus is  in  the  llth  coming  into  conjunction  with  Mars 


MONEY  AND  HEAVEN  129 

at  that  time.  Assuming  that  Mars  in  the  llth  caused 
the  trouble  then  Venus  coming  into  conjunction  with 
Mars  would  relieve  the  trouble.  From  the  stand- 
point of  planetary  influence  this  would  be  a  satisfac- 
tory explanation.  Apart  from  planetary  influence  it 
is  known  that  the  mind  has  a  powerful  effect  upon 
the  body.  If  you  doubt  it  try  a  few  experiments. 
Some  night  when  you  are  wrought  up  over  an  un- 
pleasant occurrence,  you  have  a  splitting  headache, 
and  feel  wretched  clean  to  your  finger  tips,  think  of 
some  beautiful,  soothing  verse  that  you  have  learned. 
If  you  are  inclined  to  worry  keep  a  stock  of  these  on 
hand,  for  worry  kills  far  more  people  than  work. 
Many  diseases  are  brought  on  by  worry  pure  and 
simple,  and  as  soon  as  you  lose  sleep  it  tells  upon 
your  health.  When  you  repeat  these  verses  allow 
yourself  to  relax  and  give  them  an  opportunity  to  per- 
meate your  entire  system.  Keep  repeating  them  un- 
til they  take  effect,  they  will  be  worth  any  number 
of  doses  of  some  opiate.  In  a  short  time  your  head- 
ache will  disappear  and  a  peaceful,  restful  feeling  will 
steal  over  you  right  to  your  finger  tips,  just  as  the 
wretchedness  permeated  your  entire  system. 

We  have  been  much  interested  in  the  discovery 
which  Commandant  Darget  professes  to  have  made. 
He  claims  that  thought  may  be  photographed  from 
the  head  and  from  other  sensitive  parts  of  the  body  as 
well.  From  this  fact  we  learn  that  thought  per- 
meates the  whole  body,  unpleasant  thoughts  giving 
pain,  and  pleasant  thoughts  relieving  pain.  The  law 
of  transference  might  also  be  of  assistance  to  our 
friend  in  her  work  of  healing  the  sick.  When  a  per- 
son was  healed  he  was  supposed  to  preach  the  gospel 
of  divine  healing  to  others.  In  so  doing  he  would  be 
brought  into  association  with  many  who  were  sick 
and  infirm.  His  own  illness  would  then  take  the 


130  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

form  of  associating  with  those  who  were  ill.  Such 
changes  are  very  frequently  seen  in  the  working  of 
planetary  influence.  This  same  law  might  have  as- 
sisted in  working  a  cure  for  herself.  In  her  latter  days 
Mercury  and  the  Moon  passed  Neptune  and  the  Sun 
in  her  2nd  Sign  and  the  money  rolled  in.  She  and  No. 
29  were  born  in  the  same  year,  but  in  a  different 
Sign.  The  llth  and  12th  in  the  former  correspond 
with  the  1st  and  2nd  in  the  latter. 

We  have  shown  yon  charts  representing  wealth  ; 
multimillionaires,  most  of  them,  from  the  2nd  Sign 
back  to  the  2nd.  Those  whose  wealth  consists  chief- 
ly in  money  have  a  heavy  2nd  Sign,  and  those  whose 
wealth  consists  in  other  possessions,  show  large  con- 
junctions in  the  other  Signs,  according  to  the  form 
their  wealth  takes.  Some  of  them  have  trouble  over 
money.  They  keep  their  money  tied  up  in  business, 
or  have  lawsuits  and  quarrels  over  it. 

It  is  not  necessary  to  illustrate  bad  money  signs. 
Mars  causes  quarrels  and  lawsuits  or  losses  by  fire, 
Saturn  causes  delays,  and  money  comes  in  very  slow- 
ly. A  person  having  Saturn  in  the  2nd  Sign  in  con- 
junction with  good  planets  accumulates  wealth  in 
the  latter  part  of  his  life.  Saturn  holds  it  back.  Ur- 
anus is  a  deceiver  in  money  matters.  A  man  may 
have  money  and  lose  it,  or  he  may  see  a  prospect  of 
great  wealth  which  never  materializes.  Conjunctions 
of  these  planets  bring  combinations  of  trouble.  The 
2nd  Sign,  as  has  been  said  before,  does  not  strictly 
speaking  govern  wealth,  it  governs  money.  The  only 
way  to  acquire  wealth  is  to  put  your  money  into 
something  indicated  by  the  Sign  in  which  your  good 
planets  stand.  If  you  study  this  book  carefully  you 
will  be  able  to  fix  upon  the  best  point.  With  good 
planets  in  the  1st  Sign  you  should  gain  along  the 
line  of  clothing,  education,  and  religion,  or  you  may 


MONEY  AND  HEAVEN  131 

gain  by  marriage.  Good  planets  in  the  2nd,  banking 
loans,  etc.  Good  3rd,  anything  connected  with  trav- 
eling or  writing,  such  as  railroading,  newspaper  work, 
book  publishing,  etc.  Good  4th,  land,  mining,  build- 
ing, insurance,  etc.  Good  5th,  traveling,  appearing 
before  public  audiences,  education,  stocks,  betting, 
gambling,  etc.  These  latter  also  require  a  good  2nd. 
Sign,  if  money  is  at  stake.  If  something  else  is  at 
stake,  watch  the  Sign  under  which  it  falls.  The  12th 
governs  everything  connected  with  animals  and  the 
feet;  even  furs  and  anything  procured  from  animals. 
Floors  and  paving  also  come  under  the  12th,  and 
everything  connected  with  food,  eating,  or  drinking. 
There  is  a  peculiar  connection  between  animals,  eat- 
ing, and  the  feet.  We  feed  animals  and  also  use  them 
for  food,  and  we  make  foot-wear  from  the  hides  of  ani- 
mals. Our  feet  often  come  in  contact  with  animals 
and  they  also  travel  on  floors  and  paving.  A  child 
who  is  hungry  will  kick  until  he  gets  something  good 
to  eat,  then  he  makes  a  happy  motion  with  his  feet. 
In  the  same  way  you  can  trace  out  an  intimate  con- 
nection between  those  things  which  are  governed  by 
any  of  the  other  Signs.  At  first  sight  the  classifica- 
tion seems  arbitrary  and  senseless,  but  as  we  study  the 
indications  of  the  Signs  we  cannot  fail  to  see  the 
connection. 

If  you  have  good  planets  in  two  Signs,  combine  the 
Signs  in  selecting  an  occupation.  You  must  also 
study  the  planets.  If  Neptune  is  under  good  influences 
everything  connected  with  water  will  prosper.  Nep- 
tune and  the  Sun  for  oil,  Neptune  and  Venus 
for  fancy  drinks,  or  art.  Neptune  and  Mars 
control  the  Navy  and  "fire-water'.  The  latter 
do  not  come  under  good  influences,  but  a 
person  having  this  conjunction  in  the  horoscope  will 
incline  to  follow  such  occupations.  Innumerable 
combinations  mav  be  formed. 


132  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

We  have  told  you  how  wealth  comes  and  we  will 
now  tell  you  how  heaven  conies  ;  you  cannot  all  have 
money  in  abundance,  but  you  can  all  have  heaven. 
Some  men  say,  "I  wish  I  could  believe  in  heaven,  but 
I  can't."  Don't  let  the  devil  fool  you  out  of  heaven  by 
making  you  believe  there  isn't  any  such  place.  Re- 
member that  is  where  you  are  going  to  get  your  re- 
ward for  the  $10.00  you  gave  a  man  when  he  was  in 
need.  This  man  became  your  enemy,  returned  evil 
for  good  and  you  never  got  any  reward  in  this  world 
for  your  kind  act,  but  God  entered  it  in  his  account 
book  and  will  reward  you  for  it ;  he  tells  us  to  lay  up 
our  treasure  in  heaven.  God's  revelation  tells  us  of 
heaven ;  man's  innate  conscience  tells  him  of  heaven ; 
nearly  all  tribes,  no  matter  how  barbarous,  believe  in 
a  future  life,  and  future  reward  or  punishment ;  our 
own  reason  also  tells  us  that  there  must  be  a  place 
where  the  wrongs  of  life  are  righted. 

There  will  be  some  great  surprises  in  heaven;  there 
will  be  men  there  who  never  saw  the  inside  of  a  church. 
That  poor  fellow  over  in  "Sing  Sing"  who  fo'rgot  his 
own  wretchedness  in  ministering  to  the  suffering 
ones  around  him  will  be  there.  True,  the  judge  found 
him  guilty,  but  the  judge  did  not  inquire  into  his  mo- 
tives, or  the  causes  leading  up  to  the  crime,  or  even 
his  past  life.  He  inquired  where  he  was  born,  how 
old  he  was,  and  where  he  had  spent  the  past  years  of 
his  life,  and  a  few  superficial  questions  such  as  could 
have  no  possible  bearing  upon  the  degree  of  his  guilt 
or  inncicence.  If  the  poor  fellow  was  honest  enough 
to  plead  guilty  he  got  his  sentence  according  to  the 
law.  God  does  not  judge  in  that  way,  "God  looks 
upon  the  heart."  He  says,  you  stole  that  money  and 
it  was  wrong,  but  you  spent  your  life  helping  others 
and  saved  nothing  for  yourself,  and  when  you  were 
in  want  you  took  a  little  from  some  one  who  would 


MONEY  AND  HEAVEN  133 

not  miss  it,  and  never  gave  his  money  to  help  another 
man.  You  are  forgiven  for  the  wrong  you  have  done ; 
you  have  a  large  bank  account  in  heaven,  and  your 
present  difficulty  only  cuts  you  down  a  few  dollars. 
God  is  your  best  friend ;  he  understands  you  from  the 
beginning  to  the  end;  with  him  the  hairs  of  your 
head  are  all  numbered.  "Sing  Sing"  is  as  near  to 
God  and  as  near  to  heaven  as  any  other  place  on  the 
earth.  Whatever  your  position  in  life,  don't  let  any 
one  fool  you.  into  thinking  there  is  no  heaven,  or  em- 
bitter you  against  God. 

If  God  committed  any  crime  against  you  it  was 
in  creating  you  a  free  agent  with  the  power  to  choose 
right  and  wrong;  when  you  choose  the  wrong  don't 
blame  God.  If  you  wish  to  go  to  heaven  study  the 
passage  we  have  quoted  from  the  fifth  chapter  of  Gal- 
atians.  If  you  belong  to  the  former  class  you  could 
not  enjoy  heaven ;  if  you  belong  to  the  latter  and  keep 
on  good  terms  with  God  heaven  is  yours. 


134  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

CHAPTER  XL 
Traveling. 

Here  we  have  the  greatest  pleasure  giver,  the  great- 
est money  waster,  the  greatest  time  spender  on  the 
earth.  It  is  also  attended  with  great  danger.  Some 
one  will  say,  "Can't  you  figure  out  the  times  when 
it  will  be  least  dangerous  and  travel  at  those  times?" 
Yes,  we  can  where  the  person  is  merely  going  on  a 
pleasure  trip,  but  so  often  we  travel  because  we  have 
a  particular  reason  for  traveling  at  that  -time ;  it  may 
be  illness  or  death  among  our  friends,  some  business 
to  which  we  must  attend,  or  some  person  we  wish  to 
accompany.  Often  you  cannot  choose  your  own  time 
for  traveling;  when  you  can  you  should  by  all  means 
choose  the  best  time.  There  is  one  thing  certain,  it 
would  not  be  well  for  a  person  to  choose  an  occupa- 
tion connected  with  traveling  unless  his  horoscope 
wag  good  at  that  point.  We  cannot  but  recall  the 
fate  of  the  captain  and  crew  of  the  steamer  Rosen- 
crans.  It  was  wrecked  three  times,  and  the  third  time 
the  captain  and  crew  were  lost.  Neptune  has  been  in 
conjunction  with  Uranus  for  several  years.  Mars 
comes  in  once  in  ten  months,  or  more,  and  this 
is  the  time  when  trouble  may  be  expected,  special 
trouble  we  mean.  The  first  3  months  of  1913  are 
said  to  have  been  more  disastrous  to  shipping  than 
any  period  within  fifty  years.  It  is  eighty  years 
since  the  same  planetary  conditions  prevailed,  and 
strict  regulations  should  be  made  with  regard  to  ad- 
equate provisions  for  life  saving.  The  captain  and 
crew  should  have  good  horoscopes  for  the  water ;  that 
is  one  place  where  astrology  might  be  of  great  value. 
A  captain  with  good  traveling  indications  will  draw 
passengers  and  crew  having  the  same,  and  one  with 
danger  in  his  horoscope  draws  passengers  who  belong 
to  that  class. 


TRAVELING 


135 


Chart  No.  32  and  No.  33  we  present  in  connection 
with  traveling.  This  is  a  famous  writer  who  perished 
with  about  1500  others  in  the  wreck  of  the 
steamer  Titanic.  In  chart  No.  33  the  Moon 
appears  in  his  4th  Sign,  with  all  the  bad 
planets.  Uranus,  Saturn  and  Mars.  The  4th  Sign 
stands  for  the  home,  or  the  place  where  you  make 
your  abode.  His  evil  planets  being  in  the 
4th,  he  met  a  tragic  death  in  a  cabin  of  the 
ill-fated  steamer;  had  these  planets  appeared  in 
the  3rd  he  would  probably  have  been  on  the 
water.  We  are  reminded  of  the  fact  that  he 


NO.  33  AS  A  WRITER 


136 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


was  once  imprisoned  for  three  months  in  con- 
nection with  something  which  appeared  in  his  paper; 
evil  influences  in  the  4th  lead  to  imprisonment  in 
many  cases.  It  does  not  require  any  flight  of  the  im- 
agination to  see  a  connection  between  being  impris- 
oned in  a  cell,  and  coming  to  a  tragic  end  in  the  cabin 
of  a  sinking  steamer.  It  is  said  that  he  wrote  the 
description  of  a  wreck,  taking  place  in  the  same  vi- 
cinity many  years  before ;  we  have  failed  to  secure 
the  date.  To  those  who  understand  the  working  of 
astrology  such  a  coincidence  does  not  appear  at  all 
strange.  He  would  be  liable  to  some  presentiment 


jl/b  33 

EDITOR  LOST  AT  SEA. 


TRAVELING 


137 


along  that  line  whenever  the  Moon  touched  his  4th 
Sign.  No.  32  shows  his  connection  with  writ- 
ing, every  planet  but  one  appearing  in  the  3rd  and 
4th  Signs.  The  Sun  in  his  2nd  gives  him  a  good 
pull  on  money.  Besides  having  an  influential  place 
as  a  newspaper  man  he  published  a  number  of  books 
which  have  been  widely  read.  The  little^  incident  of 
his  imprisonment  only  served  to  advertise  his  works; 
a  man's  enemies  are  frequently  his  best  advertisers. 
He  occupied  a  high  place  in  public  esteem.  Across  a 
page  giving  a  short  sketch  of  his  life  we  find  written, 
"An  irreparable  loss." 


MAN  OF  WEALTH  IN  DISASTER 


138 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


Chart  No.  34  shows  the  death  of  a  wealthy  Amer- 
ican on  the  Steamer  Titantic.  The  Transits  were  the 
same  for  every  one  in  the  world  at  that  particular 
time,  excepting  that  they  strike  a  different  place  in 
the  horoscope.  You  will  notice  Neptune  in  conjunc- 
tion with  Uranus,  Mars  and  the  Sun  between  the  1st 
and  2nd  Signs  for  both  these  men.  In  other  horo- 
scopes this  conjunction  would  appear  at  a  different 
point.  In  that  of  No.  35  it  appears  between  the  2nd 
and  3rd.  Neptune  in  conjunction  with  evil  planets 
at  any  point  in  the  horoscope  indicates  evil  connected 
with  water  or  liquids.  No.  34  has  Neptune  forming 


IVo  3  S 

OFFICIAL  OF  STEAMER  TITANIC. 


TRAVELING 


139 


a  conjunction  with  Mars,  Saturn,  and  Venus  between 
the  3rd  and  4th  Sign.  Venus  indicates  women  con- 
nected with  the  tragedy ;  in  this  case  he  was  traveling 
with  his  wife. 

Chart  No.  35  is  that  of  a  prominent  official  whose 
life  was  saved  from  the  Titanic.  He  shows  a  good 
3rd  and  4th  in  the  Nativity.  The  Transits  entering 
the  3rd  are  bad,  and  his  llth  Sign  shows  X^eptune 
in  conjunction  with  Saturn  indicating  friends  in  dan- 
ger of  death  by  water.  Jupiter  in  the  conjunction 
indicates  a  prospect  of  being  saved.  No.  35  shows  an 
evil  1st  Sign  with  the  Moon  just  passing  out,  indi- 


DEATH   AND    BURIAL    OF    AMBASSADOR 


140 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


eating  great  trouble  among  women.  He  was  getting 
a  taste  of  this  when  he  begged  the  captain  of  the 
Carpathia  to  give  him  a  room  where  he  remained 
during  the  balance  of  the  trip.  The  Nativity  being 
good  in  the  3rd  and  4th  Signs  saved  his  life. 

In  No  36  the  death  and  burial  of  the  late  United 
States  ambassador  to  England  is  presented.  His  3rd 
and  4th  Signs  connect  him  with  the  Navy.  His  Moon 
is  in  the  3rd  Sign  with  Mars  and  the  Sun  in  the  4th. 
The  Sun  in  conjunction  with  Mars  and  Neptune  in- 
dicates distinction  through  the  Navy,  and  his  body 
was  brought  to  America  on  a  British  man  of  war. 


ARCTIC   EXPLORER 


TRAVELING 


141 


The  Moon  in  the  conjunction  indicates  the  'time. 
Death  occurring  in  the  3rd  Sign  is  usually  accom- 
panied by  traveling,  either  before  or  after  death. 

No.  37,  an  Arctic  explorer,  is  now  introduced.  His 
3rd  Sign  is  good  but  his  llth  shows  a  rough  time. 
His  Sign  of  friends  was  evidently  in  bad  shape  about 
the  time  he  made  his  Arctic  voyage.  Neptune  is 
there  indicating  distress  on  the  water  or  connected 
with  water.  Mercury  is  there  showing  trouble  con- 
nected with  traveling,  writing,  or  both.  Saturn  and 
Mars  are  there  to  make  the  trouble,  and  the  Moon 
entering  the  Sign  indicates  the  time.  The  scene  is 


TVo  3* 

A  RIVAL  TO  NO.  37 


142 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


laid  in  the  Sign  of  friends  among  strangers,  indicating 
rough  treatment  at  the  hands  of  friends  or  rough 
treatment  to  friends. 

No.  38,  his  rival,  shows  a  different  horoscope,  Nep- 
tune being  in  a  good  position,  standing  alone  with 
Jupiter  between  the  llth  and  12th  Signs;  it  shows 
gain  through  friends,  also  connected  with  the  water. 
The  Moon  passed  through  the  12th  Sign  under  good 
influences,  showing  a  profitable  trip  and  gain  through 
the  llth  and  12th  Signs.  The  Moon  however  passes 
into  his  1st  Sign  and  it  is  bad  for  women.  The  Moon 
is  entering  the  3rd  Sign  in  1913,  and  this  Sign  governs 


A  TITLED   EXPLORER 


TRAVELING 


143 


traveling  and  written  documents.  The  Sun  in  con- 
junction with  Mercury  and  Saturn  there  indicates 
that  he  is  distinguished  by  mysterious  writings.  Sat- 
urn governs  mystery. 

In  No.  39  we  present  the  horoscope  of  a  duke  who 
is  a  naval  officer  as  well  as  a  famous  explorer.  Mars 
in  his  3rd  Sign  leads  him  through  the  battle  field  in 
his  travels.  Mars  in  conjunction  with  Neptune  con- 
nects him  with  the  Navy,  although  the  Sun  not  be- 
ing in  the  conjunction,  he  may  be  more  famous  along 
some  other  line.  All  his  planets  are  in  the  1st  and 
3rd  Signs.  One  would  think  that  he  went  traveling 


LOST  IN  THE  SOUTH  SEAS 


144  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

to  escape  from  the  women.  His  1st  Sign  is  power- 
fully strong,  and  his  observation  will  be  unusually 
keen.  He  should  discover  many  wonderful  things  on 
his  voyages. 

We  see  nothing  to  indicate  how  far  north  any  of 
these  explorers  traveled.  The  Duke  we  believe  lays 
claim  to  having  traveled  nearly  as  close  to  the  pole  as 
No.  38,  and  No.  37  claims  to  have  located  it  as  nearly 
as  it  can  be  located.  One  question  puzzles  us;  it  is 
said  that  the  Earth  travels  around  the  Sun  at  the 
rate  of  nearly  20  miles  per  second,  and  it  travels  on 
its  axis  at  the  rate  of  about  20  miles  a  minute ;  when 
we  reach  the  poles,  however,  the  20  mile  a  minute 
speed  is  cancelled.  The  speed  is  lessened  as  you  ap- 
proach the  poles  until  when  you  reach  the  poles,  the 
earth  has  only  one  motion,  consisting  of  20  miles  a 
second  around  the  Sun.  It  seems  probable  that  this 
change  would  at  least  affect  the  atmosphere.  No  ab- 
normal conditions  or  peculiar  sensations  have  been 
recorded  thus  far,  unless  the  story  of  No.  40,  who 
lost  his  life  in  the  Antarctic,  reveals  something  of  the 
kind ;  his  bad  planets  are  in  the  12th  and  2nd,  show- 
ing scarcity  of  food  and  provisions  to  be  the  cause  of 
death.  Saturn  opposite  Saturn  would  lead  to  danger 
from  cold.  Neptune  governing  water  runs  a  conjunc- 
tion with  Mars  and  Saturn  in  the  12th  Sign  governing 
food.  Saturn  stands  opposite  in  the  Transits.  Ura- 
nus stands  in  the  2nd  both  in  Nativity  and  Transits. 
Such  a  scene  causes  one  to  feel  very  sad.  However, 
if  the  captain  and  his  brave  comrades  were  good 
men,  they  received  a  far  greater  welcome  at  their 
homecoming  than  England  ever  could  have  given 
them. 

"They  shall  hunger  no  more  neither  thirst  any 
more,  for  the  Lamb  which  is  in  the  midst  of  the  throne 
shall  feed  them,  and  shall  lead  them  unto  living  foun- 


TRAVELING 


145 


tains  of  waters  :  and  God  shall  wipe  away  all  tears 
from  their  eyes."  One  would  think  this  message  was 
written  for  just  such  a  case.  The  captain's  last 
thoughts  seem  to  have  been  of  his  men  and  his  fam- 
ily. This  is  the  sort  of  man  God  wrants  in  heaven  ac- 
cording to  the  test  given  in  Matt.  xxv. 

In  No.  41  we  find  a  man  who  even  in  this  age  of 
quick  transit  prefers  to  use  his  feet.  At  the  age  of 
70  years  he  walked  from  New  York  to  San  Francisco, 
the  distance  of  3,895  miles  in  104  days  and  7  hours, 
and  the  following  year  he  walked  from  Los  Angeles 
to  New  York,  a  distance  of  3,483  miles,  in  77  davs. 


JVo.  l+t. 
GREAT    PEDESTRIAN 


146 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


This  feat  is  without  parallel  in  the  annals  of  pedes- 
trianism.  Our  chart  shows  the  position  of  the  planets 
when  he  first  opened  up  his  remarkable  series  of  walk- 
ing stunts.  He  has  four  good  planets  in  the  12th 
Sign,  governing  the  feet,  the  Sun  included.  Persons 
Having  a  strong  12th  Sign  are  always  fond  of  walk- 
ing, driving,  or  horse-back  riding,  the  12th  Sign  be- 
ing connected  with  animals  and  the  feet;  the  12th  is 
also  connected  with  enemies ;  this  fact  accounts  for 
the  suffragist  hikes  that  have  puzzled  so  many.  A 
man  when  he  is  very  much  annoyed  will  rise  and  pace 
the  floor  or  start  in  to  boot  some  person.  A  child  will 


A   GREAT   AVIATOR 


TRAVELING 


147 


dance  on  the  floor  to  give  vent  to  its  outraged  feel- 
ings, but  the  women  quietly  take  a  hike  to  cool  off 
their  indignation.  They  should  be  respected  for  not 
adopting  a  more  disorderly  method  of  resentment. 
No.  41  at  70  years  of  age  has  Venus  leaving  the  12th, 
Mercury  leaving  the  4th,  and  the  Moon  entering  the 
3rd.  The  large  conjunction  around  the  Sun  in  the 
Transits  strikes  his  12th  Sign,  giving  a  strong  impe- 
tus to  the  walking  craze. 

No.  42  is  the  horoscope  of  a  man  who  represents 
the  latest  thing  in  traveling,  the  aeroplane.  It  is  said 
that  he  has  flown  more  miles  than  any  other  aviator 


ROUGH   SEA  PASSAGE 


148 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


in  the  world.  He  was  the  winner  of  the  first  aero- 
plane race  across  the  country  ever  held  in  America, 
the  flight  being  from  New  York  to  Philadelphia.  His 
famous  dip  over  Niagara  Falls,  under  the  great  in- 
ternational bridge,  and  through  the  gorge,  and  his 
record  breaking  climb  to  a  height  of  11,642  feet  at 
Chicago  are  regarded  as  the  last  word  in  spectacular 
stunts  with  an  aeroplane.  Neptune  and  Venus  in 
conjunction  between  the  3rd  and  4th  Signs  would  give 
him  success  in  his  stunts  around  the  Niagara  Falls. 
Uranus  governs  aeroplanes  and  Uranus  forming  one 
of  a  large  conjunction  in  the  2nd  or  money  Sign,  indi- 


PASSENGER  WITH   NO.  43 


TRAVELING  149 

cates  money  made  through  aeroplanes.  Saturn  and 
the  Sun  in  conjunction  in  the  llth  Sign  indicate  not- 
able deaths  among  friends. 

Planets  in  the  3rd  Sign  run  a  conjunction  with 
seven  planets  in  the  2nd  and  4th. 

Charts  No.  43  and  44  are  those  of  passengers  on  a 
steamer  which  encountered  a  very  rough  sea.  In  the 
first  chart  you  will  notice  Neptune  in  conjunction 
with  Uranus  and  Saturn  in  the  4th  Sign  and  the  Moon 
between  the  3rd  and  4th,  Mars  standing  opposite  in 
the  Transits.  The  Sun  and  Mars  and  the  conjunc- 
tions opposite  in  the  12th  represent  food  difficulties. 

The  second  chart  shows  Neptune  in  conjunction 
with  Saturn  between  the  12th  and  1st  Signs  and  Mars 
and  Uranus  in  conjunction  between  the  2nd  and  3rd 
Signs,  and  Mars,  Uranus  and  Neptune  opposite  in 
the  Transits.  We  find  however  that  Jupiter,  Venus 
and  Mercury  also  come  into  conjunction  with  the  bad 
planets.  These  we  believe  prevent  disaster.  A  brief 
account  of  the  trip  written  by  one  of  the  passengers 
is  here  given  in  verse. 

A  STORM   AT  SEA. 

The  good  boat  sailed  with  waters  calm,  and  skies  so  clear, 
The  murmur  of  a  wave  you'd  seldom  chance  to  hear; 
While  she  was  gently  gliding  on  the  ocean's  breast, 
The  weary  passengers  prepared  for   sleep   and   rest. 

But  oh  the  morn!     We  waken  long  before  'tis  light; 
A  heavy  rolling  sea  is  all  that  greets  our  sight; 
Our  heads  are  swimming,  hearts  are  sick, — no  sight  of  land; 
The  boat  doth  roll  and  plunge,  and  we  can   scarcely  stand. 
"We're  in  the  straits,"  said  one,  "when  we  get  out  to  sea, 
The  weather  will  be  fine;  the  waves  will  calmer  be." 
While  with  our  hands  we  held  our  seats  both  sure  and  fast, 
Afraid  that  every  dreadful  hour  might  be  our  last, 
A  mighty  wave  just   swept   the   creaking  boat  once   more, 


150  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

And  landed  us  into  the  middle  of  the  floor. 

The  cook  was  one  who  didn't  have  his  trials  to  make, 
For  ev'rything  spilled  that  would  spill,  and  ev'rything  broke 

that   would    break. 

The  dishes  on  the  table  then  were  hedged  about, 
And  we  were  served  with  food  we  could  not  live  without; 
At  last   starvation  won  the  day,   so  we  did  eat; 
One  hand  did  grasp  the  food,  the  other  held  the  seat. 

The  second  day  and  night,  a  strong  head  wind  was  ours, 
The  clouds  were  very  dark,  the   air  was  full  of  showers. 
The  gale,  like  some  dread  monster,  held  the  ship  at  bay: 
We   scarcely  made  a  knot   throughout  the  livelong  day. 
Then  spake  a  sturdy  man:  "I've  traveled  much  and  far, 
The  gates  of  every  land  have  stood  for  me  ajar; 
But  never  such  a  storm,  has  been  my  fate  to  see — 
"Twill  be  my  very  last  upon  an  angry  sea!" 

And  while  the  staunch  old  vessel  rolled  and  plunged  away, 
Refusing  still  the  captain's  orders  to  obey; 
The  surging  load  of  human  freight  found  peace  and  rest, 
In  such  a  manner  as  occasion  might  suggest. 
The  weary  mother  sought  to  comfort  oft  her  child 
With  thoughts  of  God  and  love,  till  heaven  almost  smiled, 
Through  such  a  dread  and  awful  night  as  that! 
The  tearful  maiden,  as  in  lonely  grief  she  sat, 
Afraid  to  yield  to  nature's  urgent  call  for  sleep, 
Oft  sung  in  accents  low,  "The  cradle  of  the  deep.,, 
The  faithful  husband's  fears  were  skillfully  concealed, 
The  loving  father  not  one  thought  of  self  revealed; 
While  wretched  woman  lay  in  berths  the  waves  had  washed. 
And   children  cried  for  decks  the  sea  had  lashed. 
And  yet,  amid  these  terrifying   scenes,  we  find 
A  group  of  reckless  men,  fair  sample  of  their  kind, 
Regarding  neither  devil,   God  nor  human  life, — 
With  tales  of  preachers  ghosts  and  stiffs,  the  air  was  rife; 
And  when  you  could  but  hear  the  rattle  of  their  bones, 
Another   interspersed    a    snatch   from    "Casey   Jones." 


TRAVELING  151 

Nor   berth,    nor    sleep,    we    sought   that    livelong    dreadful 

night; 

And  when  the  steward  appeared  at  early  morning  light,— 
"What's  here?"  quoth  he.  "A  life  preserver  don't  you  see;'1 
"Such  things  are  useless  in  a  sea  like  this,"  said  he. 

But  when  we  sought  the  deck  that  day,  to  know 
How  high  the  waves  did  rise,  how  strong  the  wind  did  blow, 
A  brighter  hope  than  heretofore  did  light  our  way; 
The  wind  had  changed;  we  plunged  ahead  the  livelong  day. 
We  lingered  long,  and  in  the  grandeur  of  the  scene, 
Forgot  the  angry  sea — the  terror  that  had  been. 
The  great  dark  waves,  like  hills,  would  rise  to  meet  the  sky, 
Then  splash,  and  roar,  and  suige,  and  foam  as  we  passed  by. 
And    oh,    the    blue    blue    waves!    and    oh,    the    white    white 

spray! 

The  softly  plumaged  birds,  that  ride  the  waves  alway;, 
The  ever  changing,  restless,  raging,  awful  sea! 
A  symbol  of  the  life  that  is,  and  glory  that's  to  be. 

The  great  blue  sky,  with  here  and  there  a  fleecy  cloud, 
Was  stretched  above;   the  kingly  sun,  so  grand  and  proud, 
Had  cast  a  gleam  of  radiance  on  the  distant  shore: — 
Perchance  some  kindly  watcher  heard  the  ocean's  roar, 
And  breathed   a  prayer  for  us,   as  we   were  passing  by; 
A   plunging,   heaving  mass,   against   a    stormy   sky! 

The  heav'ns  grew  dark,  then  streaked  with  gold  and  red; 
The  sun  did  hide  his  face,  the  clouds  great  tear  drops  shed. 
While  many  hearts  grew  faint,  and  hope  was   almost  gone, 
Our  gallant  boat,  ev'n  then,  plunged  on  and  on  and  on, 
Just  rocking  like  a  cradle,  heaving  through  the  main; 
While  oft  we  held  our  breath,  till  up  she  came  again. 

Once    more    the    clouds    disperse — the    sun    breaks    forth 

anew, 

As  if  to  take  a  peep  at  what  the  storm  might  do; — 
But  see!  another  dark  and  threatening  storm  doth  rise; 
Another  brightly  tinted  cloud  is  painted  in  the  skies; 
The  heav'ns  break,  and  in  the  sea,  a  shower  of  hail 


152  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

Doth  dot  the  water  white,  like  some  fair  ladies'  veil. 

How  wonderful!   we  ask  you   to   behold   the   scene; — 
The  surging,  white  capped  blue,  is  changed  to  emerald  green. 
But  oh!  a  boat  heaves  up  between  us  and  the  shore, — 
A  plunging  mass,  perhaps  five  miles  away  or  more: 
Like  some  great  frightened  steed,  she  rears  up  in  the  air, 
And  while  we  watch,  remains  a  few  short  moments  there;— 
Then  down  she  goes!  the  smoke  stack  all  that  we  can  see; 
God  pity  her!  T'were  better  on  the  land  to  be. 

And  yet  again,  the  glory  of  the  scene  did  change; 
The  water  turned  to  golden  brown,  with  beauty  strange: 
The  marvels  of  the  water,  beauty  of  the  sky, — 
Kaledioscopic  scenes  that  with   each  other  vie! 
The  grandeur  of  the  heavens,  wonders  of  the  sea, 
Forecasting  ev'n  the  glory  of  that  which  is  to  be, 
No  words  can  e'er  describe,  or  painters  brush  portray: — 
Sweet  compensation  these,  for  those  who  brave  the  day. 

At  last  tired  nature  claims  her  own, — we  fall  asleep; 
And  waking  all  is  still; — A  start  and  then  a  peep, — 
Oh  joy!  the  lights!  The  lights  are  those  of  Golden  Gate. 
We  pass  into  the  harbor. — All's  well,  but  two  days  late. 
Sea  never  seemed  so  calm,  sky  never  seemed  so  blue, 
Sun  never  shone  so  warm,  God  never  seemed  so  true, 
As  when  our  storm-tossed  souls  in  peace  and   safety  lay—- 
Our good  old  ship  at  rest  in  San  Francisco  Bay. 


GREAT  WRITERS  153 

CHAPTER  XII. 
Great  Writers. 

In  introducing  the  subject  of  literature,  we  do  not 
hesitate  to  express  the  opinion  that  the  Bible  takes 
first  rank ;  not  only  as  a  revelation  of  God's  will  to 
man,  but  as  a  great  literary  work.  There  are  sections 
in  the  Old  Testament,  where  we  would  prefer  to  see 
the  language  modernized;  and  there  are  little  .inac- 
curacies which  have  crept  into  it,  either  in  the  original 
manuscript  or  in  the  work  of  translation.  We  do  not, 
however,  agree  with  those  who  proclaim  the  ignor- 
ance of  the  Apostles.  True,  some  of  them  were  fish- 
ermen, and  yet  they  may  have  been  men  of  splendid 
mental  ability,  and  possessing  a  fair  degree  of  learn- 
ing; their  writings  do  not  savor  of-  ignorance.  In 
Matt.  xix:28,  we  are  told  that  at  the  last  day  they 
should  sit  upon  twelve  thrones,  judging  the  twelve 
tribes  of  Israel ;  this  will  surely  be  no  mean  position 
to  occupy.  It  has  always  seemed  a  matter  for  regret 
that  Christ  himself  did  not  leave  a  manuscript,  but 
he  seems  to  have  done  very  little  writing;  the  Apos- 
tles were  his  scribes. 

We  cannot  give  the  horoscopes  of  any  Bible  writ- 
ers, and  as  we  have  from  time  to  time  given  many  ex- 
tracts from  its  pages,  we  pass  on  to  consider  a  few 
of  the  great  names  of  the  nineteenth  century. 

There  are  all  sorts  of  styles  from  which  to  select. 
There  is  the  easy,  simple,  graceful,  lucid  style,  that 
we  all  enjoy  when  our  time  is  limited  for  reading. 
Then  there  is  the  deep,  philosophic,  mystical,  vision- 
ary style,  that  was  our  bugaboo  in  school  days.  You 
remember  in  the  literary  class  how  the  professor 
would  raise  his  eyes  so  as  to  peer  over  his  glasses, 
and  call  Miss  S — to  explain  what  was  meant  by  a  cer- 
tain passage;  then  he  would  ask  Mr.  M —  if  he  caught 


—10 


154  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

the  meaning  there;  and  after  wrenching  an  explana- 
tion of  some  sort  from  at  least  half  a  dozen  members 
of  the  class,  who  were  anxious  to  distinguish  them- 
selves, he  would  finally,  out  of  the  whole  muddle, 
formulate  a  conception  of  some  sort  which  he  volun- 
teered as  a  correct  interpretation  of  the  thought 
which  the  author  wished  to  convey.  In  our  opinion, 
time  is  too  precious,  and  brain  matter  too  expensive, 
to  be  wasted  after  any  such  fashion.  Then  there  is 
a  style  often  seen  in  poetry,  where  you  find  a  few 
beautiful  gems  in  a  rough  and  rugged  setting  like  an 
oasis  in  a  desert  or  a  patch  of  blue  sky  after  a  rain- 
storm ;  the  gem  glitters  more  beautifully  by  contrast 
with  its  surroundings. 

Sometimes,  during  excursions  among  book-shelves, 
we  see  a  long  row  of  books  entitled :  "Literary  Criti- 
cism", "The  Literary  Critic",  "Library  of  Criticism", 
etc. ;  some  of  them  beautifully  bound,  and  really  try- 
ing to  pose  as  works  of  art.  We  never  look  inside 
those  books.  The  man  who  wrote  them  should  have 
been  improving  his  talent  in  trying  to  place  some- 
thing of  merit  on  the  shelves  himself,  instead  of 
tearing  down  the  building  of  another;  trampling  laur- 
el wreaths  and  hard  earned  trophies  in  the  dust.  If 
he  thinks  a  book  is  not  good  let  him  write  a  better, 
and  let  the  great  amalgamation  of  brain  power 
throughout  the  world  decide  upon  its  merits.  Her- 
bert Spencer  on  hearing  his  father  praise  a  book  re- 
marked:  "I  could  write  a  better  book  on  the  subject 
myself",  and  he  gave  the  world  his  best.  Sometimes 
snarly  bits  of  criticism  are  found  in  ordinary  biogra- 
phy books,  although  many  are  beautifully  written  and 
worthy  of  the  highest  commendation.  We  recollect 
in  a  sketch  of  Sarah  Bernhardt  reading  something 
about  her  eccentricities.  This  sentence,  which  is  cop- 
ied word  for  word,  appeared:  "Among  her  other  ec- 
centricities she  once  got  married."  If  there  was  any- 


GREAT  WRITERS  155 

thing  eccentric  about  the  manner  in  which  she  was 
married  it  was  not  stated ;  the  case  was  not  explained. 
The  writer  then  went  on  to  mention  her  interest  in 
sculpture  and  art,  classing  them  as  eccentricities. 
Some  persons  naturally  have  such  jealous  natures 
that  they  cannot  see  anyone  above  them  without  try- 
ing to  pull  them  down.  He  who  builds  on  another's 
ruins  is  building  the  devil's  structure. 

Xow  a  few  words  on  newspapers.  If  we  were  look- 
ing around  for  a  place  where  we  could  live  a  quiet 
life,  and  yet  have  a  mighty  influence  in  the  world,  we 
would  qualify  for  newspaper  work.  Talk  about  min- 
isters ;  they  deliver  an  address  to  a  very  limited  num- 
ber once  or  twice  a  week,  while  the  newspaper  man 
has  his  fling  at  a  few  thousand  every  day.  If  he  can't 
mould  public  sentiment  it  is  not  the  fault  of  his  op- 
portunity, particularly  in  these  days  when  there  is 
so  much  excitement  in  the  air,  and  everyone  must 
read  the  newspaper.  His  opportunity  is  great  and  his 
responsibility  is  correspondingly  great.  The  daily 
paper  is  certainly  a  wonderful  commodity.  For  a 
penny  you  can  get  the  news  from  every  part  of  the 
world,  and  if  there  is  any  part  of  the  world  you  don't 
hear  from,  you  know  that  nothing  important  took 
place  in  that  locality.  We  might  write  for  hours 
upon  the  wonders  of  the  newspaper,  and  the  mighty 
influence  which  it  is  privileged  to  wield,  but  space 
will  not  permit.  Newspaper  men  are  very  clever. 
They  can  dispose  of  almost  any  question  that  arises 
in  a  satisfactory  manner,  and  make  mince  meat  of 
their  opponents  on  the  shortest  notice.  Editorials  are 
written  while  you  wait,  and  news  is  carted  out  whole- 
sale ;  we  cannot  wonder  if  it  is  not  always  accurate. 
The  newspaper  is  also  a  great  advertiser.  When  you 
slide  from  the  path  of  rectitude,  and  trouble  overtakes 
you,  it  joyfully  spreads  the  news  far  and  wide  by 


156 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


special  dispatch,  and  never  charges  you  a  cent.  Some- 
times we  hate  it  and  yet  we  cannot  live  without  it. 

Chart  No.  45  gives  you  the  author  of  "Treasure 
Island,"  novelist  and  poet.  His  mother  was  gifted 
with  the  pen  and  his  father  was  a  lighthouse  builder. 
Each  of  these  come  under  the  3rd  Sign  hence  the  writ- 
ing talent  inherited  by  the  son.  Uranus  and  Saturn 
in  the  12th  Sign  subjected  him  to  chest  trouble  all  his 
life,  and  also  caused  him  to  write  in  a  weird  gloomy 
and  pathetic  strain.  Good  planets  appearing  in  the 
3rd  and  4th  gave  him  his  beautiful  home  in  the  Sam- 
oan  Islands.  He  seems  to  have  been  happily  married 


J\fo.  L+  $ 
POET  AND   NOVELIST 


GREAT  WRITERS  157 

although  Uranus,  Saturn  and  Mars  guard  the  1st 
Sign;  ill  health  took  the  place  of  marriage  affliction. 
His  first  trip  to  America  was  made  while  the  Moon 
was  in  his  bad  12th  Sign  and  his  death  occurred  when 
the  Moon  came  to  the  12th  again.  He  died  very  sud- 
denly while  planning  a  lecture  tour  in  America;  he 
was  talking  gaily  with  his  wife  when  he  threw  his 
hands  to  his  head  and  dropped  dead.  His  death  re- 
minds us  of  the  story  of  a  man  who  was  a  Christian 
and  yet  was  never  heard  to  pray.  Every  night  he  read 
the  Bible  and  gave  utterance  to  the  words,  ''Good 
night,  Lord  Jesus,  good  night."  This  great  novelist 
and  poet  had  traveled  on  intimate  terms  with  death 
all  his  life  and  he  only  required  to  say,  Good  night, 
O  death,  good  night.  His  death  scenes  are  among  his 
greatest  masterpieces.  His  rural  descriptions  eman- 
ating from  the  3rd  and  4th  and  his  poems  to  children 
emanating  from  the  llth  Sign,  take  on  a  more  cheer- 
ful form  governed  by  good  planets  in  these  Signs. 

In  No.  46  the  author  of  the  "Bonnie  Brier  Bush," 
we  have  an  eminent  clergyman  and  writer  born  ten 
days  earlier  than  No.  45  ;  for  this  reason  a  striking 
resemblance  between  the  two  horoscopes  is  observed. 
No.  46  also  suffered  from  chest  troubles  coming  under 
the  12th  and  he  excelled  in  pathetic  scenes.  A  com- 
parison of  the  lives  of  these  two  men  would  prove 
very  interesting,  but  space  will  not  permit.  Like  all 
other  novelists  they  select  their  characters  from  those 
with  whom  they  come  in  contact.  Apart  from  the 
characters  introduced  their  writings  are  very  similar 
particularly  where  they  both  use  the  Scotch  dialect. 
No.  46  was  very  fond  of  animals,  many  touching  ref- 
erences being  made  to  those  in  his  writings.  He  was 
also  very  much  attached  to  uncles  and  aunts  who  were 
removed  by  premature  death ;  grief  of  this  nature 
arises  from  a  bad  12th  Sign ;  so  also  does  the  interest 


158 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


which  he  manifested  in  the  Boer  War.  He  delivered 
lectures  upon  the  subject  and  received  many  letters  of 
which  he  said :  "About  half  the  people  seem  to  think 
I  am  a  prophet  and  the  other  half  an  ass.  From  this 
I  would  infer  that  I  am  in  de  middle  ob  de  road."  In 
Great  Britain  256,000  copies  of  "Beside  the  Bonnie 
Brier  Bush"  were  sold  and  in  America  484,000  and  it 
is  said  that  not  a  single  unfavorable  review  has  been 
traced.  This  may  be  accounted  for  by  the  fact  that 
Mercury  and  the  Sun  stand  between  the  3rd  and  4th 
Signs,  and  no  evil  planets  enter  into  the  conjunction. 
Any  book  could  be  criticised  but  his  horoscope  did  not 
draw  criticism. 


CLERGYMAN    AND    WRITER 


GREAT  WRITERS 


159 


Xo.  47  the  author  of  "Columbus"  and  many  other 
beautiful  poems  is  a  writer  who  had  a  very  romantic 
career.  At  one  time  he  is  adopted  by  a  tribe  of  Indi- 
ans, and  taking  an  active  part  in  their  savage  raids ; 
and  at  another  he  is  feasted  and  flattered  by  royalty 
itself.  The  Moon  in  conjunction  with  Mars  and  Ur- 
anus in  the  llth  and  12th  Signs  leads  him  to  camp 
with  the  Indians  and  to  visit  Mexico  where  he  joined 
a  filibustering  expedition.  The  Moon  in  the  3rd  and 
4th  with  5  good  planets  to  1  bad  draws  success ;  while 
under  the  benign  influence  of  these  planets  he  becomes 
lawyer,  judge,  editor  and  poet.  His  horoscope  works 


A  WESTERN    POET 


160  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

like  a  see-saw  up  in  the  3rd  and  4th  Signs  and  down 
in  the  llth  and  12th.  Nothing  but  disappointment 
hovers  over  his  children  Sign.  When  ill  health  takes 
the  place  of  trouble  to  children,  his  daughter  comes 
to  care  for  him  in  his  last  illness.  His  12th  Sign  indi- 
cates wild  animals  and  the  following  lines  emanate 
from  it. 

''This  mad  sea  shows  its  teeth  to-night; 
He  curls  his  lips,  he  lies  in  wait, 
With  lifted  teeth  as  if  to  bite." 

His  passionate  love  for  the  beautiful  in  natural 
scenery  emanates  from  the  3rd  and  4th  Signs  and  is 
illustrated  by  the  following  lines. 

"Be  this  my  home  till  some  fair  star, 

Stoops  earthward  and  shall  beckon  me ; 

For  surely  God-land  lies  not  far 

From  these   Greek  heights  and  this  great  sea." 

Uranus  and  Mars  in  the  llth,  the  Sign  of  friends 
leads  him  to  take  a  deep  interest  in  the  unfortunate 
ones  of  the  earth.  The  following  lines  are  evidence 
on  this  point. 

"In  men  whom  men  condemn  as  ill, 

I  find  so  much  of  goodness  still, 

In  men  whom  men  pronounce  divine 

I  find  so  much  of  sin  and  blot, 

I  hesitate  to  draw  the  line 

Between  the  two  where  God  has  not." 

A  little  story  told  of  this  poet  illustrates  in  a  strik- 
ing manner  the  influence  of  the  12  Sign.  While  vis- 
iting at  the  home  of  a  lady  in  England  his  hostess 
after  a  prolonged  search  found  him  rolled  in  a  rug 
skin  upon  the  floor.  "Where  have  you  been?"  said 
she.  "In  hell,  madam,"  was  the  reply.  The  moon  in 
his  12th  Sign  with  Mars  and  Uranus  led  him  to  throw 


GREAT  WRITERS  161 

himself  on  the  floor  and  roll  up  in  the  skin  of  an  ani- 
mal. It  may  be  that  hell  comes  under  the  12th;  a 
huge  amount  of  misery  emanates  from  it  that  is  cer- 
tain. Physicians  say  that  melancholia  comes  from 
liver  derangement  and  impaired  digestion,  and  the 
12th  Sign  governs  the  stomach  and  liver,  so  that  we 
have  a  combination  of  the  12th  Sign  afflictions ;  wild 
animals,  the  floor,  melancholia,  and  it  may  be  hell. 
The  Sun,  Mercury  and  Neptune  in  the  4th  not  only 
gave  him  a  wonderful  poetic  instinct  but  gave  him 
his  beautiful  home  by  the  sea  as  well.  Jupiter  we 
think  stands  for  mountains,  Saturn  for  the  earth, 
Venus  for  flowers  and  decorative  features,  the  Sun  for 
light  and  warmth,  Mercury  for  birds,  boats,  and  trav- 
eling, and  Neptune  for  the  water.  Here  we  have  the 
scene  complete.  Uranus  and  Mars  are  between  the 
llth  and  12th  Signs  and  affect  both  equally. 

No.  48  is  a  great  English  scientific  writer  who  in- 
herited philosophic  language  and  ideas  from  his  father 
and  uncle  who  educated  him.  This  style  of  language 
became  as  familiar  to  him  during  his  childhood  days 
as  the  language  of  the  street  does  to  most  boys  of 
to-day.  He  also  had  12th  Sign  troubles.  When  a 
boy  he  was  sent  to  his  uncle  to  be  educated  and  he 
became  so  homesick,  that  he  started  for  home  on  foot 
walking  47  miles  a  day  with  very  little  food,  and 
being  too  tired  to  sleep.  Finally  a  driver  took  pity 
on  him,  but  to  add  to  his  troubles  his  parents  were 
angry  when  he  reached  home.  His  father  however 
allowed  him  to  remain  for  a  time  before  sending  him 
back.  A  combination  of  12th  Sign  trials  are  found 
here;  traveling  on  foot,  hunger,  and  enemies. 

Some  of  our  poor  little  boys  think  that  those  who 
have  rich  parents  don't  "have  any  troubles  but  such  is 
not  the  case.  The  poor  woman  weeps  because  she 
must  give  her  children  out  to  be  cared  for,  while  she 


162 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


earns  the  daily  bread,  and  the  wealthy  mother  bun- 
dles her  children  up  bag"  and  baggage  and  sends  them 
off  to  be  educated  where  she  may  not  see  them  for 
months.  The  poor  man  comes  home  from  work  foot- 
sore lame  and  weary,  and  the  rich  man  goes  off  on 
a  hunting,  fishing,  or  exploring  trip  and  comes  home 
the  same  way.  Such  is  life.  A  strong  llth  Sign  in  No. 
48  is  responsible  for  his  dealing  so  much  with  geneal- 
ogies and  kindred  topics. 

No.  49  is  a  clever  American  writer  who  contributes 
largely  to  magazines  and  periodicals.  He  frequently 
writes  in  an  epigrammatic  style  and  this  may  be  laid 


AN    ENGLISH    SCIENTIST 


GREAT  WRITERS 


163 


to  the  fact  that  his  3rd  Sign  is  unusually  strong  and 
his  4th  weak.  The  4th  is  the  constructive  Sign  and 
leads  to  building  long  sentences,  also  to  writing  po- 
etry. If  the  4th  Sign  were  stronger  he  would  also  be 
more  inclined  to  build  books.  As  it  is  he  scatters  his 
work  broadcast  as  he  writes. 

His  2nd  and  3rd  Signs  remind  us  of  a  story  we  once 
heard.  A  boy  was  told  by  his  mother  to  keep  away 
from  the  berry  patch,  but  he  disobeyed  her  and  in  re- 
turn received  a  good  lecture.  Why  didn't  you  say 
"Get  thee  behind  me  Satan,"  asked  the  mother.  "I 
did,"  replied  the  boy,  "and  he  pushed  me  right  into  the 
berry  patch." 


!\fo-  Zf  9- 
AX   AMERICAN   JOURNALIST 


164 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


Planets  behind  a  Sign  always  work  more  strongly 
than  those  ahead  of  it,  and  the  3rd  Sign  in  No.  49  has 
a  good  backing.  We  imagine  it  would  be  much  easi- 
er for  him  to  write  than  to  refrain  from  writing;  his 
work  should  also  be  a  financial  success.  His  disser- 
tation on  Beethoven  is  a  very  fine  selection.  Here  he 
deals  with  the  relation  between  great  genius  and 
great  suffering.  From  an  astrological  standpoint 
there  are  several  reasons  for  the  fact  to  which  he  calls 
attention.  In  the  first  place  persons  who  sway  hu- 
manity must  have  a  powerful  emotional  nature,  and 
this  renders  them  especially  sensitive.  In  the  second 
place  the  good  planets  are  frequently  centered  around 


A    GREAT    HUMORIST 


GREAT  WRITERS 


165 


one  point,  leaving  the  evil  planets  to  stand  alone  at 
some  other  point.  When  the  Moon  strikes  the  good 
planets  great  success  follows,  and  when  the  Moon 
strikes  the  evil  planets,  suffering  arid  sorrow  are  cor- 
respondingly heavy.  In  the  third  place  many  planets 
changing  in  a  horoscope  cause  it  to  work  very  strong- 
ly, producing  great  genius  and  causing  great  suffer- 
ing as  well. 

Xo.  50  is  the  author  of  "Tom  Sawyer"  and  "Huckle- 
berry Finn;"  his  3rd  Sign  is  also  very  strong.  Mer- 
cury and  Venus  form  a  conjunction  in  his  5th  and 
llth  giving  him  success  in  appearing  before  public 
audiences,  and  in  writing  for  children.  He  is  the 


RUSSIAN   WRITER   AND   REFORMER 


166 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


boys'  favorite.  The  material  for  the  stories  men- 
tioned was  gathered  from  actual  experience  while  the 
author  traveled  as  pilot-boy  on  the  Mississippi  river. 
He  is  a  man  who  had  a  large  funny  bump  and  saw  the 
humorous  side  to  every  question,  besides  he  had  no 
strong  12th  Sign  to  give  a  melancholy  tinge  to  his 
writing.  He  was  also  a  gifted  lecturer  and  a  man 
who  evinced  an  interest  in  every  public  movement  for 
the  betterment  of  humanity. 

No.  51,  a  famous  Russian  writer  and  reformer, 
shows  a  very  different  horoscope  from  No.  50,  whose 
writings  were  largely  connected  with  traveling.  The 
strong  12th  Sign  in  No.  51  connects  his  wrritings  with 


BLIND  HYMN  WRITER 


CxREAT  WRITERS  167 

war,  political  war,  civil  war,  and  religious  war.  Plan- 
ets in  the  1st  and  llth  Signs  run  a  conjunction  with  a 
strong  12th  and  this  leads  him  to  give  some  attention 
to  the  question  of  education ;  it  also  throws  a  spice  of 
love  into  his  writings.  He  opened  up  his  career  as 
a  soldier  while  the  Moon  was  in  his  strong  12th,  but 
Venus  and  Mercury  forming  a  conjunction  in  the  3rd 
Sign  led  him  to  adopt  literature  as  a  profession.  Later 
in  life  when  the  Moon  passed  through  his  12th  Sign, 
he  feared  he  was  about  to  die  and  deeded  all  his 
property  to  his  family,  but  he  lived  for  many  years 
afterwards.  As  another  result  of  his  strong  enemy 
Sign,  he  was  excommunicated  from  the  church  'in  his 
old  age.  He  is  a  fearless  writer  and  one  who  is  read 
throughout  the  world.  Three  good  planets  between 
the  3rd  and  4th  draw  very  strongly  in  land. 

No.  52  is  a  blind  hymn-writer  who  has  reached  the 
venerable  age  of  93  years,  and  who  still  finds  life 
sweet.  Although  blind  all  her  life  she  has  shed  the 
light  of  peace,  love,  and  happiness  around  many 
troubled  souls.  It  is  said  that  she  is  the  author  of 
6000  hymns.  "Safe  in  the  Arms  of  Jesus",  Rescue 
the  Perishing",  and  "Only  a  Beam  of  Sunshine",  are 
among  her  most  popular.  Many  who  sing  the  latter 
are  not  aware  that  it  was  written  by  one  who  never 
saw  the  light  of  the  sun.  The  influence  of  her  leading 
Sign,  the  llth,  runs  strongly  through  all  her  poetry. 
It  shows  the  sweet  trustfulness  of  the  child,  and  a 
tender  heart  toward  humanity.  She  taught  in  a  blind 
school  and  was  also  married.  Although  Saturn  ap- 
pears in  her  1st  Sign  she  probably  married  happily, 
as  physical  trouoie  coming  under  the  1st  would  take 
the  place  of  marriage  trials.  Chart  52  shows  the  po- 
sition of  the  planets  when  she  became  blind.  Saturn 
occupies  the  part  of  the  Sign  governing  the  eyes,  and 
opposite  to  it  stand  Mars  and  Saturn  in  the  Transits. 
No  good  planets  appear  in  'the  conjunction. 


168 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


No.  53  is  a  singer  and  hymn-writer  who  was  as- 
sociated with  D.  L.  Moody  in  evangelistic  work.  He 
is  best  known  by  such  hymns  as  "Hold  the  Fort  for 
I  am  Coming",  and  "Pull  for  the  Shore."  The  former 
was  written  at  the  time  this  famous  message  was  sig- 
naled by  W.  T.  Sherman.  Saturn,  Mercury,  Mars, 
and  the  Moon  appear  in  the  12th  Sign ;  Mars  stands 
for  war,  Saturn  for  imprisonment  or  blockade,  and 
Mercury  for  messages.  The  writer  served  in  the  army 
for  a  short  time  in  his  younger  days.  "Pull  for  the 
Shore"  originates  in  the  2nd  and  3rd  Signs  where 
Uranus,  Neptune,  and  the  Sun  form  a  conjunction. 
Neptune  stands  for  water,  Uranus  for  falling,  and  the 


SINGER    WHO    PERISHED    IN    A    DISASTER 


GREAT  WRITERS 


169 


Sun  for  distinction.  Here  the  death  of  the  writer  is 
vividly  portrayed,  and  Chart  53  illustrates  his  death 
as  his  train  crashed  through  a  bridge  and  was  plunged 
into  the  water.  Uranus  and  Saturn  stand  opposite 
in  the  Transits  and  the  Moon  is  coming  into  his  1st 
Sign. 

Closely  associated  with  his  name  is  the  writer  of 
"Ninety  and  Nine"  and  "When  the  Mists  Have  Rolled 
Away."  No.  54  is  taken  at  the  time  No  53  met 
with  his  death,  and  the  Moon  appears  in  the  llth 
Sign  with  Saturn,  Mars,  and  the  Sun,  indicating  death 
to  friends  in  a  tragic  manner.  Neptune,  Mars,  and 
the  Sun  in  the  12th  give  rise  to  his  famous  hymn 


HYMN  WRITER  AND  SINGER 


—10 


170 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


"The  Ninety  and  Nine."  '  Mars  stands  for  wild  ani- 
mals, and  Neptune  and  the  Sun  for  domestic  animals. 
There  is  also  a  reference  to  water  in  this  beautiful 
hymn.  "When  the  Mists  Have  Rolled  Away"  indi- 
cates a  misunderstanding  with  some  friend,  arising 
from  Mars  and  Saturn  in  the  llth  Sign.  In  this  chart 
eight  out  of  nine  planets  are  changing ;  his  wonderful 
success  in  his  chosen  calling  may  be  attributed  to  this 
fact. 

No.  55  is  a  very  accomplished  lady  who  although 
blind  and  deaf  has  written  a  story  of  her  life.  This 
chart  is  taken  at  the  age  of  19  months,  when  she  be- 
came deaf  and  blind.  Mars  and  Uranus  between  the 


ACCOMPLISHED,  THOUGH  DEAF  AND  BLIND. 


GREAT  WRITERS  171 

2nd  and  3rd  Signs,  with  Uranus  in  the  Transits, 
caused  this  affliction.  Had  the  Moon  not  entered  the 
3rd  Sign  for  a  number  of  years,  Uranus  in  the  Tran- 
sits would  have  moved  away  from  Uranus  in  the  Na- 
tivity, and  the  danger  would  have  been  greatly  les- 
sened. In  1913  Venus  and  Mercury  are  forming  a 
conjunction  in  her  2nd  Sign  with  the  Sun  and  she 
should  draw  money  through  writing.  Mercury  will 
pass  Venus  between  the  2nd  and  3rd  Signs,  and  this 
should  cause  her  to  forget  about  the  incident  of  the 
"Frost  Fairies."  It  is  quite  possible  that  she  and 
Miss  Canby  might  have  written  the  stories  as  they  ap- 
peared without  either  one  having  been  acquainted 
with  the  work  of  the  other,  particularly  if  their  horo- 
scopes were  similar.  We  have  not  secured  Miss  Can- 
by's  but  their  charts  might  be  similar  although  they 
were  born  a  number  of  years  apart.  No.  55  should  be 
encouraged  in  every  way  to  utilize  her  writing  talent ; 
she  should  write  either  poetry  or  fiction  well.  We  be- 
lieve that  all  writing,  music,  painting,  oratory,  etc. 
is  a  gift  from  the  unseen,  not  only  the  talent  but  the 
theme  itself  in  all  its  details.  It  is  said  that  Ludwig 
Beethoven  composed  his  best  music  after  his  hearing 
had  left  him,  and  on  one  occasion  while  he  was  lead- 
ing the  orchestra  the  performance  was  greeted  by 
such  a  storm  of  applause  that  police  officers  were 
called  in  to  quiet  the  crowd.  Beethoven  stood  with 
his  back  to  the  audience,  oblivious  of  what  was  taking 
place,  until  someone  motioned  to  him  to  turn  around. 
Without  some  power  behind  him  a  deaf  man  would 
be  helpless  in  leading  an  orchestra ;  the  accomplish- 
ments of  No.  55  are  quite  as  wonderful.  It  is  quite 
possible  that  those  who  are  shut  off  from  the  world 
in  a  measure  by  the  loss  of  their  senses  develop  super- 
natural powers,  by  coming  into  closer  touch  with  the 
unseen  than  would  otherwise  be  possible  for  them  to 
do.  Helen  Keller  says,  "Our  world  lies  upward ;  the 


172  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

length  and  breadth  and  sweep  of  the  heavens  are 
ours."  This  can  truly  be  said  of  the  blind  Milton, 
who  brought  the  heavens  down  to  our  very  feet. 


CHAPTER  XIII. 
Actresses. 

A  certain  type  of  horoscope  and  certain  physical 
qualifications  are  required  for  the  successful  actress. 
The  physical  make-up  we  regard  as  coming  by  way  of 
heredity,  as  some  of  the  prettiest  faces  we  have  seen 
belong  to  girls  who  have  naught  but  bad  planets  in 
their  1st  and  2nd  Signs,  governing  the  face.  If  bad 
planets  in  the  1st  Sign  develop  disease,  they  may  mar 
the  beauty  of  the  face,  or  good  planets  may  enable  the 
subject  to  dress  becomingly  and  thus  enhance  the 
beauty  of  the  face,  but  beauty  is  primarily  a  matter 
of  birth. 

If  an  actress  is  fitted  for  her  position  she  knows  it 
as  soon  as  she  appears  upon  the  stage;  her  audience 
will  be  likely  to  know  it  too.  Here  is  the  experience 
of  one  of  our  leading  actresses  who  had  tried  various 
vocations :  "The  very  first  night  I  knew  that  acting 
was  the  art  for  me.  It  seemed  as  if  I  had  come  home 
after  being  away  a  long  time.  I  felt  that  I  had  come 
into  my  own."  After  the  first  night's  performance  she 
took  a  position  as  leading  lady,  and  held  it.  The. 
same  may  be  said  of  every  profession,  if  it  is  that  for 
which  we  are  especially  fitted  we  should  feel  at  home 
in  it  from  the  first.  The  most  essential  point  in  the 
horoscope  of  an  actress,  singer,  or  any  one  who  is  to 
appear  before  the  public  is  a  strong  llth  Sign.  The 
llth  Sign  governs  friends  among  strangers,  and  if  it 
is  strong  we  will  appear  at  our  best  before  them,  and 
be  happy  and  at  home  among  them. 


ACTRESSES  173 

Did  you  ever  go  to  spend  the  evening  at  the  home 
of  a  friend  where  the  lady  met  you  at  the  door  and 
was  so  delighted  to  see  you, — she  was  just  wishing 
for  some  one  to  come  in — didn't  know  how  she  was 
going  to  pass  the  evening  in  the  monotony  of  home 
life?  Her  husband,  however,  feels  quite  the  reverse; 
he  was  planning  to  spend  the  evening  at  home  with 
his  family  or  his  books,  and  regards  the  visitor  as  an 
intruder;  he  withdraws  to  a  quiet  corner  until  he 
overcomes  his  disappointment,  and  then  with  a  strug- 
gle proceeds  to  the  reception  room  to  entertain  the 
unwelcome  company.  She  has  a  strong  llth  Sign 
while  her  husband  has  not.  Couples  frequently  mate 
this  way;  opposites  attract,  and  one  who  is  very  fond 
of  society  is  liable  to  get  a  person  who  is  of  a  retiring 
nature.  It  is  absolutely  necessary  however  that  an 
actress,  or  anyone  desiring  to  make  a  success  of  the 
stage,  should  have  this  delighted  to  see  you  feeling. 

A  person  with  a  retiring  disposition  makes  a  close 
student  and  deep  thinker;  he  may  become  a  great 
writer,  painter,  sculptor,  scientist,  or  inventor,  but 
should  shun  the  public  platform. 

The  llth  Sign  governs  the  heart,  and  when  it  is 
strong  produces  a  highly  emotional  nature,  particular- 
ly if  coupled  with  a  strong  1st  Sign.  These  are  the 
leading  Signs  in  the  horoscope  of  a  successful  actor 
or  actress.  The  5th  and  llth  Signs  also  govern  chil- 
dren, of  which  actresses  are  usually  very  fond.  Ethel 
Barrymore,  who  has  two  children  of  her  own,  knows 
nothing  on  earth  comparable  to  the  joys  of  mother- 
hood ;  she  even  hints  that  all  American  women  should 
feel  as  she  does  on  the  subject,  but  Ethel  Barrymore 
must  remember  that  all  American  women  have  not 
her  horoscope,  and  could  not  all  appreciate  children 
as  she  does,  neither  might  they  be  so  successful  with 
them. 


174  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

The  1st  and  llth  Signs  running  strong  as  we  have 
said  before  give  a  highly  emotional  nature,  great  fond- 
ness for  the  opposite  sex  and  great  power  over  them 
as  well.  Actresses  of  the  present  day  are  waking  up 
to  a  realization  of  their  powers  along  that  line,  and  as 
a  result  they  are  no  longer  satisfied  with  anything 
less  than  the  capture  of  a  multimillionaire.  In  many 
cases,  however,  their  love  affairs  do  not  terminate 
happily,  many  of  them  do  not  terminate  in  marriage 
at  all.  Those  who  have  a  strong  marriage  Sign  usu- 
ally have  one  or  more  bad  planets  in  it.  We  have 
heard  it  asserted  by  more  than  one  person  in  a  posi- 
tion to  know  something  of  the  question,  that  an  ac- 
tress could  not  be  found  who  was  strictly  moral,  and 
that  many  of  them  developed  into  monsters  of  im- 
morality. We  would  be  sorry  to  believe  such  an  as- 
sertion, but  one  thing  is  certain ;  their  temptations 
are  far  greater  than  those  of  the  average  man  or 
woman  for  various  reasons,  the  principal  being  the 
location  of  the  planets  in  their  horoscopes.  The  1st 
and  llth  are  the  Signs  which  tend  toward  love-mak- 
ing, and  you  will  notice  that  they  are  strong  in  the 
charts  which  will  be  presented. 

Chart  No.  56  represents  one  of  the  world's  greatest 
actresses,  now  70  years  of  age.  Taken  at  birth  she 
gives  us  these  two  Signs  almost  equally  strong,  all 
the  planets  at  that  time  being  placed  in  the  1st  and 
llth  Signs.  Venus  passes  through  the  12th  and  1st 
Signs.  In  1913  it  leaves  the  2nd  Sign  and  Mercury  is 
in  the  llth.  Mercury  has  passed  nearly  twice  around 
her  horoscope,  so  you  will  see  that 'Mercury  is  the 
only  planet  to  leave  the  conjunction  during  her  life 
time;  Venus  is  only  leaving  the  2nd  in  1913._We  con- 
sider this  the  strongest  possible  position  for  an  emo- 
tional actress.  A  strong  1st  Sign  not  only  gives 
depth  of  feeling,  but  it  imparts  the  power  to  grasp 


ACTRESSES 


175 


great  thoughts,  and  to  assume  for  the  time  being  the 
tumultuous  passions  of  another  man's  soul,  and  to 
interpret  these  in-  such  a  manner  as  to  strike  deep  in- 
to the  heart  and  intellect  of  the  hearers.  A  strong  llth 
Sign  brings  her  into  rapport  with  her  audience,  and 
insures  for  her  that  appreciation  which  is  essential  to 
success.  Even  at  seventy  years  of  age  this  remark- 
able woman  cannot  be  robbed  of  the  glory  due  her. 
Planetary  conditions  are  coupled  with  a  remarkable 
physique.  She  still  plays  every  day,  and  this  shows 
that  acting  is  a  real  craze  with  her.  Any  profession 
to  become  a  great  success  must  assume  the  form  of 
a  mania  with  the  subject;  she  must  become  buried  in 


WORLD'S    GREATEST    ACTRESS 


176 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


it  to  such  an  extent  that  nothing  can  take  its  place. 

Mile.  Genee,  the  famous  dancer,  tells  us  that. unless 
we  are  willing  to  sacrifice  everything  else  in  order  to 
perfect  the  art  of  dancing  it  would  be  better  not  to 
begin.  She  says  in  part:  "I  went  to  live  with  my 
uncle  and  aunt,  who  were  Danish  dancers,  when  I 
was  eight  years  old,  and  I  was  immediately  placed  in 
the  school.  We  had  dancing  all  day  long,  and  talked 
it  at  our  meals."  Genee  is  also  said  to  be  a  delightful 
comedian,  but  this  talent  she  subdues  to  what  she 
considers  to  be  her  own  peculiar  art,  that  of  dancing. 
If  you  would  reach  the  top  of  the  ladder  you  must 
decide  upon  your  one  special  talent  and  subduing  all 


FAMOUS  ON  THE  STAGE 


ACTRESSES 


177 


minor  talents  press  on.  There  is  always  room  at  the 
top.  We  have  not  secured  Genee's  birthdate,  but  you 
will  notice  a  strong  12th  Sign  combination,  uncles 
and  aunts,  eating  and  dancing. 

In  No.  57  we  have  another  actress  with  a  chart 
nearly  as  strong  as  the  first.  Her  career  was  opened 
up  at  eight  years  of  age  and  she  was  married  at  six- 
teen, so  you  see  her  talents  and  natural  propensities 
came  with  her  birth.  One  planet  stands  between  the 
2nd  and  3rd  Signs. 

No.  58  which  follows  also  shows  one  planet  be- 
tween the  2nd  and  3rd  Signs  and  the  balance  in  the 


ACTRESS  AND   WRITER 


178 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


1st  and  llth  Signs.  She  developed  writing  talent, 
and  when  she  had  married  and  retired  from  the  stage 
she  published  several  books. 

No.  59  shows  a  very  strong  llth  Sign,  but  is  not  so 
strong  in  the  1st.  She  made  many  warm  friends  and 
was  very  much  admired,  but  did  not  draw  so  many 
love  affairs  as  is  the  common  lot  of  actresses.  Jupiter 
draws  money,  and  in  conjunction  with  Saturn  devel- 
ops special  writing  talent  under  the  3rd  Sign.  Early 
in  life  Mars  passed  the  Sun  between  the  10th  and  llth 
Signs ;  Saturn  guards  the  entrance  to  the  4th,  and 
these  bring  loss  by  fire  and  war.  Her  home  was 


A  GREAT  POLISH  ACTRESS 


ACTRESSES 


179 


burned  when  she  was  but  a  little  girl,  and  later  on 
she  grieved  very  much  over  the  Polish  wars  which 
caused  great  distress  in  her  native  country. 

In  No.  60  we  present  an  actor  on  the  date  of  his 
fifth  marriage ;  Saturn,  Mars,  and  the  Sun  govern  his 
marriage  Sign;  Mercury  is  in  the  1st  Sign  at  present; 
and  Uranus  and  Venus  govern  the  llth.  The  Tran- 
sits are  running  strong  on  these  two  Signs,  the  Moon 
being  in  the  1st  and  the  Earth  in  the  llth.  The  Moon 
in  the  Nativity  is  leaving  the  2nd  Sign  with  Mars  in 
the  Transits — hence  he  tells  us  that  he  is  bestowing 
all  his  worldly  goods  upon  his  wife,  and  giving  her 


A  NOTED  ACTOR 


180  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

an  interest  in  all  his  business.  It  seems  incredible 
that  a  man  who  has  made  four  failures  in  matrimony 
should  still  place  sufficient  confidence  in  the  relation- 
ship to  warrant  his  staking  all  his  business  interests 
in  it.  It  is  a  sad  day  when  hope  dies  out  in  the  hu- 
man heart,  however.  It  is  the  day  of  the  suicide. 
This  actor  developed  talent  very  early  in  life.  His 
face  in  youth  shows  the  faculty  of  imitation  very 
strongly  marked.  He  also  shows  very  keen  percep- 
tives;  nothing  would  escape  his  eye. 

It  was  reported  that  another  comedian  was  mar- 
ried to  his  fifth  wife  on  the  same  day.  It  is  worthy  of 
note  that  these  two  were  born  near  the  same  time. 
We  have  not  secured  the  exact  birthdate  of  the  lat- 
ter, so  that  we  cannot  compare  them.  They  may  have 
been  born  six  months  or  a  year  apart,  and  if  so  would 
come  under  the  same  Sign,  and  the  permanent  plan- 
ets would  occupy  the  same  position. 


MUSIC  181 

CHAPTER  XIV. 
Music. 

In  line  with  the  thought  that  has  been  introduced 
in  Chapter  VI.  we  wish  to  quote  from  a  brief  music 
review  published  in  a  daily  paper.  A  chart  of  one  of 
the  performers  for  the  evening  is  also  presented.  You 
will  notice  that  the  Moon  is  in  conjunction  with  six 
planets,  also  with  the  Earth.  This  conjuncton  ap- 
pears in  the  horoscope  of  every  performer,  and  also 
in  the  horoscope  of  every  member  of  the  audience  in 
the  Transits.  Under  such  conditions  superior  music 
is  produced,  and  the  audience  is  prepared  to  appreci- 
ate the  efforts  of  the  performers.  The  article  is 
headed  "Best  Music  Kver  Heard  in  City."  The  fol- 
lowing program  given  by  a  fifty  piece  band  is  de- 
scribed as  follows : 

"The  evening's  entertainment  opened  with  the  se- 
lection entitled  'Entry  of  the  Gladiators.'  The  next 
number  was  the  remarkable  overture  'Triumphale' 
which  was  composed  in  commemoration  of  the  invas- 
ion of  Moscow  by  Napoleon  in  1812,  and  is  a  wonder- 
ful tone  painting  of  that  great  disaster.  After  the  in- 
troduction depicting  the  terror  of  the  inhabitants,  the 
Russian  hymn  is  brought  in  and  is  immediately  fol- 
lowed by  the  prayers  of  the  people  for  victory.  The 
burning  of  the  city  and  the  flight  of  the  Russians  are 
vividly  portrayed,  and  the  defeat  of  the  French.  The 
triumphal  return  of  the  Russians  is  announced  by  the 
fan  fare  of  trumpets,  leading  to  and  concluding  the 
painting  with  the  magnificent  Russian  Hymn.  The 
rendition  of  this  masterpiece  brought  forth  a  storm  of 
applause.  This  was  followed  by  a  euphonium  solo 
composed  by  the  player,  a  fantasia  on  'Silver  Threads 
Among  the  Gold.'  The  light  opera  'Broadway  Re- 
view' was  enthusiastically  received,  and  the  patriotic 


182 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


overture  'America'  concluded  the  concert  numbers." 
The  Moon  in  conjunction  with  six  planets  calls  for 
great  variety  in  the  music  presented.  No.  61,  a  mem- 
ber of  the  band  whose  chart  is  given  below,  shows  a 
large  conjunction  in  the  Nativity,  opposite  the  2nd 
and  3rd  Signs ;  it  governs  both  the  mouth  and  the 
hands.  Had  the  same  program  been  given  under 
Saturn  several  days  earlier,  it  would  have  been  en- 
tirely out  of  place.  Saturn  gave  a  concert,  but  it  was 
very  different.  The  concert  was  a  sacred  one  led  by 
Negro  singers.  It  was  subdued,  slow,  and  solemn 
throughout,  pathetic  in  part,  but  not  a  single  change 
came  in  to  break  the  monotony.  The  crowning  touch 


JVo.bi- 
IN  THE  BAND 


MUSIC 


183 


of  the  evening  was  "And  I  sat  down  there  alone,  and 
I  couldn't  hear  anybody  pray."  The  reference  is  pri- 
marily to  some  one  sitting  alone  in  a  prayer-meeting, 
but  the  author  makes  each  verse  tell  of  some  trying 
place  in  life  where  you  sit  down  there  alone  and  can't 
hear  anybody  pray.  It  is  a  little  piece  that  though 
simple  in  itself  is  full  of  meaning.  Saturn  believes  in 
sitting  alone.  Many  with  Saturn  in  their  marriage 
Sign  have  sat  there  alone  and  couldn't  hear  anybody 
speak.  The  program  was  well  rendered  for  one  of 
its  kind,  and  the  only  kind  that  could  be  effectively 
rendered  under  Saturn  placed  by  itself.  Each  planet 


THE   "SWEDISH    NIGHTINGALE 


184 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


produces  its  own  style  of  music,  and  this  feature  of 
planetary  influence  would  form  a  deep  study. 

No.  62  is  a  great  Swedish  singer,  who  has  been 
dead  for  some  years.  You  will  notice  that  all  her 
good  planets  are  in  or  near  the  llth  Sign,  giving  her 
the  greatest  possible  measure  of  success  in  appearing 
before  the  public.  We  do  not  for  one  moment  think 
that  planetary  influence  gave  her  a  wonderful  voice; 
her  voice  was  probably  inherited.  Had  she  not  pos- 
sessed a  remarkable  voice,  her  success  would  have 
taken  some  other  form.  No.  28  has  a  similar 
horoscope,  but  drew  the  cash  in  a  different  manner. 
It  is  said  that  she  spent  a  large  portion  of  her  im- 


A   FAMOUS   SOPRANO 


MUSIC 


185 


mense  earnings  on  charitable  enterprises  in  her  own 
country.  If  so  her  llth  Sign  represents  the  treasure 
she  has  laid  up  in  heaven.  According  to  the  teaching 
of  the  Bible  we  cannot  have  our  treasure  in  heaven 
and  on  earth  as  well. 

Xo.  63,  the  next  Chart  to  be  presented  is  that  of 
another  celebrated  singer.  Her  father  and  mother 
were  noted  musicians,  and  at  three  years  of  age  she 
learned  the  airs  her  mother  sang.  She  was  presented 
with  many  jewels  of  rare  value.  Her  love  affairs 
however  did  not  run  smoothly.  We  find  Venus  be- 
tween Mars  and  Saturn,  and  Uranus  in  the  marriage 
Sign  with  Jupiter  and  Neptune.  You  are  supposed  to 


A   FAMOUS    CONTRALTO 


—13 


186 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


have  as  many  love  affairs  as  you  have  planets  in  the 
1st  Sign.  We  will  not  vouch  for  the  truth  of  this,  al- 
though it  may  be  so.  No.  63  has  as  strong  a  conjunc- 
tion in  the  llth  Sign  as  No.  62,  but  two  planets  are 
bad.  This  might  indicate  that  she  is  not  so  univer- 
sally admired  as  the  former,  although  she  draws  as 
large  an  audience.  No.  63  excels  in  the  rendering  of 
love  songs. 

We  have  now  the  pleasure  of  presenting  No.  64,  a 
great  contralto,  in  1913,  who  was  born  in  Germany. 
Her  llth  Sign  is  stronger  than  that  of  No.  62  or  No. 
63.  The  Moon  is  now  in  her  2nd  Sign,  but  six  years 
ago  it  was  in  the  llth  Sign.  She  has  two  bad  planets 


LEADER   IN   ORATORIO 


MUSIC 


187 


there,  however.  No.  64  is  very  fond  of  children,  as 
are  all  those  having  a  strong  llth  Sign.  Here  is  an 
extract  from  a  letter  she  wrote  replying  to  a  request 
to  sing  for  the  school  children  in  one  of  our  cities. 
"Greetings  to  the  dear,  dear  children  of  S — .  Please 
tell  your,  OUR  beloved  blessed  little  and  bigger  chil- 
oren  that  I  will  sing  for  them  on  Saturday  morning-." 
Those  appearing  frequently  before  public  audiences 
should  have  and  usually  do  have  a  great  big  heart  for 
children.  As  a  singer  she  excels  in  lullabies  and 
cradle  songs. 

No.  65  is  a  leader  in  Oratorio.     Her  llth  is  not  so 
strong  as  those  in  the  preceding  horoscopes,  but  Ve- 


Jl/o  Gb 
FAMOUS  PIANIST 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


nus  and  Mercury  form  a  conjunction  there  with  Sat- 
urn and  the  Sun,  the  Moon  passing  through  during 
the  conjunction;  and  this  marks  her  llth  as  the  lead- 
ing Sign  in  her  chart.  She  favors  the  oratorio : 
urn  in  the  llth  in  conjunction  with  the  Sun  would 
indicate  this.  These  are  the  only  permanent  planets 
she  has  in  the  llth  Sign. 

No.  66  is  a  famous  pianist.  It  is  said  that  he  played 
the  piano  at  three  years  of  age,  and  studied  harmony 
and  counterpoint  at  twelve  years  of  age.  While  quite 
young  he  made  his  debut  as  a  virtuoso  with  instant 
success.  He  played  only  his  own  compositions.  You 
will  notice  that  Mercury  and  Venus  have  come  into 


LEADER  IX   MILITARY   BAND. 


MUSIC  189 

conjunction  with  Jupiter  and  the  Sun  at  birth.  The 
Moon  is  also  there  and  the  evil  planets  are  not  in 
the  conjunction.  Neptune  is  the  only  good  planet 
not  in  it.  Three  planets  stand  around  the  llth  Sign, 
but  the  heavy  conjunction  is  between  the  3rd  and  4th 
Signs.  This  is  the  best  point  for  piano  playing  and 
more  especially  for  composing  music.  He  might  not 
play  by  note  as  readily  as  if  he  had  a  stronger  1st 
Sign.  His  eye  might  not  be  so  quick.  Five  good 
planets  formed  a  conjunction  around  the  Sun  in  child- 
hood. This  with  an  inherited  talent  for  music  led 
him  to  be  one  of  the  greatest  piano  players  the  world 
has  ever  seen,  with  also  a  special  talent  for  compos- 
ing. 

Xo.  67  is  the  leader  of  one  of  the  finest  concert 
bands  in  the  world.  He  has  made  five  triumphal 
tours  through  Europe,  and  his  marches  have  netted 
him  the  greatest  royalty  ever  paid  an  American  com- 
poser. His  3rd  Sign  gives  him  success  in  performing 
with  his  hands  or  in  composing.  Saturn  governs 
slow,  measured,  subdued  movements,  and  Mercury 
light,  quick  movements;  the  Sun  would  govern  cres- 
cendo effects,  so  that  his  music  should  not  be  at  all 
monotonous.  Mars  in  conjunction  with  four  good 
planets  in  the  12th  Sign,  gives  a  strong  military  cast 
to  his  compositioris.  The  12th  Sign  governs  the  feet 
and  four  good  planets  there  would  give  him  phenom- 
enal success  with  marches.  He  inherits  a  talent  for 
music,  indicated  by  the  formation  of  the  brain  and 
developed  by  practice,  and  his  horoscope  indicates 
the  form  his  musical  talent  is  to  take. 

No.  68  is  a  famous  Bohemian  violinist.  His  father 
played  the  violin  and  began  to  teach  him  at  five  years 
of  age.  He  made  his  first  public  appearance  at  the 


190 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


age  of  eight  years,  and  is  pronounced  one  of  the  most 
gifted  violinists  of  the  century.  You  will  notice  that 
his  planets  are  evenly  distributed  over  four  Signs,  the 
2nd,  3rd,  4th  and  5th.  There  is  no  special  pull  on 
composing  and  we  do  not  hear  of  him  as  a  composer. 
There  are  two  planets  in  the  llth  bringing  him  be- 
fore the  public  in  person.  His  1st  Sign  is  connected 
with  his  5th  by  a  regular  chain  of  planets.  His  2nd 
Sign  insures  financial  success.  Uranus  and  Mars  in 
the  3rd  give  him  the  striking  originality  for  which 
he  is  noted. 


(Vo.bl 
GREAT    VIOLINIST 


ML'SIC 


191 


Xo.  70  is  the  Chart  of  a  popular  comedian  who  com- 
poses his  own  songs.  At  the  age  of  ten  he  began  his 
theatrical  career  in  a  play  written  by  his  father.  His 
greatest  hit  was  a  musical  comedy  entitled  "Little 
Johnny  Jones",  written  while  the  Moon  was  in  con- 
junction with  Jupiter  and  the  Sun  between  his  1st 
and  2nd  Signs.  He  also  has  another  good  point  in 
his  horoscope  which  lies  between  his  llth  and  12th 
Signs.  This  gives  him  his  name  "The  Yankee  Doodle 
Boy" ; — martial  and  patriotic  sentiment  coming  from 
the  12th  Sign,  and  children  from  the  llth.  His  llth 
Sign  should  insure  a  good  reception  from  a  public 
audience.  It  is  said  that  his  articulation  is  almost 


Jlfo.  70- 

LEADER  IX  COMEDY 


192  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

perfect.  Jupiter  and  the  Sun  between  the  1st  and  2nd 
Signs  govern  this  faculty. 

We  have  spoken  of  the  formation  of  the  brain  in 
connection  with  music.  It  may  be  interesting  to 
those  who  have  not  studied  phrenology  to  know  the 
supposed  indications  of  music  in  the  brain.  You 
should  notice  the  forehead  above  the  outer  corner  of 
the  eye ;  fullness  there  indicates  time  and  tune  strong- 
ly developed.  If  the  adjoining  faculties  are  well 
developed  it  will  give  breadth  and  fullness  to  the  fore- 
head ;  if  the  adjoining  faculties  are  not  well  developed 
a  ridge  will  appear  extending  from  the  corner  of  the 
eye  upward.  In  a  picture  the  ridge  may  take  the 
form  of  a  high  light. 

There  is  also  another  point  connected  with  the 
wearing  of  the  hair  that  is  worthy  of  notice.  Singers 
usually  wear  their  hair  short,  and  players,  particular- 
ly piano  and  violin  performers,  wear  their  hair  long. 
This  tendency  we  attribute  to  the  habit  of  connecting 
the  3rd  Sign  with  the  1st.  The  1st  Sign  governs  the 
eyes  and  the  3rd  the  shoulders,  arms,  and  hands.  The 
hair  worn  over  the  neck  and  touching  the  shoulders, 
connects  the  part  of  the  body  governed  by  the  1st 
Sign  with  the  part  governed  by  the  3rd  Sign.  This 
habit  is  so  strongly  developed  in  those  who  play  on 
instruments  that  they  cultivate  along  with  it  the  hab- 
it of  wearing  the  hair  long. 


PAIXTERS 


193 


CHAPTER  XV. 
Painters. 

Xo.  71,  the  first  great  painter  to  be  introduced,  is  a 
famous  Italian  who  was  also  a  gifted  poet.  The  first 
chart  is  a  picture  of  a  very  sad  event  in  his  life ;  it  is 
read  principally  in  the  Transits.  At  first  sight,  his 
marriage  Sign  appears  good,  but  a  very  unfortunate 
combination  in  the  Transits  causes  the  death  of  his 
wife,  after  giving  birth  to  a  dead  child.  You  will  no- 
tice that  Mercury  and  the  Moon  are  entering  the 
llth  Sign,  and  were  it  not  for  the  fact  that  Uranus, 


A'o-7/ 
PAINTER   AND    POET 


194 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


Mars  and  Saturn  are  all  changing  at  the  same  time 
with  Mercury,  the  Moon  and  the  Earth,  Mercury  in 
the  llth  would  bring  nought  but  good.  A  number 
of  planets  changing  at  the  same  time  take  the  form  of 
a  conjunction.  Uranus  is  changing  from  the  1st  Sign 
opposite  the  Moon  in  the  Nativity;  this  is  very  unfor- 
tunate. It  also  forms  a  conjunction  with  Mars  in  the 
2nd  Sign ;  but  this  was  not  all ;  his  grief  was  so  great 
that  he  flung  a  manuscript  of  poems  ready  for  the 
publisher  into  the  casket.  You  will  notice  a  bad  com- 
bination between  the  3rd  and  4th  Signs,  the  point  for 
writing;  the  planets  there  are  all  changing.  How- 
ever, a  few  years  later  he  published  a  volume  which 


NO.  71   AFTER   DEATH 


PAINTERS 


195 


was  hailed  with  a  shout  of  admiration.  Jupiter  and 
Venus  in  the  1st  Sign  doubtless  caused  his  married 
life  to  be  very  happy  while  it  lasted.  Good  and  bad 
planets  running  a  conjunction  in  the  marriage  Sigii 
frequently  bring  death.  A  preponderance  of  bad  in- 
fluences usually  brings  separation.  In  that  case  there 
is  nothing  good  connected  with  it. 

Our  2nd  Chart,  Xo.  72,  is  taken  six  years  after  the 
death  of  the  great  artist ;  you  may  think  that  a 
strange  proceeding,  but  you  know  many  talented  per- 
sons are  not  appreciated  while  they  live.  We  would 
expect  that  this  artist  would  reach  the  height  of  his 
fame,  years  after  his  death.  This  is  certainly  a  pow- 


J1/0-V3. 
LADY  ARTIST 


196  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

erful  combination  in  his  3rd  Sign.  We  have  met  with 
abundant  evidence  to  prove  that  our  horoscopes  gov- 
ern our  memory  and  any  property  which  we  may 
happen  to  leave  behind  us. 

No.  73,  a  lady  painter,  is  now  introduced.  The  gen- 
ius who  wields  the  brush  has  very  few  planets  in  the 
llth  Sign;  he  does  not  require  to  come  before  the 
public;  neither  are  many  planets  found  in  the  12th 
unless  he  paints  animals  or  war  scenes.  A  strong  1st 
leads  to  portrait  painting,  and  a  good  2nd  causes  the 
work  to  be  a  financial  success.  A  strong  3rd  and  4th 
is  essential  to  any  good  painter.  No.  73  has  all  three 
bad  planets  between  the  3rd  and  4th.  Such  combina- 
tions although  often  disastrous  impart  great  genius 
and  striking  originality. 

The  two  following  charts.  No.  74  and  No.  75,  illus- 
trate the  genius  of  a  great  French  artist.  The 
strongest  point  in  his  horoscope  strikes  him  at  eight- 
een years  of  age.  Someone  says  of  him  that  he  was  a 
celebrated  man  before  he  reached  the  age  of  twenty 
without  any  teaching;  he  was  always  drawing  as  a 
child,  and  his  best  work  was  done  when  most  artists 
are  painfully  acquiring  a  knowledge  of  the  art.  There 
was  such  a  great  demand  for  his  work  that  he  never 
found  time  to  perfect  himself  in  it.  For  this  reason 
his  paintings  have  been  severely  criticized  by  those 
who  were  regarded  as  an  authority  in  such  matters. 
He  died  while  still  a  young  man,  worn  out  with  ex- 
cessive production. 

You  will  notice  a  conjunction  of  Mercury  and  Ve- 
nus with  the  Moon  between  the  3rd  and  4th  Signs  at 
the  age  of  eighteen.  You  will  also  notice  the  Sun, 
Neptune  and  Uranus  in  the  2nd  Sign.  Neptune  and 
Uranus  we  believe  stand  for  paint,  and  the  Sun  in  the 
conjunction  indicates  a  distinguished  painter.  Ap- 
pearing in  the  2nd  Sign  they  indicate  financial  sue- 


PAINTERS 


197 


cess;  the  same  conjunction  appears  between  the  3rd 
and  4th  in  the  horoscope  of  No.  71. 

In  his  younger  days  No.  74  did  a  vast  amount  of  il- 
lustrating; as  he  grew  older  larger  paintings  took 
their  place.  Jupiter  and  Saturn,  the  largest  planets 
standing  alone  in  the  3rd  Sign,  would  govern  large 
paintings ;  Venus  and  Mercury  draw  smaller  and 
more  quickly  executed  work.  Shortly  before  his 
death  Venus  and  Mercury  come  into  conjunction 
with  Mars  in  the  12th  Sign.  Such  a  conjunction  gives 
us  scenes  from  the  battle  field  and  illustrations  of 
Dante  and  Milton :  also  the  crucifixion  of  Christ.  His 


GREAT  FRENCH  PAINTER 


198 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


later    productions    deal    with    the    weird    and    tragic. 

Christ  leaving  the  Praetorium  is  one  of  his  most 
famous  paintings.  The  Moon  .passing  Venus  and 
Mars  in  the  12th  near  the  1st  Sign  gives  us  the  crown 
of  thorns.  "Did  e'er  such  love  and  sorrow  meet,  or 
thorns  compose  so  rich  a  crown !" 

No.  76  is  a  famous  American  illustrator  who  spec- 
ializes on  portrait  work.  Every  planet  touches  the 
spot ;  four  planets  between  the  3rd  and  4th  indicating 
expert  hand-work,  and  five  in  the  1st  Sign  indicating 
portrait  work.  Had  No.  76  been  a  lady  he  would 
have  made  an  expert  milliner,  as  the  1st  Sign  governs 
the  upper  part  of  the  head.  You  will  notice  that  he 


71/0.7  tf 
NO.  74  AT  MIDDLE  AGE 


PAINTERS 


199 


usually  gives  us  a  hat  and  that  his  hats  are  quite  as 
wonderful  as  his  faces.  Even  the  men  usually  wear 
a  tasteful  head-covering.  Xo.  76  will  be  more  suc- 
cessful with  the  faces  of  women  than  he  will  be  with 
the  faces  of  men  or  children ;  all  his  planets  standing 
in  the  1st  and  3rd  indicate  this.  He  should  allow  noth- 
ing to  come  between  him  and  attaining  perfection  in 
his  chosen  calling.  There  is  always  room  at  the  top 
of  the  ladder.  He  tells  us  that  motherhood  pictures 
take  with  the  public.  He  should  try  the  Madonna. 
No  picture  has  ever  been  painted  of  her,  to  our 
knowledge,  that  did  not  leave  room  for  a  feeling  of 
disappointment  in  looking  at  it. 


/l/o.  76 
FAMOUS  IN  PORTRAIT  WORK 


200 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


No.  77  is  another  artist  who  has  distinguished  him- 
self as  an  illustrator.  He  has  one  planet  in  the  1st 
Sign  and  he  gives  us  just  one  girl,  a  very  nice  girl 
to  be  sure.  She  is  long  ago  known  as  the  Gibson  girl, 
and  is  described  by  Jupiter.  If  any  of  you  young  men 
have  Jupiter  alone  in  the  1st  Sign  you  will  know  that 
your  one  girl  will  resemble  the  Gibson  girl.  He  also 
has  two  good  planets  in  the  12th  Sign  and  should  be 
even  more  successful  with  animals  than  he  has  been 
with  girls.  Some  years  later  Mercury  passes  into  his 
1st  Sign,  and  then  he  will  probably  give  us  another 
girl ;  Mercury  indicates  a  youthful  girl.  Mercury  also 
in  its  present  position  indicates  young  or  small  ani- 


SUCCESSFUL   ILLUSTRATOR 


PAINTERS 


201 


mals.  Not  long  since  we  counted  four  or  five  dogs 
and  cats,  in  one  of  his  illustrations.  They  were 
perched  around  on  tables  and  chairs  in  the  most  be- 
witching poses  imaginable.  No  one  who  did  not  love 
animals  would  ever  think  of  sketching  a  cat  on  a 
table.  His  style  lends  itself  admirably  to  the  fur  and 
shaggy  hair  of  animals.  With  Jupiter,  Mercury,  and 
the  Sun  there  and  no  evil  planets,  he  should  be  very 
successful.  The  Sun  standing  between  the  llth  and 
12th  should  give  him  success  with  men  and  children 
as  well. 

No.  78  is  a  French  lady  who  became  a  great  ani- 
mal   painter.      A    little    sketch    of   her   career    should 


LADY   ANIMAL   PAINTER 


—14 


202  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

prove  interesting.  Her  mother  died  when  she  was 
quite  young,  and  as  she  afterwards  says,  the  family 
"migrated  like  birds  having  no  settled  abode."  Her 
father  sent  her  to  a  private  school  for  a  time,  where 
after  a  good  many  escapades  she  capped  the  climax  by 
organizing  a  sham  fight  on  the  grounds.  In  this  fight 
the  flower  beds  were  nearly  demolished,  and  she  was 
sent  home.  Mars  in  the  1st  Sign  indicates  fighting  in 
connection  with  school ;  later  on  it  would  govern  love 
affairs.  She  was  never  married,  however.  A  friend 
once  mentioned  the  subject  to  her,  and  she  replied 
that  she  didn't  believe  any  man  ever  really  loved  her, 
but  she  hadn't  time  even  to  think  of  it.  Her  time  and 
energy  were  devoted  entirely  to  her  art.  Her  father 
was  an  artist  with  a  studio  in  his  home,  so  that  early 
in  her  teens  the  art  of  painting  began  to  monopolize 
all  her  spare  time.  Her  fondness  for  animals  devel- 
oped while  she  was  quite  young,  and  she  turned  her 
father's  studio  into  a  menagerie.  We  hear  of  ponies 
running  up  and  down  stairs  after  her,  and  young 
lions  having  the  freedom  of  the  house ;  her  lions 
died ;  one  she  nursed  for  a  month  and  he  died  in  her 
arms. 

We  have  drawn  the  Chart  at  the  time  when  the 
"Horse  Fair"  was  given  to  the  public ;  it  was  praised 
beyond  description.  You  will  notice  two  planets  gov- 
erning the  12th  are  in  the  llth  Sign,  and  that  leads 
her  to  be  very  fond  of  young  baby  animals. 

The  Franco-Prussian  war  lay  very  heavily  on  her 
mind,  and  in  her  distress  she  turned  to  painting  as 
her  only  solace.  Her  llth  Sign  leads  her  to  make 
life  long  friends  among  women.  She  visited  England 
and  was  feasted  and  flattered  wherever  she  went.  She 
wrote  to  a  friend  that  English  people  seemed  to  eat 
all  the  time.  Her  3rd  and  12th  Signs  had  changed 
from  painting  and  animals  to  traveling  and  eating; 
this  is  an  example  of  the  law  of  transference. 


PAINTERS  203 

Her  llth  and  12th  Signs  coupled  with  the  3rd,  con- 
trolled every  event  of  any  importance  during  her  life. 
She  took  cold  in  traveling  and  died  after  a  short  ill- 
ness. Her  1st  Sign  did  not  call  for  extravagance  in 
dress  and  she  often  wore  trousers;  in  handling  ani- 
mals and  painting  on  a  large  canvas  this  style  of 
dress  was  most  suitable.  She  devoted  her  life  to  the 
art  of  painting  and  she  has  had  her  reward. 

We  may  have  more  than  one  special  talent  but  we 
must  select  one  of  these  and  consider  all  others  sub- 
ordinate to  this  one.  We  want  to  close  our  eyes  and 
ears  to  everything  else  for  a  time  and  allow  the  spirit 
of  the  theme  to  permeate  our  souls.  Happy  is  he  who 
can  pitch  his  tent  on  the  mountains  removed  from  the 
bustle  and  distracting  influences  of  earth.  Mr.  But- 
ler says,  "Who  that  has  visited  a  mountain  top  but 
what  has  felt  that  he  was  inspiring  the  breath  of  the 
gods?"  When  we  sit  upon  a  high  crest,  and  look  out 
upon  a  broad  expanse  of  beauty,  we  imagine  that  this 
is  where  the  spirits  dwell  and  can  almost  hear  the 
rustle  of  their  wings.  You  will  notice  that  Christ, 
when  he  wanted  to  teach  the  people  some  great  and 
lofty  truth,  took  them  out  into  a  mountain.  His 
greatest  sermon  is  known  as  the  "Sermon  on  tm: 
Mount."  When  he  desired  to  gain  strength  for  the 
agony  of  the  Cross  he  went  up  into  a  mountain  1  •> 
pray,  but  when  he  went  out  to  be  tempted  of  the  devil 
he  went  into  the  wilderness.  From  the  mountain  cop 
we  will  gain  inspiration  for  the  work  before  us,  al- 
though we  may  not  all  find  it  convenient  to  retire  to 
the  hill-tops ;  in  that  case  we  must  form  the  habit  of 
concentrating  all  our  powers  on  the  theme  before  us. 

We  should  also  be  careful  not  to  work  until  the 
mind  is  fatigued.  There  are  times  when  we  can  ac- 
complish far  more  than  at  other  times,  and  this  is  an 
important  point  to  study.  Take  No.  76  for  example. 
During  the  months  of  July  and  August  he  should  be 


204  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

very  successful.  The  earth  is  in  his  1st  Sign  from 
the  middle  of  July  to  the  middle  of  August.  The 
Moon  will  pass  through  his  1st  and  3rd  Signs  several 
times,  and  these  will  be  his  best  times  for  work,  in 
September  he  should  rest.  October  and  November 
again  will  be  a  good  time  for  work,  and  December  a 
good  time  to  rest.  You  should  work  while  the  Earth 
and  Moon  are  opposite  large  conjunctions  and  rest 
when  they  are  passing  through  the  weaker  Signs.  By 
this  means  one  should  accomplish  much  more  in  a 
given  time  and  yet  not  overtax  the  brain.  July,  Aug- 
ust, October,  November,  January,  and  February 
should  be  his  best  months  for  work,  and  this  gives 
him  September,  December,  March,  and  June  for  re- 
creation. We  are  assuming  that  by  choosing  the 
most  suitable  time  for  work  he  will  accomplish  as 
much  in  a  year  as  he  would  by  working  every  day, 
and  he  should  produce  better  work.  We  all  know 
what  it  means  to  settle  down  to  a  task  when  we  can- 
not concentrate  our  thoughts  upon  it ;  we  have  chosen 
a  bad  time  for  our  work.  What  applies  to  No.  76  ap- 
plies to  all ;  his  horoscope  has  been  chosen  to  illus- 
trate because  of  his  planets  being  banked  up  in  two 
places.  His  horoscope  is  at  the  strongest  point  in 
1913,  and  he  should  allow  nothing  to  stand  in  the  way 
of  attaining  perfection  in  his  chosen  calling.  He  is 
still  a  young  man,  mentally  considered,  and  should 
produce  a  few  masterpieces  if  he  is  spared  to  reach 
old  age.  In  a  few  years  Venus  will  be  found  in  the 
2nd  Sign  and  Mercury  in  the  5th.  Mercury  in  the  5th 
will  give  him  greater  success  with  children.  The 
Transits  also  will  at  times  work  strongly  on  the  5th 
and  6th  Signs. 

Those  who  would  attain  to  great  heights  in  their 
chosen  calling  should  avoid  dissipation  of  every  sort. 
Late  hours,  rich  food  and  stimulants  are  brain  and 
nerve  wreckers;  avoid  these  as  you  would  poison. 


PAINTERS  205 

We  recollect  reading  a  story  of  a  painter  who  died ; 
his  work  being  left  on  his  easel  for  years  after- 
ward. Another  artist  called  to  see  his  Studio  and 
what  was  his  surprise  to  find  a  picture  which  he  him- 
self had  completed,  standing  half  finished  on  the  easel. 
This  incident  was  narrated  in  support  of  the  reincar- 
nation theory.  We  do  not  believe  in  reincarnation 
and  would  not  wish  to  believe  in  it;  one  trip  through 
this  vale  of  tears  will  be  sufficient  for  most  of  us;  it 
is  quite  probable  however  that  the  dead  artist  may 
have  inspired  the  living  artist;  it  is  also  possible  that 
the  same  unseen  influence  might  have  prompted  the 
production  of  the  picture  in  two  different  cases.  This 
is  a  similar  instance  to  that  of  Helen  Keller  and  the 
"Frost  Fairies." 

We  cannot  compare  horoscopes  in  either  case. 


206 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


CHAPTER  XVI 
Inventors. 

No.  79  is  the  Chart  of  an  inventor,  who  requires  no 
introduction  to  the  world.  His  horoscope  doubtless 
goes  a  long  way  toward  making  him  what  he  is ;  the 
resemblance  between  his  Chart  and  that  of  his  rival 
No.  80,  goes  to  prove  this  fact,  and  yet  we  believe 
that  early  training  contributed  greatly  toward  making 
him  a  man  of  genius.  He  was  trained  at  home  by 
his  mother  who  was  a  teacher,  and  it  is  said  that  his 
father  paid  him  for  every  book  he  read.  When  he 


GREAT    INVENTOR 


INVENTORS  207 

first  gained  access  to  a  good  library  he  conceived  the 
idea  of  reading  it  through.  He  read  it  is  said  15  feet 
in  a  straight  line,  mostly  scientific  works.  All  this 
goes  to  show  that  the  studious  nature  he  developed 
when  a  child  had  much  to  do  with  his  success  in  after 
life.  He  built  a  printing  press  of  his  own  and  delight- 
ed in  experimenting  with  chemicals.  Doubtless  these 
traits  were  due  to  the  reading  he  had  done.  You  will 
notice  that  he  has  a  good  llth  Sign  and  has  gained 
greatly  by  friends  on  many  occasions.  A  man  whose 
child  he  rescued  from  a  passing  train  taught  him  tel- 
egraphy, and  later  a  company  by  whom  he  was  em- 
ployed paid  him  a  large  sum  for  his  inventions  be- 
fore he  realized  their  value;  this  gave  him  a  start  in 
life.  He  has  doubtless  since  benefited  by  those  in 
his  employ.  His  devotion  to  the  work  has  also  been 
a  great  factor  in  making  him  one  of  the  foremost 
inventors  of  the  century,  for  he  simply  buries  himself 
in  his  laboratory  and  allows  nothing  to  come  between 
him  and  the  fulfilment  of  his  purpose.  We  believe 
that  an  ecliptic  conjunction  of  Neptune  and  Saturn 
in  his  horoscope  is  the  leading  element  making  for 
inventive  success;  then  we  notice  that  Venus  and 
Mercury  form  a  conjunction  with  the  Sun  and  Mars 
between  the  12th  and  1st  several  years  from  now. 
Apparently  No.  79  has  not  yet  reached  the  climax  in 
his  career.  Five  planets  are  changing  around  the 
llth  Sign. 

No.  80,  whose  horoscope  appears  below,  has  given 
his  name  to  the  telephone  and  has  otherwise  proved 
himself  a  very  formidable  rival  of  No.  79.  The  for- 
mer was  born  on  February  llth  and  the  latter  on 
March  3rd  of  the  same  year,  and  there  is  consequent- 
ly a  striking  resemblance  between  the  two  horo- 
scopes. One  being  born  in  Aquarius  and  the  other  in 
Pisces,  the  planets  appear  one  sign  earlier  in  the 
latter  chart.  We  believe  that  the  same  conjunction 


208 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


which  has  given  No.  79  success  in  the  line  of  inven- 
tion has  caused  his  partial  deafness,  Neptune  and 
Saturn  in  the  2nd  Sign.  In  Chart  No.  80  it  appears 
in  the  1st  Sign,  leading  him  to  take  an  especial  inter- 
est in  those  who  are  deaf.  He  has  been  a  teacher  in 
a  school  for  the  deaf  and  has  made  many  improve- 
ments in  the  methods  of  teaching.  This  is  also  his 
marriage  Sign.  No.  80  should  be  accomplishing  gieat 
things  these  years.  Mercury  and  Venus  are  in  con- 
junction with  the  Sun  in  his  horoscope. 

Associated  with  No.  80  is  No.  81,  the  hero  of  the 
motorcycle  and  aeroplane;  he  developed  inventive 
genius  while  very  young.  Our  chart  shows  the  posi- 


ft/0 
RIVAL  OF  NO.  79. 


INVENTORS 


209 


tion  of  the  planets  at  three  years  of  age;  not  long 
after  this  time  he  was  making  gas  generators  with  to- 
mato cans.  His  father  died  at  four  years  of  age  with 
the  Moon  leaving  the  3rd  in  conjunction  with  Ur- 
anus ;  the  same  influences  that  brought  about  his  fa- 
ther's death,  gave  him  success  in  planning  great  in- 
ventions. Some  one  says  that  he  was  obsessed  with 
the  idea  of  traveling  fast,  and  his  3rd  Sign  gives  him 
a  tremendous  impetus  in  the  line  of  travel. 

Neptune  in  the  12th  would  lead  him  to  wade  in  the 
water.  He  was  also  connected  with  a  school  for  the 
deaf,  having  a  sister  who  was  sent  there.  He  has 
Mars  and  Uranus  in  the  3rd  Sign.  Great  trials  and 


INVENTOR  OF  MOTORCYCLE  AND  BIPLANE 


210 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


great  successes  often  travel  together.  His  third  aero- 
plane was  a  success  from  the  beginning.  This  is  one 
of  many  examples  we  might  give  of  the  effectiveness 
for  good  or  evil  of  the  number  3. 

Last  but  not  least  is  No.  82,  the  great  California 
naturalist  and  plant  breeder.  He  has  originated 
many  new  plants  by  cross-breeding  and  selection,  and 
his  development  of  the  thornless  cactus  has  made  him 
famous ;  Mars  placed  between  Jupiter  and  the  Sun  in 
the  12th  has  given  him  this  great  victory.  The  3rd 
Sign  governs  vegetation  of  a  scenic  nature  and  the 
12th  vegetation  used  for  food.  The  12th,  1st,  and  3rd 
Signs  have  made  him  what  he  is.  He  has  also  devel- 


NATURALIST    AND    PLANT-BREEDER 


INVENTORS  211 

oped  new  varieties  in  fruits;  considerably  over  one 
million  plants  being  raised  each  year  by  way  of  ex- 
periment. Mr.  Carnegie  gave  him  a  grant  of  $10,000 
a  year  for  ten  years  to  insure  the  undisturbed  contin- 
uation of  his  work.  He  also  occupied  the  position  of 
special  lecturer  at  Leland  Stanford  University.  A 
close  conjunction  of  Neptune  and  Saturn  appears  in 
his  horoscope  just  as  it  does  in  No.'s  79  and  80. 


212 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


CHAPTER  XVII. 
Land,  Engineering,  and   Building. 

Many  large  land  owners  are  given  in  this  book, 
and  your  attention  has  frequently  been  called  to  these 
indications.  No.  83  is  a  man  who  owns  a  10,000  acre 
ranch  and  is  a  poet  as  well.  Ranching  and  poetry 
should  harmonize  very  nicely;  both  require  a  good 
4th  Sign  and  close  proximity  to  nature.  Jupiter  and 
Saturn  in  the  12th  Sign  run  a  conjunction  with  Nep- 
tune in  the  1st.  These  three  planets  control  animals 
and  food-stuffs.  All  his  planets  are  around  the  12th 


POET  AND  RANCHMAN 


FOURTH  SIGN 


213 


and  4th  Signs,  the  12th  for  animals  and  food  and  the 
4th  for  land  and  writing. 

No.  84  is  a  real  estate  dealer  who  might  have  been 
wealthy  had  he  not  invested  the  money  made  in  land 
in  a  hotel  and  livery  stable.  Mercury  and  Venus  are 
in  conjunction  with  Jupiter,  Neptune,  and  the  Sun  in 
his  4th  and  5th  Signs  at  birth,  and  Venus  and  Mer- 
cury come  into  conjunction  with  the  Moon  between 
the  2nd  and  3rd  Signs  about  sixty  years  of  age.  The 
influences  in  his  12th  Sign  are  very  bad,  indicating 
losses  in  animals  and  food-stuffs.  He  should  have 
avoided  all  such  investments. 


REAL  ESTATE  AND  HORSES 


214 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


No.  85  is  the  chart  of  a  civil  engineer  who  published 
an  engineer's  field  book.  Uranus  and  Saturn  in  the 
4th  indicate  traveling  over  rough  ground  and  scienti- 
fic investigation  connected  with  land.  This  conjunc- 
tion is  common  in  the  horoscopes  of  surveyors,  civil 
engineers,  and  natural  scientists.  Venus  and  Mer- 
cury form  their  conjunction  in  the  4th,  indicating  that 
this  is  the  Sign  by  which  he  will  be  distinguished. 

No.  86  is  the  chart  of  an  architect,  lie  was  edu- 
cated in  music,  but  became  interested  in  architecture, 
particularly  skeleton  construction  work.  He  engin- 
eered many  high  office  buildings  and  theatres,  and 


CIVIL  ENGINEER 


FOURTH  SIGN 


215 


was  president  of  the   Building  and   Engineering  Co. 
of  New  York. 

As  his  chart  was  being  worked,  we  noticed  that  his 
2nd  Sign  contained  a  large  conjunction;  from  this 
fact  we  suspected  that  he  was  a  large  dealer  in  capi- 
tal or  was  in  a  position  where  he  handled  large  sums 
of  money.  Referring  to  a  sketch  of  his  life  it  was 
found  that  he  was  a  bank  director.  Money  in  the  2nd 
Sign  is  connected  with  building  in  the  3rd  and  4th. 
Uranus  between  the  llth  and  12th  indicates  danger 
to  friends  from  falling;  this  feature  being  incidental 
to  work  on  high  buildings. 


FAMOUS   ARCHITECT 


216 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


Chart  No.  87  is  that  of  another  builder.  When  four 
planets  appeared  in  the  12th  we  said,  he  must  special- 
ize in  cement,  paving,  or  flooring,  and  it  was  found 
that  he  had  written  a  book  on  "Limes,  Cements,  Mor- 
tars, and  Concretes."  He  had  also  written  on  "Drain- 
age" and  "Constructive  Details."  You  will  notice 
that  Neptune  is  in  the  12th  Sign  with  Mars,  Uranus, 
and  Jupiter ;  these  should  cover  the  question  of  drain- 
age. The  remaining  planets  in  his  horoscope  are  on 
each  side  of  the  4th  Sign ;  all  entering  and  leaving  the 
Sign ;  they  work  very  strongly.  The  4th  Sign  gov- 
erns every  kind  of  constructive  work,  and  gives  me- 
chanical genius.  The  3rd  governs  the  hands  so  that 


ARCHITECTURE  AND  PAVING 


FOURTH  SIGN  217 

the  3rd  and  4th  are  very  closely  allied.  This  is  where 
musicians  and  writers  get  their  ability  to  compose, 
and  the  surgeon  gets  his  power  to  wield  the  knife 
successfully.  A  good  4th  Sign  ensures  order  and  me- 
thod, and  usually  indicates  a  person  of  superior  ex- 
ecutive ability;  it  is  also  very  essential  to  the  mother 
of  a  family ;  it  enables  her  to  keep  her  house  in  order 
and  to  darn  and  mend  for  the  little  ones.  A  house- 
keeper requires  such  a  diversity  of  talent  that  one 
cannot  expect  any  woman  to  excel  all  around.  Her 
12th  Sign  governs  cooking,  and  this  is  very  essential ; 
her  1st  enables  her  to  manage  the  man  and  this  is  also 
very  essential.  One  would  think  a  man  would  be 
ashamed  to  even  admit  that  he  required  a  woman  to 
manage  him,  but  most  of  them  very  quickly  blame  the 
woman  if  she  does  not  prove  a  success  in  this  very  pe- 
culiar office.  A  woman  on  being  accused  by  her  hus- 
band of  not  knowing  how  to  manage  a  man,  replied 
that  she  expected  to  get  a  man  who  could  manage 
himself;  she  would  not  thank  any  man  to  manage 
her:  and  this  seems  to  be  common  sense.  In  addition 
to  this  duty  however  she  must  have  a  2nd  Sign  that 
will  produce  a  strong  pull  on  receipts,  and  keep  a 
tight  rein  on  disbursements;  a  3rd  and  4th  that. will 
produce  numerous  dainty  articles  for  her  home  and 
family,  and  keep  the  dust  out  of  the  nooks  and  cran- 
nies ;  and  a  5th  that  will  guarantee  love  and  obedi- 
ence from  her  children. 

In  addition  to  these  she  must  be  attractive,  and  al- 
ways presentable  to  the  gaze  of  the  fashionable  world. 
Now  where  can  she  have  her  bad  planets?  That  is  a 
puzzle  for  some  one  to  solve. 

In  Chart  No.  88  you  will  notice  a  similar  horoscope 
to  that  of  No.  86.  Although  different  planets  occupy 
the  2nd  and  4th  Signs.  No.  88  has  Mars  in  his  3rd 
situated  between  Mercury.  Jupiter,  Venus  and  the 
Sun.  This  position  brings  him  gain  through  fire  or 


—15 


218 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


war;  he  therefore  manufactures  machinery  for  \var- 
vessels.  Mars  in  a  good  position  favors  the  produc- 
tion of  iron  and  steel  or  anything  that  is  moulded  by 
the  application  of  heat.  He  ueld  membership  in  many 
organizations  and  was  President,  Vice  President  or 
Superintendent  of  not  a  few.  Mars  does  not  always 
bring  good  luck  in  the  4th  Sign.  We  have  noted  a 
number  of  cases  where  it  led  to  destruction  of  build- 
ings by  fire. 

No.  89,  who  had  a  newspaper  plant  damaged  by 
fire,  shows  Mars,  Mercury,  and  the  Sun  in  the  4th, 
Mars  standing  for  fire,  the  Sun  for  a  notable  fire,  and 


Ml 

MANUFACTURING    MILITARY 


SUPPLIES 


FOURTH  SIGN 


219 


Mercury  for  writings  connected  with  fire.  Under  the 
present  conjunction  of  Mars  occurring  in  June,  1913, 
a  series  of  fires  took  place  culminating  in  the  destruc- 
tion of  another  newspaper  plant,  and  a  fire  was  also 
discovered  in  a  library. 

Chart  No.  90  represents  another  series  of  fires,  re- 
sulting in  damage  to  property  and  loss  of  valuable 
writings.  Here  the  Sun,  Mars,  and  Mercury  also  ap- 
pear in  the  4th.  It  is  usually  taken  for  granted  that 
when  a  series  of  fires  occurs  they  must  be  of  incendi- 
ary origin,  but  this  is  not  necessarily  the  case ;  in 
such  a  horoscope  as  we  have  shown  there  would  be 
great  danger  from  fire  at  any  time  while  the  Moon  re- 


LOST  NEWSPAPER  PLANT 


220 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


mained  in  conjunction  with  these  planets.  In  this 
case  they  would  remain  in  the  conjunction  for  three 
years.  Three  accidents  frequently  occur  in  succes- 
sion, where  the  influences  are  working  strongly.  Dr. 
Talmage  had  his  church  burned  three  times;  after  the 
last  fire  he  moved  to  another  city.  The  third  time 
usually  winds  up  the  streak  of  luck.  The  fact  that 
you  usually  break  three  dishes  before  your  luck 
changes  has  often  been  remarked,  and  we  have  fre- 
quently noticed  the  same  phenomenon  in  connection 
with  other  things.  If  an  event  happens  twice  it  is 
very  liable  to  happen  the  third  time. 


ANOTHER  LOSS   BY   FIRE 


FOURTH  SIGN  221 

No.  89  and  No.  90  are  born  near  the  same  time  and 
there  is  a  striking  resemblance  between  the  two 
charts.  The  fires  to  which  we  referred  took  place 
near  the  same  time.  No.  90  shows  Mars  and  Mer- 
cury opposite  Mars  and  Mercury;  in  both  horoscopes 
Mars  stands  opposite  Mars.  In  No.  90  Jupiter,  Sat- 
urn, Mars,  Mercury,  and  the  Sun  are  all  changing  in 
the  Nativity,  and  this  causes  the  influences  to  work 
very  strongly  for  both  good  and  evil. 

Uranus  in  the  4th  sometimes  causes  loss  from  earth- 
quakes, particularly  if  Saturn  appears  in  the  conjunc- 
tion;  Chart  No.  112  shows  this  trouble.  Neptune  un- 
der bad  influences  in  or  near  the  4th  causes  destruc- 
tion by  flood. 


222 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 
Law  and  Medicine. 

The  former  deals  largely  with  mental  suffering  and 
the  latter  with  physical  suffering.  In  either  case,  the 
study  of  planetary  influence  should  enable  the  prac- 
ticioner  to  understand  mysterious  cases  and  to  figure 
out  successfully  a  plan  of  relief. 

The  distinguishing  feature  in  the  horoscope 
of  a  lawyer  seems  to  be  a  tumultuous  3rd 
Sign,  which  covers  short  journeys,  writings,  and 
visits  from  those  in  distress ;  the  4th  is  not 
necessarily-  strong.  We  have  here  selected  a 


GREAT    LABOR    ATTORNEY 


LA\Y  223 

lawyer  whose  career  has  been  slightly  unusual,  and 
three  others  who  have  made  law  a  life  long  profes- 
sion. Those  who  study  law  and  drop  out  in  a  short 
time  are  not  fair  examples  of  the  profession,  although 
they  usually  show  a  stormy  3rd  Sign.  We  have  tak- 
en all  these  charts  at  the  time  Venus  and  Mercury 
formed  a  conjunction.  This  is  usually  found  to  be 
the  most  important  point  in  the  horoscope. 

In  No.  91  Uranus  and  Mars  appear  between  the 
2nd  and  3rd  Signs.  Mars  stands  for  righting  and  Ur- 
anus for  labor;  these  standing  alone  indicate  heavy 
righting  over  labor  difficulties.  They  also  cause 
trouble  over  money,  and  writings  connected  with  it. 
Saturn  in  the  4th  indicates  danger  of  imprisonment; 
this  planet  however  is  guarded  by  Venus  and  Mer- 
cury. Saturn  in  conjunction  with  the  Sun  in  the  llth 
frequently  indicates  death  or  imprisonment  to  friends. 
The  Sun  in  the  llth  and  Xeptnne  and  Jupiter  in  the 
1st  Sign  draw  many  warm  friends  and  gain  by  them, 
the  llth  drawing  men  and  the  1st  women  in  a  usual 
way.  Jupiter  however  in  the  1st  draws  friends  from 
those  connected  with  the  administration  of  justice 
and  Xeptune  from  those  near  the  water  or  leading  a 
sea-faring  life.  Uranus,  Mars,  and  Saturn  standing 
in  the  3rd  and  4th  govern  writing  and  produce  such 
books  as  "An  Eye  for  an  Eye.''  Venus  and  Mercury 
in  this  bad  conjunction  suggest  such  a  topic  as  the 
murder  of  a  woman. 

Chart  Xo.  92  is  that  of  a  Judge  of  the  Superior 
Court,  who  shows  the  Sun.  Mars  and  Saturn  in  his 
3rd  Sign ;  they  should  be  capable  of  getting  up  a  good 
fight.  Uranus  appears  in  his  1st  Sign.  Uranus  in  the 
1st  frequently  means  separation.  This  lawyer  for- 
merly made  a  specialty  of  divorce  cases,  and  was 
himself  divorced.  His  money  sign  is  well  guarded, 
and  he  draws  a  good  income.  We  notice  that  in  the 
three  charts  we  have  given  Neptune  stands  in  or  near 


224 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


the  llth  Sign.  This  indicates  friends  by  the  water; 
their  business,  property,  and  friends  were  found  in 
sea-coast  towns.  We  also  think  it  indicates  friends 
shedding  tears.  Those  having  Neptune  in  the  1st 
Sign  shed  tears  easily,  and  women  having  Neptune 
in  the  llth  are  afflicted  with  crying  children,  more  es- 
pecially if  Neptune  forms  a  conjunction  with  bad 
planets,  so  we  presume  Neptune  under  bad  Transits 
in  the  llth  in  these  horoscopes  draws  tears  among 
friends.  We  are  sorry  to  say  that  tears  are  no  un- 
common sight  to  a  lawyer,  particularly  a  criminal 
lawyer. 


JUDGE  OF  SUPERIOR  COURT 


LAW 


225 


Chart  Xo.  93  shows  an  attorney  who  has  the  'war 
sign  in  his  2nd  with  Uranus  and  Saturn  in  2nd  and 
3rd,  another  opportunity  for  a  good  fight  particularly 
over  money.  Mercury  and  Venus  form  a  conjunction 
in  the  3rd  indicating  the  3rd  Sign  as  the  leading  one. 

Chart  No.  94  shows  another  noisy  2nd  and  3rd. 
This  lawyer  made  a  specialty  of  damage  suits,  and 
was  struck  by  an  automobile  himself.  Uranus  in  the 
3rd  combines  traveling  and  falling;  he  drewr  land  but 
found  difficulty  in  collecting  money,  Jupiter  and 
Mars  should  govern  the  law  profession.  Jupiter 
stands  for  the  administration  of  justice  and  Mars  for 
argument.  We  find  Mars  either  in  the  3rd  or  ap- 


SUCCESSFUL  IN  LAW 


226 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


preaching  the  3rd  in  all  these  horoscopes.  The 
charts  were  drawn  about  the  time  they  were  entering 
the  profession  in  every  case,  so  that  Mars  will  have 
reached  the  3rd  in  all  these  charts.  In  three  Jupiter 
is  found  in  or  near  the  1st  and  in  the  fourth  Jupiter 
is  found  in  the  3rd  Sign.  From  this  study  we  would 
infer  that  the  1st  and  3rd  Signs  were  the  important 
ones  for  an  attorney-at-law. 

No.  95  is  a  leading  surgeon  who  has,  it  is  estimated, 
performed  no  less  than  1000  abdominal  operations. 
He  gives  special  attention  to  the  diseases  of  women 
and  children,  and  has  written  books  on  surgery.  Ve- 
nus and  Mercury  forming  a  conjunction  in  the  4th 


SPECIALTY    IN    DAMAGE    SUITS 


MEDICINE 


227 


Sign  with  Jupiter  and  Uranus  indicate  that  the  4th 
Sign  takes  the  lead.  You  will  notice  in  the  first 
three  horoscopes  Jupiter  and  Uranus  appear  in  the 
4th.  Venus  and  Mercury  indicate  operations  upon 
women  and  children.  Mercury  is  entering  the  5th 
Sign  and  the  Sun  and  Mars  stand  between  the  1st  and 
2nd  Signs. 

Chart  Xo.  96  shows  not  only  a  surgeon  but  a  bac- 
teriologist. Venus  and  Mercury  form  a  conjunction 
with  Mars  in  the  12th  Sign,  indicating  success  in  deal- 
ing with  germs,  microbes,  or  bacteria.  These  fall  un- 
der the  12th  Sign,  which  is  the  animal  Sign.  Mer- 


A   FAMOUS    SURGEON 


228 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


cury  in  the  12th  indicates  small  animals  and  Mars 
dangerous  animals.  Venus  gives  success  in  dealing 
with  them.  There  seems  to  be  a  theory  among  medi- 
cal men  that  the  ravages  of  bacteria  may  be  stayed 
by  treatment  with  serum  from  animals.  It  is  quite 
possible,  as  both  come  under  the  12th  Sign;  experi- 
ment alone  will  prove  the  utility  of  such  cures.  There 
is  one  point  we  wish  to  emphasize  here  and  that  is 
the  fact  that  the  stomach  and  bacteria  come  under  the 
same  sign.  From  this  we  learn  the  importance  of 
guarding  carefully  the  avenues  to  the  stomach.  li 
we  wish  to  keep  the  system  free  from  disease  germs, 
avoid  eating  or  drinking  that  which  is  tainted  or  im- 


EMINENT   BACTERIOLOGIST 


MEDICIXE 


229 


pure.     Fresh  air  and  pure  food  mean  good  health  in 
ninety-nine  cases  out  of  a  hundred. 

Chart  No.  97  shows  a  4th  Sign  much  the  same  as 
the  former ;  the  Sun,  Uranus,  and  Jupiter  standing 
in  ecliptic  conjunction  between  the  3rd  and  4th.  He 
should  specialize  in  ear  and  throat  troubles.  We  have 
four  or  five  horoscopes  of  deaf  and  partially  deaf  per- 
sons, and  we  find  that  a  conjunction  of  Venus  and 
Mercury  strikes  the  spot  in  all  of  them  in  less  than 
ten  years  from  now.  We  hope  this  means  some  val- 
uable discoverv. 


SPECIALIST  IN  SURGERY 


230 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


Chart  No.  98  is  that  of  a  lady  physician  ;  we  were 
specially  interested  in  working  out  her  horoscope,  be- 
cause we  felt  that  some  very  strong  incentive  must 
have  been  at  work  to  bring  her  out  of  the  old  routine 
and  lead  her  into  a  calling  that  was  scarcely  exploited 
by  any  woman  at  that  time.  Her  4th.  Sign  is  weak 
and  we  presume  she  attempted  very  little  surgery. 
Her  5th  Sign  indicates  trouble  among  children  and 
friends  among  strangers.  It  seems  to  be  good  for 
men ;  either  she  did  not  treat  them  or  they  were  eas- 
ily cured.  We  are  reminded  of  an  incident  we  once 
read  of  a  lady  physician,  who  attended  a  man  in  a 
case  of  fever,  and  he  continued  to  call  after  he  had 


LADY  PHYSICIAN 


MEDICINE 


231 


fully  recovered.  They  became  engaged  and  later  lie 
wished  to  break  the  engagement.  She  quietly  reached 
to  a  shelf,  took  her  account  book  down,  and  made  out 
a  bill  including  every  visit  he  had  made,  and  sent  it 
to  a  lawyer  to  collect.  She  had  evidently  met  such  a 
man  before  and  was  prepared.  The  lady  before  us 
certainly  has  some  pull  on  money.  The  Sun,  Nep- 
tune, and  Uranus,  permanent  planets  in  the  money 
Sign,  indicate  money  made  by  medicine  or  painting. 

Chart  No.  99  is  that  of  an  osteopathic  doctor,  lie 
is  a  man  who  is  doing  a  good  business.  He  has  all 
the  good  planets  injiis  1st  Sign,  excepting  one  in  the 


A   SUCCESSFUL   OSTEOPATH 


232  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

4i-h  near  the  3rd.  Neptune  governs  the  hands.  We 
presume  the  1st  Sign  gives  strong  magnetic  power 
and  good  planets  give  the  power  to  heal.  We  have 
another  osteopath  who  has  Jupiter,  Venus,  Mercury, 
and  Neptune  in  the  1st  Sign  and  the  Sun  in  the  4th. 
This  is  much  the  same  proposition — one  good  planet 
between  the  3rd  and  4th  and  four  in  the  1st  Sign. 

We  have  not  worked  any  other  medical  horoscopes. 
Time  and  space  do  not  permit  us  to  investigate  any 
one  branch  of  knowledge  very  thoroughly.  A  whole 
book  might  be  written  on  one  calling  or  profession, 
and  it  would  doubtless  be  very  profitable,  but  we  can 
only  give  a  few  hints  in  passing  and  leave  the  ques- 
tion for  others  to  specialize  upon.  Those  who  are  in- 
terested in  medicine  should  look  up  all  the  birthdates 
to  which  they  have  access  and  study  them  thorough- 
ly, comparing  the  horoscopes  with  the  lives  of  the 
persons.  More  especially  should  every  medical  man 
study  his  own  horoscope.  He  should  keep  a  diary 
and  discover  if  possible  what  point  in  his  chart  draws 
success  in  operations.  In  many  charts  great  victories 
result  from  good  planets  at  one  point  and  great  dis- 
asters from  bad  planets  at  another  point.  A  physic- 
ian must  go  when  called  to  a  case  and  occasionally  he 
must  operate  within  a  given  time,  but  often  he  can 
choose  his  own  time.  A  doctor  should  also  be  very 
wary  in  prescribing  for  a  patient ;  he  must  remember 
that  when  the  conditions  in  the  horoscope  of  a  patient 
are  very  bad  for  health,  he  is  influenced  to  prescribe 
that  which  will  only  aggravate  the  disease ;  of  this 
fact  we  are  certain.  Medical  men  have  hedged  their 
profession  about  with  awe  inspiring  hieroglyphics, 
and  a  great  mass  of  technical  and  high  sounding- 
phraseology.  Not  satisfied  with  this  they  prefix  Doc- 
tor to  their  names  instead  of  plain  Mr.  This  makes 
assurance  doubly  sure  that  they  belong  to  a  superior 
order;  they  have  evolved  during  their  short  term  of 


MEDICINE  233 

college  life  into  a  higher  sphere,  and  there  they  pur- 
pose to  remain.  Care  should  be  taken  that  this  fact 
does  not  militate  against  success.  The  conceited,  self 
centered  man  or  woman  is  much  more  easily  ruled  by 
unseen  forces  than  one  who  does  not  rely  so  much  on 
his  own  first  impressions,  and  weighs  everything 
as  he  proceeds.  The  medical  man  as  well  as  the 
moneyed  man  has  had  his  innings,  but  education  is 
waking  the  masses  up  to  a  realization  that  all  is  not 
gold  that  glitters,  and  they  more  and  more  require 
that  a  man  shall  "deliver  the  goods  when  he  wears  a 
frock  coat." 

There  should  be  many  important  discoveries  made 
during  these  years.  The  Sun  in  the  midst  of  a  large 
conjunction  greatly  facilitates  invention,  and  the  sci- 
ence of  healing  should  come  in  for  its  share. 

We  would  like  to  devote  a  few  pages  to  hygiene 
and  tell  you  how  over-fed  persons  get  down  sick  and 
as  soon  as  they  are  bed-fast  they  order  oysters,  steak, 
poached  eggs,  ice  cream,  and  everything  else  they  can 
think  of  to  strengthen  them,  and  if  it  were  not  for  a 
good  purgation  which  the  doctor  or  some  kind  friend 
administers  they  might  die  at  any  time.  In  these 
days  there  are  more  persons  eatftig  to  death  than 
starving  to  death.  How  often  it  happens  that  eggs 
are  added  to  rich  milk  or  cream  and  the  patient  is 
given  a  dose  which  would  undo  the  digestion  in  a  well 
person.  Eggs  taken  alone  constitute  rich  food,  and 
creamy  milk  constitutes  rich  food.  Now  add  the  two 
without  diluting  and  what  can  you  say  of  it?  No 
matter  what  the  disease,  guard  the  stomach  and  guard 
it  well.  Give  it  good,  plain,  pure,  wholesome,  tasty 
food,  at  regular  intervals,  and  don't  overwork  it. 
From  the  stomach  the  blood  is  fed,  and  from  the 
blood  every  organ  of  the  body  is  nourished,  and  every 
muscle  and  sinew  is  toned  up. 


—16 


234  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

Another  important  point  is  proper  attention  to  the 
pores  of  the  skin.  We  deprecate  rubbing  the  skin 
with  oil,  as  it  prevents  the  free  passage  of  waste  mat- 
ter through  the  pores.  It  is  said  that  a  person  cov- 
ered with  a  substance  which  closes  the  pores  of  the 
skin  over  the  whole  body  will  only  live  a  few  hours ; 
now  what  is  bad  as  a  whole  must  be  bad  in  part. 
Avoid  sudden  change  of  temperature ;  this  also  closes 
the  pores.  Should  they  become  closed  accidentally, 
and  trouble  ensues,  resort  at  once  to  the  hot  bath  and 
sweat.  There  are  doctors  who  laugh  at  such  things 
as  sweats  and  counterirritants ;  they  aje  old  fashioned ; 
to  be  sure  they  are,  so  is  your  body  old  fashioned ; 
and  while  it  remains  so  old  fashioned  treatment  is  li- 
able to  be  helpful.  Counterirritants  in  the  form  of 
plasters  and  blisters  draw  inflammation  to  the  sur- 
face, and  where  used  prevent  the  necessity  of  opera- 
tion in  very  many  cases.  We  have  seen  so  many 
cures  wrought  by  the  use  of  the  porous  plaster  that 
we  cannot  refrain  from  recommending  it.  In  addi- 
tion to  back-aches,  heart-aches,  neuralgia,  rheuma- 
tism, and  injuries  which  have  been  cured  by  this 
means,  we  have  seen  chronic  ear  trouble  removed  by 
the  application  of  the  plaster  back  of  the  ear,  and 
appendicitis  checked  in  the  early  stages.  Don't  wait 
for  the  doctor  to  recommend  these  things.  Use  sim- 
ple remedies,  and  use  more  prevention  than  cure,  it 
is  cheaper  and  less  painful.  Don't  wait  until  a  pain 
becomes  chronic  before  you  deal  with  it.  The  time 
to  treat  it  is  when  you  first  feel  it. 


CHILDREN  235 

CHAPTER  XIX. 
Children. 

This  subject  opens  up  so  many  channels  for  scien- 
tific study  and  observation,  that  one  is  at  a  loss  to 
know  which  direction  to  take  first.  North,  South, 
East,  and  West,  different  phases  of  the  question  clam- 
or for  your  attention. 

In  the  care  of  children  you  must  begin  with  the 
mothers ;  this  feature  of  the  question  is  too  obvious 
to  require  elucidation.  The  amount  of  civilization  of 
which  a  country  can  boast  is  usually  measured,  in 
the  eyes  of  outsiders  at  least,  by  the  treatment  of  its 
women  and  children ;  whether  it  be  England,  America, 
China,  India  or  the  Islands  of  the  Sea.  England  in 
her  present  lamentable  condition  is  being  made  the 
laughing  stock  of  the  world.  The  English  women 
who  were  anxious  to  lead  the  world  in  the  work  of 
reform,  as  the  men  have  led  the  world  in  commer- 
cial life,  and  who  have  striven  for  40  years  by  fair, 
just  and  honorable  means  to  get  a  hand  in  establish- 
ing the  moral  status  of  the  country,  have  been  jeered 
at,  and  trampled  upon,  until  desperation  has  at  last 
taken  the  place  of  that  which  is  just  and  right,  and 
pages  of  history  will  be  written  which  in  the  future 
will  cast  a  dark  blot  upon  the  proud  name  of  one  of 
the  greatest  nations  in  the  world.  The  writer  has  no 
affiliations  with  the  suffrage  movement,  has  never  been 
in  a  suffrage  meeting,  and  never  saw  a  suffrage  par- 
ade but  once.  While  watching  the  parade  a  lady 
remarked,  "Why  these  women  are  all  grey-haired, 
they  are  ready  for  the  grave.  Wrhat  do  they  want 
with  the  ballot?"  "These  women  have  seen  a  few 
things,"  said  one ;  "when  they  say  they  want  suffrage 
they  know  what  they  are  talking  about."  Mem- 
ory carries  us  back  to  the  time  when  they  suffered 


236  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

the  pangs  of  travail,  which  nothing  but  motherlove 
would  ever  induce  any  woman  willingly  to  undergo. 
As  time  wore  on  the  little  ones  lay  close  to  their 
hearts,  and  the  little  fingers  clung  to  the  strong  guid- 
ing hand  of  the  mother,  and  thus  she  led  them  on. 
But  the  time  came  when  they  were  ushered  into  the 
world  to  win  or  to  lose,  in  a  rum-cursed,  money-mad 
sea  of  moral  iniquity.  What  else  can  you  call  it?  And 
then  when  the  mother  follows  her  child  out  into  the 
world  to  try  to  make  the  world  what  she  has  made 
the  home  for  him,  she  is  taunted,  and  told  to  go  home 
and  rock  the  cradle.  The  world  says :  "We  want  more 
boys  just  like  yours  to  patronize  our  saloons  and 
houses  of  prostitution;  we  want  their  money,  that's 
business !  We  want  your  girls  too :  go  home  and  rock 
the  cradle,  turn  them  out  as  fast  as  you  can,  that  is 
your  place,  and  we  will  take  care  of  them."  Now, 
isn't  that  the  situation  exactly? 

All  the  best  men  in  the  world  are  with  the  best 
women  in  their  aspirations  toward  reform,  and  we 
are  glad  to  note  that  in  many  places  they  are  in  the 
majority.  The  cry  comes  from  them  as  it  came  from 
Macedonia  of  old,  "Come  over  and  help  us,  the  work 
is  too  great  for  us."  There  is  opposition  also  among 
women  to  the  suffrage  movement ;  from  those  who 
are  either  laboring  under  some  delusion  or  are  opposed 
to  the  work  of  reform.  Very  few  however  refuse  to 
avail  themselves  of  the  privilege  of  the  ballot ;  those 
women  are  probably  the  first  to  visit  the  polls.  There 
will  also  be  many  women  who  will  yield  to  the  seduc- 
tive influence  of  the  powers  that  be,  and  cast  their  vote 
against  conscience  and  right ;  a  vast  work  of  education 
must  take  place.  The  government  should  call  a  halt 
in  business,  forbid  the  issuing  of  marriage  licenses 
for  a  year,  publish  a  manifesto  calling  the  attention 
of  the  people  to  the  terrible  need  of  moral  reform, 
and  declare  the  world  an  unfit  place  to  be  the  nur- 


CHILDREN  237 

sery  of  the  coming"  generation.  Women  would  be 
quite  within  the  limit  in  refusing  to  bring  children 
into  a  world  such  as  this ;  steeped  in  liquor,  and  seeth- 
ing with  immorality,  in  many  places  an  embryo  hell. 

In  olden  times  the  people  held  fasts  and  dressed  in 
sackcloth  and  ashes,  when  they  wished  to  arrest  the 
spread  of  some  terrible  evil.  A  little  bit  of  that  spirit 
at  the  present  time  would  not  be  out  of  place.  \Ye 
have  the  evidence  of  judges  of  the  Court  as  to  the 
percentage  of  crime  caused  by  drinking  alcoholics, 
and  we  have  the  evidence  of  the  medical  men  in  charge 
of  insane  asylums  as  to  the  percentage  of  inmates  who 
have  come  there  through  drink  and  its  associate  evils, 
and  yet  we  proceed  to  cut  off  the  tip  of  one  root  of 
the  great  cancer  that  is  sapping  the  vitals  of  the  race. 
We  regulate  the  saloon  just  the  slightest  little  bit  and 
then  fold  our  arms  in  innocence.  We  don't  need  to 
read  Greek  or  Hebrew  to  find  out  what  the  fires  of 
hell  are ;  we  can  smell  their  sulphurous  odor,  and  see 
the  devastation  they  are  working,  any  night  we  like 
to  walk  down  the  street.  Some  wonder  why  God 
does  not  take  every  man  to  heaven.  How  would  ob- 
scene pictures  look  on  the  jasper  walls?  How  would 
the  coarse  jest,  and  the  insane  jabber  of  the  inebriate 
sound  oozing  through  the  pearly  gates?  God  may 
give  you  a  place  just  as  beautiful  as  he  gives  to  the 
righteous,  but,  dear  friend,  it  will  not  be  heaven  un- 
less you  make  heaven  out  of  it ;  it  will  be  a  Lake  of 
Fire.  God  causes  his  Sun  to  shine  on  the  just  and  on 
the  unjust,  and  they  make  their  own  heaven,  and 
they  make  their  own  hell. 

Our  destinies  are  woven  and  interwoven  with  those 
around  us  so  that  we  must  be  held  responsible  in 
some  measure  for  those  with  whom  we  come  into 
contact,  more  especially  for  the  children  which  we 
have  brought  into  the  world.  Xo  mother  is  doing  her 
part  unless  she  strives  by  all  the  means  within  her 


238  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

reach  to  make  her  children  happy  and  successful,  and 
more  than  all  to  prepare  them  for  the  world  beyond, 
knowing  that  this  life  is  "but  for  a  moment;"  and  no 
woman  is  doing  her  part  unless  she  helps  her  neigh- 
bor in  the"  good  work  she  is  trying  to  do.  A  lady 
once  said,  "I  have  a  good,  kind  husband,  and  am  well 
provided  for,  but  for  the  sake  of  those  who  are  not 
provided  for,  I  am  willing  to  dedicate  my  life  to  the 
work  of  reform."  That  is  the  spirit  we  should  all  cul- 
tivate. 

Then  the  matter  of  support  is  one  that  is  of  para- 
mount importance  in  connection  writh  the  child  ques- 
tion, and  that  is  so  intimately  connected  with  the 
question  of  support  for  the  mother  that  the  two  are  in 
a  manner  inseparable.  This  is  a  grave  question.  We 
have  had  investigations  into  the  matter  of  wages  for 
working  girls,  with  an  attempt  to  solve  the  vice  prob- 
lem;  but  is  not*  the  question  of  the  working  mother  of 
even  greater  importance,  for  she  has  other  lives  de- 
pending upon  her?  A  mother  who  saw  an  advertise- 
ment for  help  in  a  department  store  called  at  the  of- 
fice. She  was  first  asked  what  regular  income  she 
had,  and  the  reply  not  being  satisfactory,  she  was 
told  that  they  wanted  girls  who  were  living  at  home 
and  just  required  a  little  pin-money.  This  is  not  hear- 
say, we  can  vouch  for  the  truth  of  the  incident.  What 
right  anyway  have  parents  to  be  paying  wages  for  an 
employer?  A  girl  should  be  competent  after  one 
month  in  a  department,  if  not  there  is  something 
wrong.  We  have  given  you  the  chart  of  a  lady  who 
took  a  leading  place  in  three  months  time ;  there  is 
no  long  apprenticeship  required.  The  situation  for 
women  in  the  industrial  world  is  so  horrible  that  we 
shrink  from  attempting  to  portray  it;  if  women  could 
work  on  equal  terms  with  men  it  would  change  the 
aspect  entirely.  Someone  will  say,  "Oh,  men  have 
more  physical  strength,  women  cannot  expect  to 


CHILDREN  239 

draw  the  same  wages."  If  strength  were  the  standard 
by  which  efficiency  is  measured,  then  the  hod-car- 
rier and  the  street  digger  should  be  more  highly  paid 
than  the  Bank  manager  and  Railway  director.  Per- 
haps it  should  be  so ;  if  you  think  it  should,  get  in 
and  make  it  so.  \Yomen  may  have  to  learn  the  sci- 
ence of  the  strike  and  the  filibuster  to  get  what  is 
their  due,  unless  the  government  succeeds  in  settling 
the  matter  of  wages  in  a  satisfactory  manner. 

It  is  very  kind  and  very  delightful  of  the  Legislat- 
ure to  offer  a  pension  to  mothers  who  have  children 
to  support,  but  even  here  they  must  feel  that  justice 
comes  before  charity,  and  if  women  had  a  fair  chance 
in  the  industrial  world,  there  are  many  cases  where 
such  assistance  would  be  unnecessary.  Talk  about 
girls  going  astray  when  their  wages  are  low !  What 
happens  to  a  mother?  Her  children  are  taken  from  her 
by  law  and  she  is  "cast  out."  All  these  things  are 
too  horrible  even  to  mention.  \Ye  do  not  for  a  mo- 
ment say  that  her  children  should  not  be  taken  from 
her,  but  we  do  say  that  she  should  not  be  driven  to 
such  a  life  by  the  greed  of  capitalists  and  labor  ex- 
ploiters. It  is  simply  appalling  to  read  of  the  con- 
ditions under  which  women  work  in  many  places. 
We  say  work,  but  they  don't  work,  neither  do  they 
rush,  they  simply  tare.  If  you  don't  believe  it  try 
making  thirty-six  kimonos  in  a  day.  Let  them  be  as 
plain  as  possible,  which  of  you  would  want  to  do  it? 
Only  an  expert  could  do  it.  Think  of  working  twelve 
or  fourteen  hours  a  day  at  a  break-neck  speed  like 
that,  year  in  and  year  out,  no  recreation,  probably 
very  little  fresh  air  or  sunshine ;  and  these  are  in 
many  instances  the  mothers  of  our  little  ones.  They 
tell  us  too  that  they  get  the  round  sum  of  four  cents 
for  making  one  of  those  kimonos,  and  that  they  have 
to  work  fourteen  hours  a  day  to  live.  This  is  merely 
a  sample  of  the  work  done.  The  majority  of  the 


240  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

poorer  class  of  women  (and  their  name  is  "legion") 
earn  their  living  in  factories,  sweat  shops,  or  by 
house-service;  and  the  latter  is  very  little  better  than 
the  factory;  that  is  a  case  of  woman  oppressing  wo- 
man; fourteen  hours  a  day,  seven  days  in  the  week, 
with  just  time  to  swallow  their  food,  and  an  occas- 
ional afternoon  off  is  considered  to  be  a  liberal  ar- 
rangement. Most  women  will  tell  you  that  they 
would  sooner  work  any  other  place  than  as  a  house- 
servant,  and  there  are  good  reasons  for  it.  If  these 
women  show  a  degree  of  ignorance  and  apathy  with 
regard  to  their  condition  that  is  appalling,  don't  be 
surprised.  When  do  they  find  time  to  look  at  a  book 
or  paper?  When  their  work  is  over  they  are  too  tired 
even  to  think.  Someone  must  think  for  them  if  their 
condition  is  ever  to  be  improved.  YVle  have  just  read 
of  a  girl  who  was  working  as  a  domestic  and  who  be- 
came tired  of  the  life.  She  donned  boys'  clothes  and 
got  a  position  as  elevator  boy.  She  was  then  arrested 
for  masquerading  in  male  attire,  and  she  told  the  de- 
tectives that  she  made  as  much  in  two  weeks  as  she 
had  formerly  done  in  a  month.  She  would  also  have 
a  much  pleasanter  time. 

The  question  of  heredity  is  far  too  deep  and  com- 
plex and  far-reaching  for  any  one  man  or  group  of 
men  to  be  able  to  fathom  its  depths,  and  to  progn<><- 
ticate  with  any  degree  of  certainty  as  to  the  chances 
for  any  given  birth.  The  position  of  the  planets  in 
the  horoscopes  of  the  parents  is  a  very  important 
factor  in  determining  the  character  of  the" child.  Then 
there  are  probably  many  influences  which  come  in  for 
weal  or  for  woe  between  the  first  dawn  of  life  and  the 
birth  of  the  child.  This  is  a  tremendously  big  subject 
to  tackle,  and  one  that  probably  will  never  be  suc- 
cessfully fathomed.  We  recollect  five  cases  \vliere 
imbecile  children  were  born,  and  in  every  case  the 
parents  were  healthy  and  normal,  and  successful  in 


CHILDREN  241 

life.  In  two  cases  the  deformed  child  was  an  only 
child,  and  in  the  other  cases  the  deformed  child 
made  one  out  of  a  large  family  of  healthy  children. 
A  man  whose  chart  we  have  given  you  as  one  who 
rose  to  the  head  of  his  profession  in  a  phenomenal 
manner  was  the  father  of  such  a  child.  He  had  two 
evil  planets  in  his  llth  Sign.  We  have  never  se- 
cured the  horoscopes  of  the  other  parents,  but  one 
point  is  clear  and  it  is  this.  One  person  can  only 
have  his  share  of  the  good  things  of  the  world,  and 
when  his  good  planets  are  in  his  1st,  2nd,  and  3rd 
Signs  they  are  removed  from  the  5th  and  can  have  no 
influence  there.  Evil  planets  will  probably  occupy 
the  5th.  We  have  a  newspaper  article  before  us 
which  is  headed  as  follows :  ''Aristocrats  are  almost 
Childless."  Three-fourths  of  the  families  in  a  weal- 
thy residence  district  have  no  children,"  it  goes  on 
to  say.  The  fact  which  has  been  mentioned  would 
account  for  this  condition  of  things.  Children  are 
called  "the  poor  man's  heritage",  and  often  it  hap- 
pens that  bright,  healthy  children  make  up  the  sum 
total  of  his  possessions.  This  is  one  of  the  many 
mysteries  which  planetary  influence  aids  in  explain- 
ing When  good  planets  are  in  the  money  Sign  they 
draw  money,  not  children. 

No.  100  is  the  mother  and  Xo.  101  the  father  of 
twenty-three  children,  all  living  and  well.  This  fam- 
ily was  discovered  by  a  newspaper  man  in  the  state 
of  Maine.  They  were  living  on  a  ranch  in  a  plain 
but  comfortable  fashion.  The  children  were  pictured 
as  being  orderly  and  well  behaved,  the  elder  helping 
the  younger  and  everything  moving  along  like  clock 
work.  The  larger  children  were  moving  out  into  the 
world,  and  were  said  to  be  doing  credit  to  their  moth- 
er's training.  The  planets  in  her  llth  Sign  are  all 
good ;  the  Transits  come  and  go.  It  would  be  as  easy 
for  this  lady  to  manage  t\venty-three  children  as  it 


242 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


would  be  for  a  lady  with  Mars  and  Saturn  in  the  llth 
Sign  to  manage  one  child.  Have  you  noticed  children 
teasing  their  mothers?  They  would  no  sooner  get 
one  difficulty  settled  than  back  the  child  would  come 
with  another.  Evil  planets  in  the  llth  Sign  of  a 
parent  or  teacher,  seem  to  give  a  child  a  very  fertile 
brain.  Sometimes  of  course  the  bad  influences  take 
the  form  of  ill-health,  either  in  the  children  or  in  the 
part  of  the  body  governed  by  the  5th  and  llth  Signs. 
How  natural  it  seems  that  the  child  should  come  un- 
der the  same  Sign  with  the  heart.  Someone  says 
they  always  bring  love  with  them  and  we  wish  it 
were  true. 


MOTHER    OF   23    CHILDREN. 


CHILDREN 


243 


Here  is  a  very  sad  little  picture  in  Chart  No.  102. 
Parents  unmarried,  child  born  in  an  automobile, 
strangled  to  death  and  thrown  into  a  back  yard,  and 
this  in  what  was  counted  decent  society.  Such  a  pic- 
ture as  this  makes  one's  blood  run  cold.  Four  plan- 
ets including  the  Moon  in  the  12th  or  enemy  Sign, 
and  five  between  the  3rd  and  4th  Signs — the  3rd  for 
traveling  and  the  4th  for  parents.  Uranus  and  Mars 
stand  between  Venus  and  the  Sun,  putting  cupid  in 
a  very  bad  place.  This  pathetic  little  picture  bears  a 
tremendous  lesson  right  on  its  face,  and  you  can  get 
plenty  more  such  as  this.  When  you  see  anything 
like  it  in  the  newspaper,  just  mark  the  date  of  birth 


FATHER   OF  23   CHILDREN. 


244 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


and  work  it  out ;  charts  such  as  these  are  more  elo- 
quent than  any  words. 

By  way  of  contrast  we  are  going  to  show  you  a 
child  who  was  welcomed  to  the  world  with  the  pomp 
and  splendor  of  Royalty ;  first,  however,  presenting 
to  you  No.  103,  the  chart  of  the  mother.  Consider- 
able anxiety  had  been  experienced  with  regard  to  the 
question  of  an  heir  to  the  throne,  and  at  last  when 
the  Moon  entered  the  llth  Sign  in  the  horoscope  of 
the  mother,  the  stork  got  busy,  and  the  birth  took 
place  amid  great  rejoicing.  It  frequently  happens 
that  the  Moon  coming  into  the  llth  Sign  brings  a 
birth,  and  as  it  remains  there  for  several  years  it  fre- 


INFANT  MURDERED  AT  BIRTH 


CHILDREN 


245 


quently  brings  two  births  close  together  and  then  a 
halt.  When  the  llth  Sign  runs  strong  a  birth  is  li- 
able to  take  place  at  any  time,  that  is  with  the  Moon 
in  any  position  in  the  horoscope,  but  if  there  are  no 
planets  in  or  near  the  llth  the  Moon  coming  into  the 
Sign  frequently  marks  the  only  birth. 

Chart  No.  104  is  that  of  the  little  princess  herself. 
The  Moon  in  her  horoscope  is  in  the  Sign  of  friends 
with  Jupiter.  Only  Saturn  stands  in  the  12th  Sign. 
Venus  stands  in  the  1st  Sign  to  bring  her  nice  clothes, 
and  Mercury  in  the  2nd  to  bring  her  jewelry  and 
money.  They  are  liable  to  be  troubled  with  floods  in 
her  country,  and  she  will  not  have  very  good  luck 


A/o.J02> 
AX  HEIR  TO  THE  THRONE 


246 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


with  animals.     Sorrow  must  come  to  her  as  it  comes 
to  every  person  born,  at  some  time,  in  some  way. 

In  No.  105  we  present  to  you  the  father  and  in  Xo. 
106  the  mother  of  triplets.  At  first  sight  the  llth 
Sign  in  the  horoscopes  of  the  parents  does  not  look 
very  strong,  but  there  are  three  points  which  throw 
light  upon  the  case.  The  parents  were  born  in  the 
same  Sign,  and  the  Transits  are  the  same  for  both ; 
six  planets  appear  in  the  Transits,  and  the  Moon 
stands  the  same  in  the  Nativity  of  both  parents ;  at 
least  practically  the  same,  one  entering  the  llth  and 
the  other  leaving  the  llth.  These  three  points  we 
consider  sufficient  to  account  for  the  unusual  birth. 


A  LITTLE  PRINCESS 


CHILDREN 


247 


Previous  to  this  time  four  children  had  been  born  to 
the  parents  in  fourteen  years. 

In  Xo.  108  we  give  you  what  is  known  as  the  13 
baby,  and  another  born  on  the  same  day ;  one  chart 
will  answer  for  both.  The  13  baby  was  born  on  the 
13th  day  of  Jan.  1913,  at  13  minutes  to  seven,  weighed 
131b,  and  13  years  had  elapsed  since  the  birth  of  the 
last  child.  The  house  number  was  113  and  his  name 
contained  13  letters.  We  are  told  that  the  number 
13  still  follows  him.  He  is  a  sturdy  little  fellow,  and 
looks  as  if  he  knew  a  thing  or  two.  He  sits  there 
with  the  pose  and  air  of  a  judge  upon  the  bench.  He 


JlTo/Otf 

FATHER  OF  TRIPLETS. 


248 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


should  be  guarded  against  infectious  diseases,  and 
he  will  be  very  fond  of  animals. 

The  other  baby  was  tied  up  in  a  box  and  thrown 
out  on  a  vacant  lot.  Some  boys  came  along  and 
played  foot-ball  with  the  box,  until  their  curiosity 
became  aroused  and  they  opened  it.  A  four  day  baby 
tumbled  out  apparently  dead.  A  policeman  however 
took  it  to  a  hospital,  where  at  last  accounts  it  was 
able  to  cry  lustily ;  the  tragedy  occurred  in  Brooklyn 
and  we  may  never  hear  of  the  child  again.  What 
could  be  more  horrible  than  to  throw  a  helpless  in- 
fant out  to  die  with  neither  food  nor  clothing? 

There  were  other   children  born  on   the   same  dav 


MOTHER    OF   TRIPLETS 


CHILDREN 


249 


with  very  nearly  the  same  horoscope,  but  the  same 
thing  did  not  happen  to  them.  The  same  thing 
could  not  happen  to  a  child  born  in  a  good  environ- 
ment ;  thus  we  see  that  environment  plays  a  very  im- 
portant part  in  our  lives.  Every  child  born  at  the 
same  time  doubtless  passed  through  serious  dangers 
seen  or  unseen  on  the  17th  of  January,  but  it  may 
have  been  to  health  or  from  other  troubles  indicated 
by  the  6th  Sign. 

At  the  time  of  birth  the  planets  in  Nativity  and 
Transits  necessarily  telescope  each  other,  the  Tran- 
sits gradually  moving  away;  and  this  causes  the  per- 
iod of  infancy  to  be  fraught  with  dangers.  The  death 


"FOOT  BALL  AND  "NO.  13"  BABIES. 


-17 


250  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

rate  at  the  best  is  much  higher  among  infants  than 
among  children  and  adults.  After  seven  years 
of  age,  the  child  gets  a  pretty  good  grip  on  life,  as 
all  the  evil  planets  in  the  Transits  have  moved  away 
from  those  in  the  Nativity.  In  this  horoscope  live 
planets  appear  in  the  Nativity,  and  five  in  the  Tran- 
sits in  the  6th  and  12th  Signs.  These  Signs  govern 
enemies  and  the  feet.  Mars  stands  for  some  very 
cruel  person  who  threw  the  child  out;  Saturn  often 
stands  for  imprisonment,  hence  the  child  was  tied  in 
a  box.  Mercury  stands  for  the  boys,  who  under  the 
bad  influence  of  Saturn  and  Mars  kicked  the  baby 
around.  Jupiter  stands  for  the  officer  who  took  it  to 
the  hospital,  and  Venus  for  the  nurses  who  cared  for 
it.  The  Moon  in  a  Sign  indicates  the  time  when 
events  are  most  likely  to  take  place.  On  the  13th  of 
January  the  Moon  was  entering  his  10th  Sign — count 
ing  two  days  in  the  10th  and  two  days  in  the  llth  it 
would  be  entering  the  12th  on  the  17th.  At  a  glance 
one  would  say,  when  the  Moon  comes  into  that  12th 
Sign,  there  will  be  something  doing.  The  remaining 
planets  are  all  in  his  2nd  or  money  Sign.  Should  he 
live  to  grow  up  it  will  be  very  strong  at  times.  His 
horoscope  is  typical  of  the  money-fighting  age  in 
which  he  was  born ;  all  his  planets  being  in  the  right- 
ing and  money  Signs.  This  horoscope  indicates  great 
dangers  and  great  possibilities  for  both  these  children. 
The  fourth  and  fifth  years  would  be  a  critical  time  as 
well  as  the  fourth  and  fifth  days,  but  should  they  live, 
four  planets  pass  into  the  1st  Sign  between  the  ages 
of  fourteen  and  twenty-five,  leaving  only  Saturn  in 
the  12th  close  to  the  llth  Sign.  These  four  will  run 
a  conjunction  with  three  planets  in  the  2nd  Sign  close 
to  the  1st.  This  will  give  them  great  intellectual 
power,  and  a  good  pull  on  money. 

All  the  children  born  between  the  1st  and  15th  of 
January    1913    should    have    similar   horoscopes,    ex- 


CHILDREN  251 

cepting  that  the  Moon  would  appear  in  different 
places  in  each  and  they  would  strike  their  danger 
points  at  a  different  time.  During  the  next  five  years 
many  children  will  be  born  under  heavy  conjunctions. 
Their  dangers,  special  talents  and  besetting  sins  will 
all  come  from  the  same  source.  Some  will  be  bright 
and  shining  lights  in  the  world,  while  others  will  land 
in  a  maelstrom  of  dissipation.  Their  lives  will  be 
strongly  marked,  and  the  questions  of  heredity  and 
environment  will  play  an  important  part  in  deciding 
their  fate.  The  horoscope  of  a  child  is  worked  from 
birth,  and  we  think  that  heredity  and  environment 
bring  it  up  to  that  point.  Physical  appearance,  vi- 
tality, and  mental  traits  as  indicated  by  the  form  of 
the  head  may  be  attributed  to  heredity  and  environ- 
ment. Children  born  at  the  same  time  do  not  resem- 
ble each  other  while  children  born  of  the  same  par- 
ents usually  bear  a  striking  resemblance,  some  resem- 
bling one  parent  more  strongly,  and  some  the  other. 
But  you  will  say,  "What  about  the  little  13  baby?" 
What  do  all  the  13's  signify?  In  reply  we  would  say 
that  numbers  are  read  according  to  the  indications 
of  the  Signs.  1  and  7  we  would  connect  with  educa- 
tion, marriage,  etc. ;  2  and  8  with  money,  and  so  on. 
The  peculiar  significance  of  the  number  13  we  attrib- 
ute to  the  fact  that  the  Moon  comes  into  conjunction 
with  the  place  in  which  you  were  born  every  thirteen 
years  in  the  Nativity  and  every  thirteen  days  in  the 
Transits,  or  rather  thirteen  years  elapse  from  the 
time  that  the  Moon  leaves  the  conjunction,  until  it 
comes  into  the  conjunction  again.  This  seems  al- 
ways to  be  a  critical  point  in  the  horoscope;  at  this 
point  many  die  and  if  the  influences  are  good  many 
get  a  fresh  start  in  life,  and  commence  a  new  era  of 
existence;  it  often  brings  promotion.  A  grouping  of 
13's  such  as  is  found  around  the  birth  of  this  child 
would  indicate  that  it  is  strongly  marked  by  fate. 


252  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

Should  the  child  not  live  it  has  been  presented  to  the 
world  already;  its  birth  has  been  used  to  illustrate  the 
peculiar  significance  of  the  number  13  and  to  impress 
upon  the  world  the  fact  that  there  must  be  a  science 
in  numbers.  Numbers  may  or  may  not  assist  in 
bringing  events  to  pass  but  they  surely  indicate  what 
is  likely  to  take  place  if  we  can  read  them  aright.  A 
house  number  has  been  found  to  indicate  the  princi- 
pal events  to  take  place  while  a  person  occupies  the 
house,  e.  g.  1,  1,  3  gives  us  5  as  their  sum  and  5  is  the 
children's  Sign,  1  stands  for  study.  The  number 
would  read  thus,  study  13  child;  or  it  might  read 
thus,  friends  writing  about  child.  11  stands  for 
friends,  3  for  writing,  and  5  for  child ;  several  news- 
paper articles  were  written  regarding  It.  Other 
events  might  be  read  in  this  number,  but  this 
one  is  surely  there.  We  have  analyzed  many  num- 
bers and  have  found  it  an  interesting  study. 

The  question  of  staying  the  ravages  of  disease  and 
prolonging  human  life  seems  to  be  a  difficult  one. 
One  baby  out  of  every  eight  dies  before  it  is  a  year 
old  in  the  United  States,  and  twice  as  many  die  in 
the  poor  districts  as  among  the  better  off  classes.  In 
many  cases  doubtless  the  mother  has  to  turn  out  to 
earn  the  daily  bread  and  what  else  would  you  ex- 
pect? Strong  conjunctions  resting  over  them  at  birth 
will  probably  cause  the  death  rate  to  be  higher  dur- 
ing these  years.  You  have  often  heard  the  remark : 
"That  child  was  too  bright  to  live."  Much  depends 
upon  the  amount  of  vitality  a  child  is  born  with.  Hu- 
man beings  are  like  plants :  some  are  born  tender  and 
fragile,  and  the  first  little  breeze  that  strikes  them 
wafts  them  into  the  next  world ;  this  world  merely 
seems  to  be  a  stepping  stone  to  the  next.  Others 
grow  stronger  as  the  winds  of  adversity  beat  against 
them. 

These    two    conjunctions    appearing    in    the    little 


CHILDREN  253 

horoscope  which  we  have  been  studying,  appeared 
in  the  Transits  of  every  horoscope  at  that  time.  They 
strike  every  person  but  in  a  different  place.  Take 
Mr.  Edison  for  example :  the  group  of.  five  planets  ap- 
pears in  his  children  Sign  and  the  other  group  in  his 
1st  Sign,  which  stands  for  education.  Under  these 
two  conjunctions  he  announces  to  the  world  that  he 
is  going  to  revolutionize  the  system  of  education  in 
the  public  schools,  and  moving  pictures  are  going  to 
be  substituted  for  school  books.  Space  will  not  per- 
mit us  to  give  further  examples. 

These  charts  have  presented  to  you,  a  poor  man's 
heritage,  a  glad  nation's  heritage,  and  a  proud  father's 
heritage;  they  have  also  given  you  the  murderer's 
heritage.  To  the  murderer  we  wish  to  say  that  there 
will  be  no  soft  little  arms  to  twine  about  his  neck  in 
the  home  which  he  has  chosen.  There  will  be  no 
sweet  faced  girl  to  meet  him  with  a  smile  and  a  word 
of  cheer.  In  this  world  the  good  and  the  bad  are  all 
heaped  up  together,  the  good  sandwiched  in  with  the 
bad.  A  bad  man  selects  a  good  woman ;  he  has  no 
taste  for  a  woman  like  himself;  as  soon  as  she  be- 
comes like  himself  he  wants  a  change,  and  a  bad 
woman  prefers  a  good  man.  If  the  underworld  had 
to  run  for  a  year  without  any  recruits  from  innocence 
and  decency,  we  believe  it  would  die  a  natural  death. 
Hell  will  be  full  of  hatred,  loathing  and  bitterness, 
wailing  and  gnashing  of  teeth,  all  the  sweetness  and 
purity  removed. 

The  man  who  murdered  the  sweet  little  infant  so 
far  as  we  know  might  have  made  a  home  for  the 
young  girl,  and  the  new-born  babe  who  was  part  of 
his  own  flesh  and  blood,  but  he  chose  to  throw  it 
into  someone's  back  yard  and  give  himself  up  to  li- 
centious living.  The  officers  discovered  that  he  was 
a  well  known  business  man  with  an  office  down  town, 
but  he  was  never  charged  with  murder.  Oh  no !  A 


254  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

little  money  would  be  sufficient  to  cover  the  whole 
thing  up.  God  causes  his  sun  to  shine  upon  the  just 
and  upon  the  unjust,  and  doubtless  he  gave  this  mur- 
derer just  as  sweet  a  child  as  he  gave  to  the  one  who 
sat  upon  a  throne;  such  children  are  often  very  at- 
tractive. When  its  little  dimpled  hands  wtere  out- 
stretched to  you,  and  its  sweet  blue  eyes  turned  to 
you  with  a  look  of  helpless  appeal, — Oh  devil  in  hu- 
man form!  How  could  you  be  so  cruel?  Don't 
blame  God  if  you  some  time  find  yourself  in  company 
that  is  not  congenial.  He  is  giving  you  all  the  good 
things  of  this  life  just  the  same  as  he  gives  to  his 
most  faithful  followers  and  you  are  trampling  them 
under  your  feet.  Some  day  there  will  be  no  more 
victims  left  for  you  to  torture.  You  will  find  your- 
self alone  with  your  own  kind,  and  methinks  that 
will  be  all  the  punishment  you  will  need.  If  this 
were  the  only  case  of  the  kind  we  might  be  inclined 
to  pass  over  it  lightly,  but  the  world  is  cursed  with 
murders  of  this  description.  This  precious  gift  of 
God  is  thrown  into  open  fireplaces,  into  swiftly  flow- 
ing streams,  into  lime  pits,  and  who  knows  where ! 
Remember  their  little  souls  go  straight  to  God  who 
gave  them,  and  he  knows  all  about  it.  "Inasmuch  as 
ye  have  done  it  unto  one  of  the  least  of  these  ye  have 
done  it  unto  me,"  said  Jesus. 

When  we  speak  of  liquor  in  this  chapter  we  do  not 
mean  to  infer  that  drinking  is  a  heinous  crime,  or  that 
it  is  in  itself  sinful;  but  we  do  say  most  emphatically 
that  it  often  paves  the  way  for  crimes  that  are  hei- 
nous ;  in  fact,  it  is  so  frequently  the  cause  of  down- 
fall, that  it  should  be  wiped  out  entirely.  In  a  year's 
time  no  one  would  ever  miss  the  glass. 

The  following  record  breaker  in  births  appeared 
this  year  in  a  daily  paper.  A  rancher  in  Colorado  was 
presented  all  on  the  same  day  with  a  pair  of  twins, 
a  brand  new  calf,  six  little  pigs,  eleven  chickens,  and 


PHILANTHROPISTS  255 

two  pigeons.  He  drowned  the  cat  before  kittens  were 
added  to  the  list.  "It  never  rains  but  it  pours."  Un- 
der large  conjunctions  just  such  incidents  are  liable 
to  happen. 


CHAPTER  XX. 
Friends  and  Philanthropists. 

Under  the  same  Sign  and  inseparable  from  the 
question  of  philanthropy,  is  the  question  of  friend- 
ship. In  one  sense  the  word  friend  expresses  the 
only  true  and  satisfactory  relationship  in  life;  it  im- 
plies sincerity  and  good  feeling.  The  relationship  of 
father,  mother,  husband,  wife,  brother,  or  sister,  does 
not  necessarily  imply  friendship.  "A  brother  is  born 
for  the  day  of  adversity,  but  a  friend  loveth  at  all 
times."  A  man  may  be  your  husband  and  yet  not  be 
your  friend,  and  a  woman  may  be  your  sister,  and 
yet  not  be  your  friend;  a  friend,  however,  when  he 
ceases  to  be  friendly  becomes  an  enemy.  True,  there 
are  false  friends,  but  these  are  enemies  in  disguise.  A 
friend  is  one  who  takes  your  part  when  you  are  ma- 
ligned, assists  you  when  you  are  in  difficulty,  and  for- 
gives you  when  you  are  penitent ;  if  he  does  not  do 
these  things  he  is  not  worthy  the  name  of  a  friend. 
"A  friend  in  need  is  a  friend  indeed." 

There  is  one  phase  of  this  question  that  causes  one 
to  feel  very  sad,  and  that  is  the  thought  of  the  insta- 
bility of  friendship.  Your  best  friends  frequently  be- 
come your  greatest  enemies,  and  when  they  do,  they 
traduce  all  that  you  once  held  sacred;  all  your  little 
secrets  that  as  friends  have  been  entrusted  to  them, 
are  spread  broadcast;  and  as  enemies  they  mock  and 
torment  you  in  a  way  that  no  stranger  would  have 
the  power  to  do.  This  thought  calls  to  mind  a  verse 


256  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

written  upon,  "The  Friend  that  sticketh  closer  than 
a  brother." 

"Earthly  friends  may  pain  and  grieve  you, 
One  day  kind,  the  next  day  leave  you. 
But  this  friend  will  ne'er  deceive  you. 
Oh,  how  he  loves !" 

We  read  a  short  time  ago  of  a  woman  who  la- 
mented having  spoiled  a  perfectly  happy  friendship 
by  getting  married.  The  llth  Sign  for  this  couple 
must  have  been  good  and  the  1st  bad.  While  they 
remained  friends  under  the  llth  all  went  well,  but 
when  they  became  lovers  under  the  1st  Sign  fortune 
changed.  Some  couples  were  lovers  from  the  time 
they  came  face  to  face  with  each  other,  and  others 
remained  friends  for  years,  apparently  not  even  con- 
templating marriage,  until  some  unwary  moment 
came  when  the  1st  Sign  was  working  more  strongly 
than  usual,  and  they  broke  through  the  ice.  We  rec- 
ollect a  couple  who  were  companions  for  thirteen 
years,  from  the  time  the  Moon  left  the  marriage  Sign 
until  it  came  back  to  the  marriage  Sign  again.  Their 
friends,  burdened  with  curiosity  and  anxiety  for  their 
welfare,  asked  the  lady  if  he  ever  spoke  of  marriage, 
and  she  replied  in  the  negative.  However  the  time 
came,  and  should  the  marriage  not  prove  happy  it 
will  probably  take  them  as  long  to  get  out  as  it  took 
them  to  get  in.  If  a  quickly  made  match  proves  to  be 
unhappy  it  is  quickly  broken  up  as  a  rule.  We  recol- 
lect a  case  where  a  girl  married,  and  the  bridegroom 
asked  her  for  money  before  they  left  the  building 
in  which  they  were  married.  She  there  and  then  tore 
up  the  marriage  papers  and  they  separated.  Prob- 
ably she  was  wise  in  doing  so. 

If  you  wish  to  know  whether  a  man  is  a  friend,  an 
enemy,  or  a  lover,  watch  the  position  of  the"*Moon 
when  you  are  brought  into  company  with  him,  when 


PHILANTHROPISTS 


257 


he  visits  you,  and  when  he  invites  you  to  go  out  with 
him.  If  you  habitually  meet  a  man  when  the  Moon 
is  in  the  1st  Sign  he  is  a  lover,  and  if  you  habitually 
meet  a  man  while  the  Moon  is  in  the  llth  he  is  a 
friend,  although  if  bad  planets  appear  in  the  llth,  he 
may  not  be  a  true  friend,  or  your  friendship  may  for 
some  reason  be  unfortunate.  If  bad  planets  appear 
in  the  1st  Sign,  your  lover  may  not  be  worthy,  or 
your  relations  with  him  may  be  disappointing  from 
other  causes.  If  you  habitually  meet  him  while  the 
Moon  is  in  the  12th  he  is  an  enemy.  The  position  of 
Venus  indicates  where  you  are  likely  to  meet  him, 
if  in  the  3rd  traveling  or  writing,  4th  at  home,  5th  in 


A    REAL    PHILANTHROPIST 


258 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


the  home  or  in  the  company  of.  friends,  6th  in  con- 
nection with  eating,  walking,  riding,  or  it  may  be 
fighting.  If  you  would  learn  you  must  watch  the 
events  of  each  day  as  it  comes. 

No.  109  we  call  a  wealthy  philanthropist.  It  is  said 
that  she  gave  twenty  millions  to  charitable  objects 
after  her  husband's  death ;  if  we  remember  correctly 
she  was  interested  ir  sailors.  You  will  find  the  Sun, 
Neptune,  Uranus,  and  Saturn  in  her  llth  Sign.  Good 
planets  in  the  llth  draw  favors  from  strangers,  and 
bad  planets  in  the  llth  cause  strangers  to  draw  favors 
from  us,  thus  giving  us  a  charitable  spirit.  If  the 
estimate  of  this  lady's  giving  is  correct  we  would 


ORGANIZER  OF     SALVATION  ARMY 


PHILANTHROPISTS 


259 


count  her  a  genuine  philanthropist.  Those  who  give 
fifty  or  one  hundred  thousand  out  of  ten  or  twenty 
millions  are  mere  shams.  They  are  not  giving  even 
the  widow's  mite.  To  whom  much  is  given  of  him 
shall  much  be  required. 

In  No.  110  we  have  a  man  who  has  the  same  per- 
manent planets  in  his  llth  Sign  that  No.  109  has  in 
hers.  The  Moon  and  Mercury  are  not  permanent. 
Mars  between  the  3rd  and  4th  under  good  influences 
seems  to  have  prompted  the  idea  of  the  "Army  Pa- 
rade" in  connection  with  religion.  He  succeeded  in 
striking  something  new,  and  creating  quite  a  sensa- 
tion in  the  world.  These  planets  also  govern  travel- 


LEADER   IN   ARMY   NURSING 


260 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


ing  and  writing.  The  Sun  indicates  friends  among 
the  high,  and  Uranus  friends  among  the  low ;  he  had 
them  both.  His  funeral  in  London  was  one  of  the 
most  remarkable  ever  held  in  the  world.  King  and 
beggar,  rich  and  poor,  holy  and  unholy  met  together 
touched  by  a  common  sorrow. 

No.  Ill,  whose  name  will  ever  be  remembered  in 
connection  with  her  humane  work  in  the  army,  is 
here  presented.  You  will  notice  that  Mercury  and 
Venus  form  a  conjunction  with  Mars  and  Saturn  in 
the  12th  Sign.  Four  planets  in  the  12th  including 
Mars  gives  her  a  decided  interest  in  the  battle  field. 
She  also  has  three  planets,  Uranus,  Neptune,  and  the 


FOUNDER  OF  A  UNIVERSITY 


PHILANTHROPISTS 


261 


Sun,  in  the  3rd  and  4th.  These  lead  her  to  estab- 
lish a  home  for  the  training  of  nurses.  She  also  writes 
the  following  books  as  a  result  of  her  3rd  and  12th 
running  strong:  "Notes  on  Nursing",  Sanitary  State 
of  the  Army  in  India",  Life  or  Death  in  India."  She 
came  through  the  Crimean  War  in  1854. 

In  No.  112  we  have  another  noted  philanthropist. 
She  also  has  Uranus,  Saturn,  Neptune,  and  the  Sun 
around  the  llth  Sign.  Hu  horoscope  presents  a  very 
touching  picture.  No  woman  with  an  ordinary  horo- 
scope could  fathom  the  sorrow  which  must  have  been 
hers  when  her  only  child  was  stricken  by  death.  The 
Moon  in  passing  through  the  llth  touches  by  way  of 


SUFFRAGE  LEADER 


262 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


conjunction  every  planet  in  the  chart.  She  took  the 
only  course  that  was  left  for  her  to  take  in  order  to 
relieve  the  extreme  pressure;  she  gave  her  life  up  to 
charitable  enterprises,  and  founded  in  the  University 
oi  Leland  Stanford  Jr.  one  of  the  greatest  monuments 
which  history  records,  a  monument  comparable  only 
to  her  love  for  her  child.  She  also  made  large  dona- 
tions toward  orphanages. 

Unmistakable  traces  of  the  earthquake  and  other 
events  affecting  the  University  may  be  seen  in  the 
horoscope  before  us. 

No.  113  aided  in  establishing  the  first  W.  C.  T.  U. 
She  was  also  active  in  anti-slaverv  and  woman's 


TEMPERANCE    CARTOONIST 


PHILANTHROPISTS 


263 


rights  movements.  In  1872  she  was  arrested  and 
tried  for  voting  under  the  14th  Amendment.  She  has 
been  before  every  Congress  from  1869  to  the  time  of 
her  death,  and  has  also  lectured  in  England,  and 
throughout  the  United  States,  engaging  in  eight  dif- 
ferent state  campaigns  for  equal  suffrage.  Her  horo- 
scope speaks  for  itself;  her  12th  Sign  gives  her  an 
aggressive  spirit  and  the  1st  a  powerful  intellect. 
Uranus  in  the  llth  gives  her  a  feeling  for  the  op- 
pressed, and  Saturn  in  the  3rd  indicates  traveling  On 
the  slow  order,  making  many  stops.  She  seems  to 
have  come  into  contact  with  men  chiefly  as  an  advo- 
cate of  woman's  rights.  Her  1st  Sign  is  powerful. 


LEADER  IN  W.  C.  T.  U 


264 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


No.  114,  a  great  temperance  lecturer  and  cartoonist, 
is  here  presented.  You  will  notice  Neptune,  Uranus, 
and  Mars  running  a.  close  conjunction  in  his  12th  and 
1st,  hence  his  temperance  work.  His  1st  Sign  gives 
him  a  powerful  intellect,  his  12th  an  aggressive  spirit, 
and  llth  a  large  heart. 

No.  115  is  one  of  the  most  successful  reformers  of 
the  age.  Mercury  passes  Venus  in  the  3rd  Sign  and 
this  marks  writing  and  traveling  as  a  strong  point ; 
Mercury  also  favors  public  speaking.  Mars  and  the 
Sun  form  a  conjunction  in  her  llth  Sign  giving  her 
an  aggressive  military  spirit ;  this  is  one  of  the  main 
spokes  in  the  wheel  of  reform.  Neptune  in  this  large 


A  TEMPERANCE   REFORMER 


PHILANTHROPISTS 


265 


conjunction  leads  her  to  make  a  special  fight  against 
the  liquor  habit,  and  her  llth  Sign  connects  her  with 
the  work  of  education  (She  was  a  teacher  in  early 
life).  She  also  succeeded  in  introducing  temperance 
instruction  into  the  schools  in  every  state  but  three 
of  the  Union.  She  gave  her  life  to  the  task  for  which 
she  was  so  well  fitted,  and  accomplished  a  prodigious 
amount  of  work.  Now  dead,  she  is  recognized  as  the 
greatest  and  most  successful  leader  in  all  refoims  ad- 
vocated by  the  Woman's  Christian  Temperance 
Union  in  America. 

Following  No.  115  is  another  leader  in  the  fight  for 
temperance.v     A    striking    similarity    exists    between 


AM  IT 

FOUNDER  OF  THE  "HULL  HOUSE." 


—18 


266  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

the  horoscopes  of  the  two.  They  were  both  edu- 
cators in  their  earlier  days.  This  lady  however  was 
married  and  brought  up  a  family  of  children,  so  that 
her  public  life  was  necessarily  hampered,  in  fact  her 
public  career  was  not  commenced  until  the  cradle 
rocking-  was  all  over.  Her  llth  Sign  is  stronger  and 
her  3rd  weaker  than  in  No.  115.  She  did  very  little 
writing  except  in  preparation  for  public  speaking. 
You  will  notice  Neptune  in  conjunction  with  Uranus, 
Mars,  and  the  Sun  much  the  same  as  in  No.  115. 
Neptune,  Mars,  and  Uranus  govern  liquor.  An  over- 
dose of  liquor  leads  to  fighting  or  falling  or  both. 

In  No.  117  we  have  the  pleasure  of  presenting  a 
chart  from  the  life  of  a  lady  well  known  throughout 
the  United  States  as  a  writer,  lecturer,  and  social 
worker.  She  opened  her  famous  charitable  institu- 
tion know  as  "The  Hull  House"  in  Chicago  in  1899. 
Four  good  planets  situated  between  the  llth  and  12th 
Signs  call  for  many  honors  and  distinctions.  She 
has  already  received  an  honorary  degree  from  Yale, 
and  has  had  the  pleasure  of  being  the  first  woman  in 
the  United  States  to  second  a  nomination  for  Presi- 
dent. She  should  be  extremely  successful  in  dealing 
with  children.  Her  1st  Sign  is  bad  and  Neptune 
and  the  Moon  are  in  the  conjunction  in  1913.  The 
recent  floods  in  the  Eastern  States  are  here  indicated. 
Uranus  situated  between  the  3rd  and  4th  leads  her  to 
write  upon  labor  troubles,  and  to  establish  a  Home  in 
the  interests  of  labor.  The  4th  is  the  building  Sign. 

No.  118  is  another  reformer  who  was  especially  in- 
terested in  the  welfare  of  the  Indians.  She  also  pub- 
lished works  upon  animals  and  children.  You  will 
notice  that  all  her  planets  are  in  the  llth  and  12th 
excepting  Mars,  and  Mars  was  near  the  12th  at  the 
time  of  her  birth.  This  planet  has  passed  through 
her  1st  Sign  leading  to  her  marriage  with  a  military 


PHILANTHROPISTS 


267 


man  and  his  subsequent  death.  Uranus  in  the  llth 
indicates  foreigners  and  being  in  a  heavy  conjunction 
leads  to  an  unswerving  devotion  to  the  cause  of  the 
Indians.  She  must  have  been  deeply  attached  to  ani- 
mals, and  children  should  have  had  a  powerful  attrac- 
tion for  her.  Occasionally  wre  find  persons  who  have 
a  strong  llth  and  yet  never  had  children  of  their 
own.  These  persons  are  either  associated  with  the 
children  of  others,  or  run  a  strong  public  career. 


CHAMPION  OF  THE  INDIANS 


268  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

CHAPTER  XXI. 
War. 

Could  the  world  exist  without  the  organized  battle 
field?  If  all  the  people  on  it  were  angels  it  could. 
As  it  stands  we  hardly  believe  it  possible.  Organized 
warfare  is  horrible,  but  not  to  be  compared  with  a 
one-sided  war  which  takes  the  form  of  wholesale 
slaughter,  torture,  and  desecration  of  womanhood, 
such  as  has  taken  place  on  more  than  one  continent 
during  the  past  ten  years.  If  peace  bonds  and  neu- 
trality treaties  are  to  tie  the  nations  up  hand  and  foot 
so  that  they  cannot  interfere  under  any  circumstances 
God  help  us.  Let  us  be  very  careful  lest  in  our  eag- 
erness to  crush  the  battle  field  out  of  existence  we 
merely  pave  the  way  for  unrestricted  butchery.  If 
monopolies  in  business  are  dangerous,  monopolies  in 
political  power  are  also  dangerous.  Cases  may  arise 
where  no  disinterested  party  or  parties  can  be  found 
to  arbitrate.  It  may  be  a  case  of  one  country  against 
all  foreigners,  we  have  in  mind  a  possible  case  of  this 
kind.  Within  the  last  few  years,  many  massacres 
have  taken  place;  10,000  slain  at  one  time,  and  women 
and  children  tortured,  is  not  an  uncommon  occurence. 
Only  a  few  days  since,  we  read  of  a  band  of  men  kill- 
ing their  women  and  children  rather  than  run  the 
risk  of  having  ttiem  fall  into  the  hands  of  the  enemy. 

God  watches  every  battle  that  is  fought.  You 
know  his  people  of  old  lifted  up  their  eyes  and  saw 
the  mountains  full  of  horses  of  fire  and  chariots  of 
fire.  At  another  time  he  caused  the  Sun  and  the 
Moon  to  stand  still  for  a  whole  day  above  the  valley 
of  Ajalon  until  a  great  victory  was  won.  It  is  not 
probable  that  the  Sun  and  the  Moon  actually  stood 
still.  If  it  were  a  case  of  light  they  would  not  require 
both  Sun  and  Moon  to  stand  still,  and  to  be  astro- 


WAR  269 

nomically  correct,  it  would  be  the  Earth  that  stood 
still.  We  think  that  the  astrological  conditions  were 
not  permitted  to  change  until  a  great  victory  was 
won. 

Freedom  of  conscience,  freedom  to  live  as  God 
would  have  us  to  live  is  the  great  battle  cry.  This 
is  what  our  fathers  _bled  and  died  to  secure  for  us. 

Again  we  say,  beware  lest  the  very  peace  measures 
which  on  the  face  look  so  inviting  may  pave  the  way 
toward  the  absolute  loss  of  political  and  governmen- 
tal freedom  forever. 

We  will  now  proceed  to  give  you  the  charts  of 
some  of  our  great  naval  and  military  heroes.  \Ve 
should  like  to  be  able  to  explain  exactly  the  influences 
that  led  to  victory  and  defeat  in  each  case,  but  this 
would  necessitate  having  the  charts  of  their  opponents 
as  well  as  the  charts  of  the  rulers  of  the  different 
countries.  We  can  only  call  attention  to  a  few  points 
making  for  success  or  failure. 

No.  119  is  an  Admiral  of  the  American  Xavy, 
whose  signal  success  in  destroying  or  capturing  every 
vessel  in  the  Spanish  fleet  at  Manila  is  perhaps  with- 
out parallel  in  the  history  of  the  world. 

Glancing  at  his  2nd  and  3rd  Signs,  where  the  Moon 
is  seen  at  the  time  of  the  Manila  engagement,  we  find 
the  Sun,  which  stands  for  distinction,  Mars  for  war, 
Neptune  for  water,  Uranus  for  foreigners,  and  Venus 
and  Jupiter  insuring  a  victory.  A  conjunction  of  Ju- 
piter and  the  Moon  occurs  both  in  the  Nativity  and 
the  Transits. 

This  conjunction  would  read:  distinguished  by  vic- 
torious naval  battle  with  foreigners. 

No.  119  has  traveled  perhaps  more  than  any  man 
alive,  and  is  an  omnivorous  reader.  His  letters  indi- 
cate special  talent  for  writing.  All  these  belong  to 
the  3rd  Sign,  which  runs  a  conjunction  writh  a  strong 
2nd.  He  is  also  a  splendid  disciplinarian.  When  the 


270 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


Moon  came  around  to  his  12th  Sign  it  was  whispered 
around  that  the  Maine  was  blown  up  by  an  internal 
explosion  and  that  the  war  was  not  justifiable.  The 
12th  Sign  always  brings  false  accusations,  abuse,  and 
all  the  unpleasantness  connected  with  enemies.  Peo- 
ple seem  to  think  of  things  when  the  Moon  is  in  the 
12th  Sign  that  under  ordinary  circumstances  would 
never  strike  them.  However,  as  time  wore  on  and 
the  Moon  came  back  into  the  2nd  and  3rd  Signs,  the 
former  scene  of  the  battle,  the  ship  was  raised  and  it 
wras  decided  that  she  was  blown  up  by  some  missive 
from  without.  No.  119  has  been  very  fortunate  in 
only  being  called  into  an  active  engagement  once  and 


AN   AMERICAN   ADMIRAL 


WAR 


271 


in  meeting"  with  such  phenomenal  success.  It  is 
hardly  possible  that  any  man  could  remain  in  active 
duty  all  his  life  and  meet  with  success.  He  would  be 
certain  to  drop  into  a  bad  place  in  his  horoscope  at 
some  time. 

No.  120  is  another  great  war  hero,  who  met  his 
death  in  Africa.  His  father,  grandfather,  and  great- 
grandfather were  military  men ;  also  his  elder  brother. 
At  sixteen  years  he  was  sent  to  the  military  academy. 
He  was  full  of  life  and  mischief  and  rather  destructive 
in  his  nature.  It  is  said  that  as  a  boy  window  smash- 
ing was  his  peculiar  delight.  Mars  in  conjunction 
with  the  Sun  gives  this  tendency ;  the  Sun  which 


A  BRITISH  GENERAL 


272  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

governs  light  also  governs  glass,  and  Mars  imparts 
the  destructive  element  in  human  nature.  The  En- 
glish suffragists  have  given  vent  to  their  military  in- 
stincts in  the  same  manner.  No.  120  combined  the 
qualities  of  warrior,  reformer,  and  diplomat.  From 
the  time  he  entered  a  country  until  he  left  his  one 
great  aim  was  the  uplifting  of  poor,  down-trodden 
humanity.  His  blows  were  aimed  at  the  oppressor 
and  his  kindness  to  the  suffering  won  for  him  the 
highest  esteem  in  every  country  he  visited.  Give  the 
poor  women  in  England  an  opportunity  and  they 
would  doubtless  exhibit  a  similar  spirit ;  one  thing- 
certain,  their  courage  and  determination  would  put 
a  lot  of  weak-kneed  politicians  to  shame.  No.  120 
coveted  neither  money  nor  honor.  When  he  returned 
to  England  he  refused  to  appear  at  a  public  reception 
given  in  his  honor,  and  he  never  could  be  drawn  into 
publicity ;  he  also  refused  the  offer  of  a  friend  to 
make  him  a  beneficiary  in  his  will.  The  Khedive  of 
Egypt  fixed  his  salary  at  £10,000  and  he  only  ac- 
cepted £2,000;  his  explanation  being  that  the  poor, 
miserable  Egyptians  were  ground  down  to  produce 
the  money.  We  find  a  striking  similarity  between 
the  horoscopes  of  No.  119  and  No.  120.  The  Sun  is 
in  the  2nd  Sign  for  the  former  and  in  the  1st  Sign  for 
the  latter,  but  the  same  planets  appear  in  conjunc- 
tion— the  Sun,  Mars,  Neptune,  Uranus,  and  Venus. 
Saturn  however  comes  in  with  the  Moon  and  Jupiter 
in  No.  120  while  in  No.  119  Saturn  is  in  the  llth  Sign. 
The  Moon  in  ecliptic  conjunction  with  Saturn  in  the 
Nativity  and  with  Uranus  in  the  Transits  caused  the 
death  of  No.  120.  The  Moon  then  passed  on  to  Jupi- 
ter and  the  victory  was  won  after  his  death.  The 
sad  and  untimely  fate  of  this  hero  cast  a  gloom  over 
the  whole  world. 

No.  121  is  best  known  by  his  connection  with  the 
Boer  War  in  South  Africa.     He  carries  a  strong  12th 


WAR 


273 


Sign  and  there  has  been  much  said  pro  and  con.  re- 
garding the  merits  of  the  Boer  \\jir,  some  claiming 
that  it  was  not  justifiable.  He  was  sent  to  Africa  in 
a  bad  part  of  his  horoscope,  and  consequently  it  was 
hard  up-hill  work.  There  was  no  grand  splurge,  and 
it  was  all  over.  The  Moon  at  the  opening  of  the  war 
entered  his  3rd  Sign  with  Mars ;  and  Uranus  and  Sat- 
urn stood  opposite  in  the  Transits.  Jupiter  in  the 
Transits  prevented  final  defeat.  Fortunately  Saturn 
did  not  appear  here  in  the  Nativity.  The 
Moon  passed  on,  and  when  it  came  into  conjunction 
with  the  planets  in  the  llth  Sign  he  conquered  his 
opponent  and  look  him  home  to  England  to  present 


IX   SOUTH   AFRICA 


274 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


him  to  the  Queen.  He  was  wounded  in  the  Indian 
Mutiny  at  the  age  of  nineteen  years.  At  that  time  the 
Moon  was  in  his  12th  Sign  with  Jupiter  and  Saturn, 
Venus  and  Mercury  being  elsewhere.  He  also  fought 
at  Lucknow,  Cawnpore,  and  in  Abyssinia.  About 
this  time  the  Moon  \vas  in  his  3rd  in  conjunction  with 
Mars,  Venus,  and  Mercury.  A  conjunction  of  Venus 
and  Mercury  in  the  1 2th  calls  for  distinction  through 
the  12th  Sign.  Three  planets  in  the  llth,  and  four  in 
the  12th  call  for  a  strong  public  career  in  connection 
w-ith  the  12th  Sign. 

No.   122  is  a  Japanese  Admiral  of  note.     You  will 
observe  in  his  horoscope  the  Sun,  Mars,  Neptune,  and 


A  JAPANESE  ADMIRAL 


AVAR  275 

Uranus,  all  changing  Signs.  This  we  regard  as  equal 
to  a  conjunction  of  the  four.  Possibly  they  work 
even  more  strongly  in  this  position.  These  bring  him 
distinction  in  the  Navy.  The  chart  given  shows  the 
opening  of  the  Russo-Japanese  war.  His  Moon  is  in 
the  2nd  Sign  with  Jupiter,  Venus,  and  Uranus,  the 
latter  indicating  foreigners  and  Jupiter  and  Venus 
giving  victory.  Saturn  and  the  Sun  appearing  in  a 
double  conjunction  in  the  llth  Sign  indicates  death 
to  friends.  This  indication  is  unusually  strong.  In 
1913  his  Moon  is  entering  the  1st  Sign  and  Mercury 
is  in  conjunction  with  the  Sun. 

One  character  in  history  stands  out  beyond  all  oth- 
ers as  an  illustration  of  the  power  of  supernatural  in- 
fluence in  time  of  war.  We  refer  to  Joan  of  Arc.  A 
maiden  seventeen  years  of  age,  who  previously  could 
neither  write  her  own  name  nor  ride  a  horse,  accomp- 
lishes in  one  short  week  what  the  most  distinguished 
military  men  had  failed  to  accomplish  in  seventy 
years.  She  had  also  the  additional  task  of  overcom- 
ing the  prejudice  of  the  officers  who  were  jealous 
of  her  success.  To  all  outward  appearance  one  would 
have  said  that  she  was  the  last  person  for  such  a  po- 
sition, and  in  her  waking  moments  she  felt  so  her- 
self; but  she  heard  voices,  telling  her  to  ask  the  king 
for  the  command  of  the  army,  and  she  would  be  vic- 
torious. The  time  was  even  indicated  when  she 
should  go,  and  the  sword  that  she  should  carry ;  it 
was  an  old  sword  and  may  have  belonged  to  someone 
who  had  been  victorious  in  the  past.  Joan  of  Arc 
may  have  had  the  strongest  horoscope  in  France  for 
military  achievements;  it  is  also  probable  that  the 
king's  horoscope  called  for  delivery  through  a  wo- 
man. Mars  and  the  Sun  had  evidently  occupied  a 
very  strong  position  in  her  chart.  When  she  first  re- 
ceived a  message  from  the  unseen  it  was  accompanied 
by  a  very  bright  light ;  the  Sun  controls  H^ht  arid 


276  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

Mars  fire.  Later  she  was  ill  with  a  fever,  which  also 
comes  under  Mars;  a  slowr  fever  being-  a  Mars  and 
Saturn  combination.  At  the  last  she  was  burned  at 
the  stake  and  Mars  controls  fire;  Mars  and  the  Sun 
indicate  a  notable  fire.  She  is  usually  described  as 
wearing  red,  and  red  is  governed  by  Mars.  While 
on  the  battle  field  she  wore  white  armor,  rode  on  a 
white  horse,  and  carried  a  white  banner  of  beautiful 
design.  Wre  are  not  told  what  colors  adorned  the 
banner.  White,  emblem  of  peace,  victory,  and  pros- 
perity, symbolized  her  triumph.  No  one  should  wear 
red  unless  Mars  appears  in  a  good  conjunction  in 
their  horoscope,  in  fact  all  evidence  goes  to  show  that 
colors  should  be  sparingly  used.  They  may  not  bring 
luck  good  or  bad,  but  they  indicate  the  working  of 
fate.  Saturn  it  is  supposed  governs  yellow,  and  Ur- 
anus blue.  Many  instances  might  be  given  of  the  in- 
dications of  Mars  through  the  color  red,  but  one  will 
suffice.  A  lady  who  was  employed  as  a  lion  tamer 
was  presented  with  a  beautiful  bunch  of  red  roses, 
and  she  pinned  them  on  her  dress  and  entered  the 
cage.  As  she  entered  the  lions  advanced  toward  her 
with  a  savage  growl ;  in  a  moment's  time  she  seized 
the  flowers  and  threw  them  from  the  cage ;  only  this 
she  believes  saved  her  life.  The  abandonment  of  the 
red  coat  in  the  army  should  be  another  move  in  the 
right  direction  for  various  reasons. 

Joan  of  Arc  seems  like  many  other  celebrated  per- 
sons to  have  had  her  good  planets  in  one  section  of 
her  chart  and  her  evil  planets  .in  another  section.  It 
is  said  that  after  the  crowning  of  the  king  the  voices 
which  urged  her  on  were  heard  no  more,  and  a  dread 
foreboding  took  their  place.  She  enjoyed  the  highest 
honors  and  afterward  suffered  the  basest  cruelty.  The 
saddest  pages  in  history  record  her  latter  end.  She 
was  given  over  to  her  enemies  and  burned  at  the 
stake.  In  the  first  paroxysm  of  suffering  she  called 


\YAR  277 

for  water,  then  she  exclaimed,.  "It  is  God  who  in- 
spired me" — after  which  the  word  "Jesus"  rose  from 
the  midst  of  the  flames. 

We  cannot  separate  religion  from  planetary  influ- 
ence;  just  how  the  influence  comes  may  be  matter  for 
conjecture,  but  religion  throws  light  upon  science 
and  science  throws  light  upon  religion,  despite  the 
fact  that  some  would  have  us  believe  that  man  is  a 
Higher  form  of  ape.  That  theory  has  exploded  since 
it  has  been  discovered  that  animal  life  but  not  human 
life  may  be  artificially  produced.  This  goes  to  prove 
that  man  has  a  soul  and  never  evoluted  from  an  apt 
or  any  other  animal.  Joan  of  Arc,  who  communi- 
cated with  unseen  pcr.vers  in  a  remarkable  manner, 
regarded  her  promptings  as  coming  from  the  spirit 
world  and  as  being  directed  by  God.  These  prompt- 
ings differ  in  degree  rather  than  in  kind  from  the  or- 
dinary impressions  made  upon  ordinary  men  and 
women.  The  Bible  teaches  that  good  and  bad  spirits 
surround  us,  each  struggling  for  the  mastery.  Pos- 
sibly the  planets  are  inhabited  by  spirits,  who  have 
natures  corresponding  with  the  indications  of  each 
planet.  Ths  is  one  of  many  mysteries  which  remain 
to  be  solved. 


278 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


CHAPTER  XXII. 

Sports. 

Under  this  head  is  introduced  a  set  of  men  who  en- 
tertain the  world  after  their  own  peculiar  fashion. 
Some  folks  would  consider  them  to  be  great  benefac- 
tors of  the  race,  and  others  call  them  fools,  so  you 
may  think  as  you  like,  but  one  point  strikes  us  very 
forcibly  in  glancing  at  a  few  birthdates.  If  they  only 
knew  when  to  close  their  career  and  retire  to  private 
life,  they  might  be  a  lot  better  off.  Take  No.  123,  hea- 
vy-weight champion,  for  example.  His  Moon  has  been 
in  conjunction  with  Jupiter  and  the  Sun  for  the  past 
five  years ;  no  evil  influences  entering  into  the  con- 


CHAMPION    HEAVY-WEIGHT 


SPORTS 


279 


junction,  but  the  Moon  is  passing  into  his  1st  Sign 
with  Mars  and  Uranus,  and  he  is  liable  to  get  his 
face  badly  smashed  within  the  next  few  years.  April 
19,  1913  brought  victory  to  him.  You  will  notice 
that  Johnson,  the  Negro  champion,  has  scarcely  had 
an  hour  of  good  luck  since  the  day  he  whipped  Jef- 
fries. Lawsuits,  imprisonment,  money  losses,  illness, 
and  marriage  complications  have  followed  one  anoth- 
er in  quick  succession,  giving  him  a  heavy  dose.  We 
have  not  secured  his  birthdate,  but  doubtless  his  good 
planets  appear  in  one  section  of  his  horoscope  and  his 
evil  planets  appear  in  another. 

No.    124,   winner   July   4th,    1913    is    a   lightweight 
champion  whose  Moon  has  been  running  a  conjunc- 


CHAMPION    LIGHT-WEIGHT 


280 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


tion  with  good  planets.     It  is  now  in  his  1st  with  Ji; 
piter  and  the  Sun.     Several  years  later  it  will  be  in 
the  3rd  with  Uranus  and  Saturn  on  one  side  and  Mars 
on  the  other,  then  let  him  beware. 

No.  125  won  the  running  high  jump  for  America  in 
the  Swedish  Olympics.  Besides  his  running  broad 
jump,  11  ft.  6  in.,  in  the  pole  vault,  he  put  the  16tb 
shot  42  ft.  6  in.  The  Moon  is  now  in  his  llth  Sign 
with  3  good  planets  and  none  bad ;  the  Transits  also 
run  very  strong  at  this  point.  The  9th,  10th,  llth 
and  12th  Signs,  govern  the  use  of  the  limbs,  and  these 
Signs  contain  all  his  good  planets.  The  1st  and  2nd 
contain  evil  planets.  He  also  will  have  his  ups  and 
downs  in  the  world. 


A   FAMOUS   ATHLETE 


TWELFTH  SIGN 


281 


CHAPTER  XXIII. 
Business  under  the   12th  Sign. 

Xo.  126  is  the  Chart  of  a  successful  grocer.  Food 
comes  under  the  12th  Sign  and  4  good  planets  govern 
the  12th.  Mercury  passes  Venus  in  the  llth  near  the 
12th.  This  horoscope  not  only  draws  gain  through 
the  12th,  but  it  draws  strongly  upon  friends,  and  these 
greatly  assist  in  any  business  dependent  upon  the 
patronage  of  the  public.  The  1st  Sign  is  correspond- 
ingly bad.  He  seems  to  have  been  fortunate  in  mar- 
riage but  died  at  middle  age  from  disease  of  the  brain. 
Evil  influences  in  the  1st  took  the  form  of  ill  health  in 


A    SUCCESSFUL    GROCER 


-19 


282 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


place  of  marriage  complications.     We  have  noted  the 
same  in  the  charts  of  others. 

No.  127  is  a  similar  horoscope,  birth  date  in  the 
same  year  and  month — one  being  born  on  the  14th 
and  the  other  on  the  15th  of  September.  You  will 
notice  a  very  striking  resemblance  between  the  charts. 
The  former  however  made  money  through  food- 
stuffs and  the  latter  through  horses.  The  former  was 
happily  married  but  died  from  an  affection  of  the 
brain  at  middle  age;  the  latter  did  not  suffer  from 
ill-health,  but  secured  a  divorce  about  the  same  age, 
being  separated  several  times  previously.  We  did  not 
notice  the  similarity  between  the  horoscopes  until 


LARGE  EXPRESS   BUSINESS 


TWELFTH  SIGN 


283 


we  commenced  to  write  them  up  so  that  they  are  not 
taken  at  the  same  date. 

Chart  No.  128  is  that  of  a  man  who  spent  nearly 
10  years  in  Alaska  importing  horses  and  dogs  and 
driving  a  stage.  After  clearing  $10,000  he  invested 
in  a  mine  and  lost  all.  His  good  planets  are  situated 
in  the  llth,  12th  and  1st.  Saturn  governs  money 
and  Mars  and  Uranus  govern  land.  lie  returned 
from  Alaska  and  bought  a  piece  of  land  which  he 
again  lost  through  a  lawsuit  in  connection  with  it. 
Not  yet  discouraged  he  went  to  the  North  West  and 
took  up  a  large  homestead.  We  have  not  heard  the 
result.  The  Moon  is  in  his  4th  at  the  present  time, 


HORSES   AND   MINING 


284 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


probably  when  it  passes  into  the  llth  and  12th  he  will 
make  good  on  animals  again.  He  was  wont  to  enter- 
tain his  friends  by  the  hour  with  interesting  stories 
of  the  pet  animals  he  had  owned.  He  simply  gloried 
in  animals. 

Chart  No.  129  is  that  of  an  expert  fruit  packer.  This 
lady  has  all  her  planets  around  the  12th  and  3rd  Signs 
governing  fruit  and  the  hands.  Uranus  and  Jupiter 
are  situated  in  the  llth  close  to  the  12th  and  Neptune 
is  in  the  1st  close  to  the  12th,  so  that  the  Moon  in 
the  12th  forms  a  conjunction  with  all  those  planets — 
4  planets  stand  between  the  2nd  and  3rd  Sign  drawing 
money  by  handiwork.  Two  good  and  two  bad  planets 


EXPERT    FRUIT    PACKER 


TWELFTH  SIGN  285 

appear  there  so  we  presume  she  spends  her  money  as 
fast  as  she  earns  it.  To  those  who  are  not  familiar 
with  the  work  done  by  the  fruit  packer  we  would  say 
that  it  is  usually  done  by  the  piece,  so  much  per  box. 
In  every  case  the  fruit  must  be  selected  and  laid  in 
even  rows.  In  the  case  of  dried  fruits  it  must  be 
shaped  as  well. 

In  packing  dried  fruits  this  lady  would  require  to 
select  shape  and  lay  in  straight  rows  from  100  to  150 
pieces  of  fruit  in  7  minutes,  otherwise  she  could  not 
make  wages.  As  you  may  imagine  this  requires  ex- 
pert work.  There  are  very  few  who  are  qualified  for 
it ;  only  about  1  in  50  who  try  it  can  ever  make  it  pay. 
At  a  table  of  10  women  and  girls  where  expert  hand 
work  was  required  9  out  of  10  had  the  Sun  in  the  3rd 
Sign,  that  is  the  Sign  governing  the  hands.  Those 
who  had  the  Sun  between  the  2nd  and  3rd  were  draw- 
ing fairly  good  wages  and  those  who  had  the  Sun 
between  the  3rd  and  4th  were  merely  pulling  out  an 
existence.  The  10th  girl  had  the  Sun  in  the  12th  Sign 
governing  fruit.  We  have  not  found  the  same  uni- 
formity in  qualifications  for  any  other  business  ;  pre- 
sumably it  is  the  result  of  the  piece  work  system ; 
those  who  cannot  become  experts  are  weeded  out. 
We  must  not  imagine  that  all  the  genius  is  found  in 
high  places,  far  from  it.  Even  the  girls  in  sweat 
shops  are  doing  a  work  that  few  are  qualified  to  do. 
We  believe  in  addition  to  a  suitable  horoscope  they 
must  inherit  an  aptitude  for  their  particular  line  of 
work.  If  their  parents  or  grand-parents  have  worked 
in  it  before  them  it  will  come  much  easier  to  them. 

There  is  another  point  brought  out  by  these  horo- 
scopes. Have  you  not  thought  how  strange  it  is 
that  a  man  who  has  repeatedly  lost  his  all  in  land 
should  continue  to  invest  in  land  and  even  to  take 
building  contracts  as  was  the  case  in  Chart  128.  This 
man  was  told  where  his  bad  and  good  luck  lay  and 


286  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

this  was  abundantly  corroborated  by  his  experience 
and  yet  he  persisted  in  following  along  the  same  line. 
Probably  when  the  Moon  passed  to  his  llth  and  12th 
he  would  change  his  course  but  while  the  Moon  call- 
ed for  bad  luck  in  land  and  building  he  was  determin- 
ed to  help  it  along.  Another  case  is  recalled  where 
a  man  owned  a  livery  stable.  The  stable  was  burned 
in  the  night  twice  within  a  year,  the  owner  each  time 
losing  a  number  of  valuable  horses.  His  friends 
begged  him  to  give  it  up,  but  he  is  still  running  a 
livery  stable.  These  are  merely  casual  illustrations 
of  a  great  truth.  The  mind  is  powerfully  influenced 
by  unseen  forces  and  men  follow  a  certain  course, 
not  because  it  appeals  to  reason  but  simply  because 
they  feel  that  way.  We  once  made  a  remark  similar 
to  this  in  the  presence  of  a  friend  and  he  replied. 
"Oh,  bosh !  No  unseen  force  controls  me,  I  do  a  thing 
because  I  want  to  do  it."  Our  reply  was.  "Did  you 
ever  stop  to  think  what  makes  you  want  to  do  it?" 
Men  of  this  stamp  are  the  very  ones  who  are  most 
strongly  ruled  by  unseen  forces.  A  man  who  weighs 
his  feelings  in  the  light  of  reason  and  common  sense, 
and  acts  only  as  reason  and  common  sense  dictate 
(if  there  be  such  a  man)  can  not  be  as  strongly  ruled 
as  a  man  who  simply  follows  a  certain  course  be- 
cause he  feels  that  way.  In  closing  we  are  just  re- 
minded of  a  common  custom  connected  with  the  12th 
Sign — that  of  throwing  rice  and  old  shoes  after  a 
newly  married  couple.  Cast  off  shoes  signify  cast- 
ing off  the  12th  Sign,  and  entering  upon  the  1st.  Rice 
thrown  upon  the  ground  also  symbolizes  casting  off 
the  12th  Sign. 


NUMBERS  287 

CHAPTER  XXIV 
Numbers. 

A  few  hints  will  now  be  given  with  regard  to  the 
reading  of  numbers.  These  may  open  the  way  to 
a  deeper  and  more  practical  study  of  the  subject. 
There  are  no  numbers  which  we  regard  as  bad.  They 
may  be  bad  or  good  according  to  the  horoscope.  To 
a  person  with  good  1st  and  7th  Signs,  one  and  seven 
should  be  fortunate  numbers.  With  a  good  4th  and 
10th,  forty  should  be  lucky ;  while  with  a  bad  4th 
and  10th  forty  would  be  unlucky.  One  and  seven 
pertain  to  the  1st  and  7th  Signs,  and  should  be  con- 
nected with  education,  marriage,  dress,  etc.  Seven 
hats  were  seen  hanging  in  a  row  in  the  room  of  a 
man  who  carried  a  strong  1st  and  7th,  and  we  also 
recollect  meeting  a  lady  with  the  Moon  in  a  strong 
7th  Sign,  who  had  been  laying  in  a  supply  of  clothing, 
and  on  counting  up  we  found  she  had  seven  hats  and 
seven  of  every  article  of  clothing  right  through. 
We  even  counted  seven  pairs  of  shoes  and  seven  pairs 
of  gloves ;  she  wasn't  getting  married  either,  she  was 
studying.  All  this  came  by  chance,  as  we  would  call 
it ;  she  had  not  planned  on  any  number  nor  made  any 
count  until  she  had  as  she  said  completed  her  pur- 
chases. 

In  connection  with  education  a  child's  first  year  is 
the  time  of  its  greatest  enlightenment ;  it  learns  to 
think,  observe,  and  talk.  Its  seventh  year  is  usually 
its  first  in  school  and  its  fourteenth  the  last  year  of 
compulsory  education ;  then  if  the  child  takes  a  high 
school  and  college  course  another  seven  years  will 
be  added.  This  in  a  general  way  outlines  the  system. 
In  religion  the  seventh  day  of  the  week  was  hallowed 
as  the  day  of  rest  and  dedicated  to  God.  The  seventh 
year  was  also  consecrated  and  seven  times  seven  or 


288  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

forty-nine  years  was  the  time  of  jubilee.  Jacob 
served  Laban  seven  years  for  each  of  his  daughters 
and  six  years  for  his  cattle.  Marriage  comes  under 
the  7th  Sign  and  cattle  under  the  6th.  In  Revelation 
seven  churches  are  mentioned,  also  seven  candle- 
sticks, seven  spirits,  seven  stars,  seven  lamps,  seven 
seals,  seven  angels,  seven  vials,  and  seven  plagues. 
"Silver  purified  seven  times ;"  "Render  unto  your 
neighbor  sevenfold ;"  "In  seven  troubles  no  evil  shall 
touch  thee ;"  "Until  seventy  times  seven  shalt  thou 
forgive  him"  are  other  quotations.  Thus  it  appears 
that  seven  in  the  Bible  is  often  used  for  an  indefinite 
number.  Seven  and  one  are  the  numbers  that  natur- 
ally connect  themselves  with  religious  teaching.  One 
is  emblematic  of  unity,  a  strong  plank  in  the  Christ- 
ian faith.  Much  might  be  said  regarding  one  as  used 
in  the  Bible. 

Two  is  a  money  number.  Every  piece  of  money 
has  two  sides.  You  handle  it  with  two  hands,  pick  it 
up  with  two  fingers,  amj  look  at  it  with  two  eyes. 
All  money  is  earned  by  the  use  of  two  eyes,  two  ears, 
two  hands,  and  two  feet.  In  every  transaction  there 
are  two  principals,  a  giver  and  a  receiver.  Two  or 
three  cent  stamps  are  used  on  most  letters.  Two 
stands  for  money  and  three  for  letters. 

Three  and  nine  indicate  writing  and  traveling  and  in 
a  general  way  changes  of  all  kinds.  It  has  frequently 
been  noticed  that  an  event  taking  place  twice  is  very 
liable  to  take  place  the  third  time ;  three  days,  three 
months,  and  three  years  have  also  been  observed  to 
mark  a  time  of  change,  and  more  especially  perhaps 
nine  days,  nine  months,  and  nine  years.  A  few  mo- 
ments ago  we  picked  up  a  pamphlet  on  hygiene  where 
the  remark  was  made  that  malaria  microbes  attained 
their  full  strength  in  three  days,  when  they  died,  giv- 
ing birth  to  a  fresh  lot.  In  this  way  the  patient  was 
likely  to  be  convulsed  with  chills  and  fever  on  every 


NUMBERS  289 

third  day.  Speaking  of  food,  the  writer  remarked 
that  a  taste  for  certain  foods  had  to  be  cultivated, 
and  that  a  person  should  partake  of  a  new  food  three 
times  before  deciding  whether  he  liked  it  or  not.  The 
third  time  has  been  called  the  "trying  time"  and  the 
"charm",  and  it  might  also  properly  be  called  the  hoo- 
doo. Everything  depends  upon  the  influences. 

A  person  with  a  strong  3rd  Sign  has  a  restless  na- 
ture and  is  very  fond  of  changes.  It  has  often  been 
observed  that  fits  of  despondency  last  for  three  days, 
three  months,  or  three  years,  and  it  has  been  stated 
elsewhere  that  bad  love  affairs  frequently  exhaust 
themselves  in  three  years  time.  A  body  in  the  water 
is  known  to  rise  to  the  surface  on  the  ninth  day.  As 
a  rule,  three  or  four  days  are  required  to  find  the 
body,  hold  an  inquest,  and  convey  it  to  the  friends  of 
the  deceased  so  that  if  it  rises  to  the  surface  on  the 
ninth  day  it  would  be  conveyed  to  the  friends  or  bur- 
ied on  the  thirteenth  day  and  at  this  time  the  Moon 
is  opposite  the  place  where  it  was  when  the  person 
disappeared  or  met  with  an  accident.  The  thirteenth 
day  and  thirteenth  year  are  always  eventful  periods. 
The  Moon  in  the  Nativity  comes  to  the  opposite 
point  in  the  horoscope  in  thirteen  years  and  in  the 
Transits  in  thirteen  days.  This  fact  attaches  a  pe 
culiar  significance  to  the  number  thirteen.  Always 
watch  for  changes  about  the  thirteenth  day  and  thir- 
teenth year,  when  the  Moon  comes  back  to  the  same 
place  in  the  chart.  Two  young  ladies  were  missing 
in  the  same  city.  One  suicided  by  drowning,  and  the 
other  was  kidnapped.  Newrs  regarding  them  was  re- 
ceived on  the  ninth  day  and  they  were  restored  to 
their  friends  one  dead  and  the  other  alive  on  the  thir- 
teenth day. 

Peculiarities  in  the  horoscopes  of  the  parties  inter- 
ested may  add  special  features  to  some  of  these  cases, 
but  this  is  a  common  time  to  receive  information  re- 


290  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

garding  the  missing.  The  number  three  surrounds 
the  crucifixion  of  Christ.  On  the  preceding  night,  he 
came  three  times  and  found  his  disciples  fast  asleep. 
The  third  time  he  said,  "Sleep  on  now  the  hour  is 
come."  Peter  denied  his  master  thrice.  Two  others 
were  crucified  with  him,  making  three  in  all.  There 
was  darkness  over  the  earth  for  three  hours,  and  at 
the  ninth  hour  he  passed  away.  He  rose  again  on 
the  third  day,  and  three  women  came  to  visit  the 
sepulchre. 

The  number  four  governs  everything  that  pertains 
to  the  4th  Sign.  Nearly  every  lot  of  land  is  bounded 
by  four  lines;  every  house  has  four  sides,  and  every 
room  the  same.  Nearly  every  door  and  window  and 
window  pane  is  built  on  the  square.  Curtains,  rugs, 
beds,  covers,  pillows,  pictures,  etc.  are  bounded  by 
four  sides.  The  number  four  is  stamped  on  every- 
thing about  a  house,  and  land  has  almost  invariably 
four  lines  bounding  it.  The  earth  has  four  points  of 
the  compass,  North,  South,  East,  and  West,  and  all 
calculations  regarding  it  are  made  from  these  points. 
Even  the  figure  itself  is  built  on  the  square. 

There  are  also  peculiarities  connected  with  five  and 
eleven  governing  children  and  friends.  These  Signs 
relate  to  marriage  as  well  as  the  1st  Sign.  The  num- 
ber eleven  gives  us  two  ones.  Five  has  also  been 
found  to  connect  itself  with  children.  The  Superin- 
tendent of  Schools  in  one  of  our  cities  was  called  up 
and  his  phone  number  was  55,  five  standing  for  chil- 
dren and  ten  for  parents ;  such  a  number  would  draw 
custom.  The  Superintendent  should  also  have  good 
5th  and  llth  Signs  or  it  might  draw  annoyance. 

We  have  taken  the  numbers  of  three  houses  where 
infants  were  left  on  the  doorstep.  At  5334  two  in- 
fants were  left  on  different  occasions.  Five  stands 
for  children,  three  for  traveling  or  a  gift  received 
through  a  messenger,  four  for  parents  and  a  home. 


X I'M  HERS  291 

Two  threes  indicate  two  gifts,  and  the  sum  is  fifteen, 
where  another  five  appears.  The  second  number  is 
584;  children,  money,  home.  The  third  number  is 
1310,  where  the  sum  is  5.  Three  and  five  appear  here, 
also  one.  The  3rd  child  has  an  educational  prospect 
and  the  2nd  a  money  prospect. 

The  study  of  numbers  as  they  appear  in  the  Bible 
will  be  found  very  interesting.  Birds  and  fish  are 
more  frequently  mentioned  under  the  number  five 
than  any  other  number :  five  sparrows  sold  for  two 
farthings.  Five  is  also  connected  with  marriage. 
Five  virgins  were  wise  and  five  were  foolish  when 
they  went  to  meet  the  bridegroom.  Thou  hast  had 
five  husbands.  Joseph  in  his  dream  sees  the  Sun, 
Moon,  and  eleven  stars  doing  obeisance.  To  Benja- 
min he  gave  five  changes  of  raiment,  restored  eleven 
hundred  shekels  to  his  mother.  These  are  all  refer- 
ences to  children. 

Six  and  twelve  rule  that  which  falls  under  the  6th 
and  12th  Signs;  dishes  of  all  kinds,  silver  and  table 
linen  are  sold  by  dozens  or  half  dozens.  Eggs,  fruit 
cakes,  tins,  and  packages  of  every  description  are 
sold  the  same.  Twelve  not  only  stands  for  the  12th 
Si^'n  but  indicates  completion  and  is  frequently  used 
in  holy  writ.  The  twelve  tribes  of  Israel,  twelve  dis- 
ciples, and  we  believe  twelve  commandments  are 
notable  examples.  It  is  found  connected  with  the  6th 
and  12th  Signs  as  well,  for  example,  six  cakes,  six 
wagons,  twelve  yoke  of  oxen,  six  lambs  without 
blemish,  six  cities  of  refuge,  six  measures  of  bar'ey, 
six  choice  sheep,  six  things  doth  the  Lord  hate,  six 
years  he  shall  serve  and  on  the  seventh  go  free.  Ene- 
mies and  service  come  under  the  6th  and  12th  Signs. 
The  twelfth  disciple  betrayed  Christ  and  hanged  him- 
self. 

The  grouping  of  numbers  such  as  has  been  noticed 
in  the  case  of  the  13  baby  forms  an  interesting  study. 


292  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

Much  depends  upon  the  horoscope  of  the  person  as 
to  whether  these  numbers  will  be  lucky  or  unlucky, 
but  grouping  undoubtedly  adds  strength  to  the  num- 
ber. With  ,the  few  hints  given  everyone  should  be 
able  to  read  combinations  in  numbers  and  the  num- 
bers covering  the  best  part  of  your  horoscope  should 
be  the  luckiest  numbers  for  you.  If  your  1st  and 
7th  is  good  then  one  and  seven  should  be  fortunate 
numbers,  and  so  on.  This  is  one  of  the  points  for 
you  to  watch.  As  an  example  of  reading  numbers 
take  the  house  number  4423,  whose  sum  is  13 ;  this 
brought  unexpected  changes.  Two  ladies  living  here 
were  called  to  take  a  long  journey  to  attend  the  death- 
bed of  a  parent.  Neither  ever  returned  to  live  under 
the  same  roof.  A  change  of  house  number  frequent- 
ly indicates  a  change  in  the  working  of  fate.  Those 
who  change  house  numbers  frequently  should  have  a 
very  eventful  life. 

A  peculiar  case  connected  with  a  literary  club  in 
Philadelphia  is  reported.  The  election  of  the  hun- 
dredth member  was  followed  by  death  four  times  in 
succession.  Nine  stands  for  books  and  writing  and 
two  nines  double  the  strength  of  the  number.  The 
number  100  seems  to  have  been  out  of  place.  The 
members  were  evidently  weak  in  the  1st  and  7th 
Signs  as  ladies  were  not  admitted.  The  3rd  and  9th 
Signs  were  probably  very  strong  and  99  would  be  a 
powerful  number  for  a  club  of  that  description.  It 
would  be  assuming  too  much,  however,  to  say  that  a 
number  would  kill  a  man.  This  calls  to  mind  another 
strong  number  connected  with  writing;  the  prison 
number  of  Donald  Lowrie,  the  author  of  "My  Life 
in  Prison"  which  was  19093.  It  would  almost  seem 
that  he  was  brought  to  San  Quentin  for  the  special 
purpose  of  writing  this  book.  Afflictions  frequently 
drives  us  into  paths  of  which  we  never  even  dreamt. 


DREAMS  293 

CHAPTER  XXV. 
Dreams. 

In  this  age  of  materialization  striking  traces  of  su- 
pernatural influence  are  seldom  found.  Body,  mind 
and  soul  are  so  constantly  absorbed  in  the  things  that 
pertain  to  this  life  that  it  precludes  spiritual  devel- 
opment to  a  great  extent.  God  said  that  he  could 
talk  face  to  face  With  'Jiis  servant  Moses  and  if 
there  was  a  prophet  among  them  he  could  reveal 
himself  by  vision  or  dream,  but  to  the  ordinary  man  it 
did  not  seem  that  he  could  reveal  himself. 

In  the  central  and  southern  portion  of  Europe  which 
is  the  cradle  of  tragedy  and  of  art,  ("Tears  and  art 
are  close  akin"),  the  strongest  evidence  of  the  pres- 
ence of  the  supernatural  will  be  observed.  Joan  of 
Arc  and  the  wonderful  revelation  vouchsafed  to  her 
has  already  been  considered ;  other  instances  may  be 
cited  from  the  biography  of  the  beautiful  Empress 
Elizabeth  whose  life  was  enveloped  in  tragedy.  Her 
soul,  through  suffering,  became  as  she  herself  express- 
ed it,  "dead  to  the  world,"  and  was  therefore  a  fit 
subject  to  become  a  medium  between  two  worlds. 
It  is  said  that  on  one  occasion  she  awoke  in  great 
alarm,  for  she  dreamt  that  her  cousin  had  met  his 
death  by  drowning.  A  perfect  picture  of  his  dead  body 
appeared  before  her  and  so  vivid  was  the  dream  that 
it  was  long  before  her  maids  succeeded  in  calming  her. 
On  the  day  following  a  messenger  brought  the  news 
that  her  cousin  had  died  by  drowning  on  the  previous 
evening  about  the  time  of  her  vision  as  she  had  retired 
early.  Elizabeth  had  also  written  a  poem  upon  the 
raven,  the  bird  of  ill  omen  that  had  made  its  appear- 
ance in  divers  strange  manners  before  tragic  events 
occurred  in  the  family.  Two  days  previous  to  her 
death,  at  the  hands  of  an  assassin,  she  was  sitting 


294  SOCIAL  SCIENCE 

on  the  lawn  with  a  companion  when  a  raven  flew 
down  brushed  her  face  with  his  plumes,  and  snatched 
from  her  hand  a  peach  that  she  had  been  eating.  Evil 
influences  in  the  llth  and  12th  Signs  are  here  indi- 
cated— eating  under  the  12th  and  birds  under  the  llth. 
Her  experiences  with  children  show  her  llth  Sign 
to  have  been  bad. 

The  Bible  gives  some  of  the  grandest  examples 
of  dreams  and  their  fulfillment.  Joseph's  dreams  which 
he  related  to  his  brethren  being  especially  interesting. 
His  12th  Sign  was  evidently  working  very  strongly ; 
he  dreamt  of  wheat  and  his  brethren  cast  him  into  a 
pit  and  from  thence  sold  him  into  Egypt.  They 
stained  his  coat  in  the  blood  of  a  kid  to  make  his 
father  believe  he  had  been  devoured  by  a  wild  beast. 
Food,  enemies,  and  animals  come  together.  His  3rd 
Sign  also  was  very  strong,  indicating  brethren  and 
traveling.  Many  years  afterward  in  Egypt  his  12th 
and  3rd  are  again  strongly  in  evidence,  brethren  and 
food  contributing  to  form  one  of  the  most  touching 
scenes  recorded  in  the  literature  of  the  world.  He 
also  dreamt  that  the  Sun,  Moon,  and  stars  did  obei- 
sance to  him.  This  is  a  metaphor  connecting  the 
twelve  tribes  of  Israel  with  the  Solar  System.  Just 
here  wre  would  say  that  it  is  altogether  likely  that 
there  are  more  planets  in  the  Solar  System  than  we 
have  any  knowledge  of.  Vulcan  betwixt  Mercury 
and  the  Sun  has  become  a  fixed  fact,  and  there  may 
be  other  planets  beyond  Neptune.  We  can  only  deal 
with  those  of  which  we  have  definite  knowledge. 

Marjry  more  prophetic  dreams  might  be  mentioned. 
Pharaoh  also  dreamt,  foretelling  the  famine  in  Egypt. 
The  dreams  of  the  chief  butler  and  chief  baker  differ 
from  the  others  inasmuch  as  they  were  fulfilled  in  a 
short  space  of  time.  In  many  cases  our  dreams  of  the 
present  day  would  be  prophetic  but  we  do  not  keep 
a  record  of  them  and  unless  something  occurs  to  re- 


DREAMS  295 

mind  us  of  them  within  a  very  short  time  they  are 
entirely  forgotten.  You  dream  according  to  the  po- 
sition of  the  planets  in  your  horoscope  just  the  same 
as  you  think  in  line  with  the  position  of  the  planets. 

It  is  probable  however  that  dreams  are  often  exag- 
gerated by  physical  conditions  ;  a  feverish  brain  or  a 
disordered  stomach  is  liable  to  develop  a  trifling  in- 
cident into  a  tragedy,  so  that  it  will  be  well  not  to 
attach  too  great  importance  to  dreams.  In  a  general 
way  they  may  be  read  just  the  same  as  events  in  our 
horoscopes.  While  the  Moon  is  in  the  1st  Sign  you 
should  dream  according  to  the  indications  of  the  1st 
Sign ;  when  in  the  2nd  you  should  dream  according 
to  the  indications  of  the  2nd  Sign,  noting  also  the  po- 
sition of  the  Earth,  and  conjunctions  that  occur.  11 
any  point  in  the  chart  is  very  strong  you  are  liable 
to  hear  from  it  at  any  time,  for  it  rules  the  horo- 
scope. Detective  Burns  in  his  sketches  on  "Crime" 
relates  the  following:  He  said  to  a  prisoner,  "How 
did  you  chance  to  meet  this  man?"  "I  began  to 
dream  continually,"  said  the  prisoner,  "of  being  in  a 
locality  unfamiliar  to  me,  and  soon  had  occasion  to 
visit  a  strange  town.  I  recognized  the  street  as  seen 
in  my  dreams,  and  when  I  beheld  a  hitching  post  in 
the  form  of  a  Negro  boy  holding  up  a  ring  I  recollected 
that  there  should  have  been  a  man  there;  he  was  not 
there  and  I  came  twice  to  see  him  and  the  third  time 
he  was  there.  I  walked  up  and  said,  'You  are  waiting 
for  me/  ':  After  some  conversation  each  discovered 
that  he  had  found  the  man  he  was  looking  for.  Had 
it  been  a  good  deed  they  were  planning  it  might  have 
been  called  a  case  of  providential  guidance.  It  was  a 
criminal  proceeding,  however,  and  the  influences 
were  evil.  Uranus  stands  for  foreigners  and  a  hitch- 
ing post  for  the  12th  Sign.  Uranus  and  enemies  are 
here  indicated.  Such  an  incident  gives  a  very  vivid 
picture  of  the  power  of  dreams  and  unseen  influ- 
ences. 


RETURN 


CIRCULATION  DEPARTMENT 

198  Main  Stacks 


LOAN  PERIOD  1 
HOME  USE 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS. 

Renewls  and  Recharges  may  be  made  4  days  prior  to  the  due  date. 

Books  may  be  Renewed  by  calling  642-3405. 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 


AUG2.4 


FORM  NO.  DD6 


UNIVERSITY 


Bbx. 


Tb    lOOlo 


RSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


